WO1997039355A1 - Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs - Google Patents

Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1997039355A1
WO1997039355A1 PCT/US1997/006988 US9706988W WO9739355A1 WO 1997039355 A1 WO1997039355 A1 WO 1997039355A1 US 9706988 W US9706988 W US 9706988W WO 9739355 A1 WO9739355 A1 WO 9739355A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pharmaceutical grade
making
botanical
drug according
botanical drug
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1997/006988
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Tasneem A. Khwaja
Elliot P. Friedman
Original Assignee
Pharmaprint, Inc.
University Of Southern California
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Pharmaprint, Inc., University Of Southern California filed Critical Pharmaprint, Inc.
Priority to EP97922474A priority Critical patent/EP0900375A1/en
Priority to AU28131/97A priority patent/AU716155B2/en
Priority to JP09537454A priority patent/JP2000512621A/en
Publication of WO1997039355A1 publication Critical patent/WO1997039355A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K36/00Medicinal preparations of undetermined constitution containing material from algae, lichens, fungi or plants, or derivatives thereof, e.g. traditional herbal medicines
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K36/00Medicinal preparations of undetermined constitution containing material from algae, lichens, fungi or plants, or derivatives thereof, e.g. traditional herbal medicines
    • A61K36/18Magnoliophyta (angiosperms)
    • A61K36/185Magnoliopsida (dicotyledons)
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/04Immunostimulants

Definitions

  • the present invention relates generally to botanical materials and methods for transforming such materials into medicinally useful and pharmaceutically acceptable forms. More particularly, the present invention relates to the use of compositional and activity fingerprints in the processing of botanical materials to produce botanical drugs which qualify as pharmaceutical grade compositions which are suitable for use in clinical settings to treat and/or ameliorate diseases, disorders and/or conditions.
  • composition manufacturing is based on control over the composition and bioactivity for each manufactured batch. This standardization and control provides reproducible material in the predictable and consistent treatment of patients. Herbal medicines, produced from botanical materials, have presented a unique problem for manufacturers desiring the control, reproducibility, and standardization that are required of pharmaceuticals. This problem is primarily due to the plurality of components contained in an herbal medicine and the large variation in composition and potency due to raw material growing and harvesting conditions.
  • Plants have been, and continue to be, the source of a wide variety of medicinal compounds.
  • various forms of botanically derived materials have been used to treat countless different ailments.
  • the botanical materials have typically been in the form of powders made from of one or more plants or plant parts or extracts derived from whole plants or selected plant parts. These powders and extracts are for the most part complex mixtures of both biologically active and biologically inactive compounds.
  • plant powders and extracts have been used widely for medicinal purposes, there are a number of problems associated with the use of such medicaments.
  • the complex chemical nature of the botanical materials makes it difficult to use the botanical materials in any type of controlled and predictable manner.
  • the potential variations in the chemical composition of different batches of material obtained from different plant harvests makes such materials unsuitable for use in clinical situations.
  • the suspected active component is typically mixed with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and subjected to further studies in laboratory animals and eventual clinical trials in humans.
  • these types of drugs are considered to be pharmaceutical grade because they contain a single or at most a small number of well-characterized compounds which are present in known quantities.
  • Pharmaceutical grade drugs are advantageous in that they allow careful tracking of the effects of individual compounds in treatment protocols. Further, the dosage of the drug can be carefully controlled to provide relatively predictable medicinal action.
  • a disadvantage of the relative purity of such pharmaceutical grade drugs is that the potential for complex and synergistic biological activity provided by naturally occurring plant materials is reduced because of the isolation of the drug from its natural environment. The study of isolated products may represent also artifacts produced by breakdown of sensitive biological/botanical complexes. The potential benefit provided by such synergistic activity is believed by many industry experts to be outweighed by the clinical risks associated with the use of complex plant materials which are not well characterized or controlled in a clinical setting.
  • Mistletoe extracts have been studied in some detail. Mistletoe belongs to the genus Viscum (family,
  • Mistletoe is a parasite which grows on a variety of deciduous trees including apple, cherry, oak, ash Hawthorn, lime and acorn. Mistletoe and extracts of mistletoe have been used for centuries in a wide variety of therapeutic settings. The effectiveness of mistletoe as a remedy for treating a multitude of ailments has been the subject of a great deal of folklore, superstition and mystical accounts.
  • mistletoe Although many of the early uses for mistletoe may have been based more on fantasy than on fact, the reputation of mistletoe as a powerful elixir is well deserved because this parasitic plant contains a rather large variety of complex and pharmacologically potent components.
  • mistletoe and the pharmacological properties of extracts from mistletoe have been subjected to a more rigorous scientific investigation.
  • mistletoe extracts have been suggested for use in treating a variety of specific diseases including cardiovascular illnesses, especially hypertension and arteriosclerosis; cancer and arthrosis.
  • Fermented mistletoe extracts marketed under the tradenames ISCADOR ® , HELIXOR ® , and PLENOSOL ® have been proposed for use in treating a number of specific diseases.
  • ISCADOR ® and HELIXOR ® have been injected subcutaneously while PLENOSOL ® has been administered both intracutaneously and intravenously.
  • mistletoe extracts vary widely in type and amount depending upon the species of mistletoe, the location where the plant is grown, the time of year when the plant is harvested, the particular host tree, the extraction procedure used and a number of other factors.
  • mistletoe extracts The principal classes of components in mistletoe which have been found to provide pharmacological activity include phenylpropanoids, lectins, phenylpropans, viscotoxins, alkaloids, flavonoids, lignans, amines, phenyl carboxylic acids and polysaccharides.
  • mistletoe is exemplary of the state of the art with respect to the plant materials which have been studied in detail.
  • This invention provides a method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
  • the method is the process of "pharmaprinting. "
  • the method comprises the steps of: providing a botanical material which comprises a plurality of components which have a given biological activity; removing a representative aliquot from the botanical material; separating the aliquot into a plurality of marker fractions wherein each of the marker fractions comprises at least one of the active components; determining the degree of the given biological activity for each of the marker fractions to provide a bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot; and comparing the bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to provide a bioactivity fingerprint comparison to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug based on the bioactivity fingerprint comparison.
  • This invention also provides a method comprising the steps of : providing a botanical material which has a given biological activity, said botanical material comprising a plurality of components; separating a representative aliquot of the botanical material into a plurality of marker fractions wherein at least one of the marker fractions comprises at least one active component; determining the degree of the given biological activity for each of the marker fractions to provide a bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot; and comparing the bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
  • one or more of the marker fractions contain one active component.
  • the method may also comprise the additional steps of : determining the amount of the active components in each of the marker fractions to provide a quantitative compositional fingerprint of the aliquot and comparing both the quantitative compositional and bioactivity fingerprints with a quantitative compositional and bioactivity fingerprint standard to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
  • the method may also comprise the additional steps of: determining a total bioactivity of the aliquot of the botanical material and comparing the total bioactivity of the aliquot with that of a total bioactivity of a standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade drug.
  • the invention also provides a method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug, the method comprising the steps of: providing a botanical material which comprises a plurality of components which have a given biological activity and wherein each active component has a standardized bioactivity profile; removing a representative aliquot from the botanical material; separating the aliquot into a plurality of marker fractions wherein each of the marker fractions comprises at least one of the active components; measuring the amount of each of the active component (s) present in each of the marker fractions; calculating the bioactivity of each of the marker fractions based on the amount of each active component present and the standardized component bioactivity profile to provide a calculated bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot; comparing the calculated bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to provide a bioactivity fingerprint comparison to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug is obtained based on the bioactivity fingerprint comparison.
  • the method of the invention is useful to make a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug from any botanical material which has a given or desired biological activity.
  • the botanical material is an extract made from plant material such as an aqueous or organic extract such as an alcoholic extract or a supercritical carbon dioxide extract.
  • the botanical material is a powdered plant material, a seed oil, an essential oil or the product of steam distillation.
  • the botanical material is a homogeneous material .
  • the botanical material may be any botanical material .
  • Suitable botanical materials include, but are not limited to, materials of plants commonly known as Aloe, Bilberry, Black Cohosh, Chamomile, Chaste tree, Chestnut, Echinacea, Evening Primrose, Feverfew, Garlic, Ginger, Ginkgo, Ginseng (Asian) , Goldenseal, Green tea, Guggulipid, Hawthorn, Ivy, Kava, Licorice, Milk Thistle, Passion Flower, Pumpkin, Pygeum, Rosemary, Siberian Ginseng, Saw Palmetto, St. John's Wort, Stinging Nettle, Valerian, etc.
  • the botanical material may also be a mixture of plant materials including, but not limited to, mixtures of materials of plants such as Saw Palmetto and Pumpkin seed; Echinacea and Goldenseal; St. John's Wort and Valerian.
  • the active component (s) may be one of the following chemicals: acetogenins, alkaloids, carbohydrates, carotenoids, cinnamic acid derivatives, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, flavonoids, glycosides, isoprenoids, macrocyclic antibiotics, nucleic acids, penicillins, peptides, phenolics, polyacetylenes, polyketides, polyphenols, polysaccharides, proteins, prostaglandins, steroids and terpenoids.
  • the bioactivity/clinical indication for the botanical may be associated with any disease, disorder or condition of humans or other animals.
  • the methods are useful to produce pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs for treatment and/or amelioration and/or prevention of human and/or veterinary diseases, disorders or conditions.
  • Exemplary indications include, but are not limited to, an allergic/ inflammatory disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, a cancer or a central nervous system disorder, a gastrointestinal disorder, a metabolic disorder, nausea or a disorder induced by a microbial organism or a virus.
  • the aliquot may be separated into both biologically active and inactive components.
  • the marker fractions may comprise a class of related components .
  • This invention also provides a method of preparing a pharmaprint for a pharmaceutical grade drug. Furthermore, this invention provides for a pharmaceutical grade drug prepared by the methods described above.
  • pharmaceutical grade when used in this specification means that certain specified biologically active and/or inactive components in a botanical drug must be within certain specified absolute and/or relative concentration range and/or that the components must exhibit certain activity levels as measured by a disease-, disorder- or condition-specific bioactivity assay.
  • the disease, disorder or condition may afflict a human or an animal.
  • components means discrete compounds (i.e. chemicals) which either are present naturally in a botanical drug or have been added to the botanical drug so as to prepare a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug having components within a defined bioactivity range (s) and/or compositional range (s) .
  • active components (s) means one or more component (s) for which the summation of the individual component (s) activity in a disease-specific bioassay accounts for a substantial portion of the observed biological activity of botanical material. Preferably, the summation of the active components' activities accounts of the majority or greater than 50% of the observed biological activity.
  • fractions typically means a group of components or class of structurally similar components having defined parameters such as solubility, molecular weight range, polarity range, adsorption coefficients, binding characteristics, chemical reactivity or selective soluability. Most frequently fractions will be the product of chromatographic separation techniques, i.e., flash chromatography, preparative high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) , preparative gas chromatography, preparative thin layer chromatography, affinity chromatography, size exclusion chromatography, liquid-liquid chromatography e . g. , counter-current chromatography or centripetal chromatography.
  • HPLC high performance liquid chromatography
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic representation of a procedure in accordance with the present invention which is used to establish standard chemical and/or bioactivity fingerprints against which subsequent processed botanical materials are compared during production of pharmaceutical grade drugs.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic representation of a procedure in accordance with the present invention which is used to process botanical materials into pharmaceutical grade drugs.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic representation of a procedure for isolating different classes of biologically active components .
  • FIG. 4 shows the result of the fractional analysis for Saw Palmetto from a commercially available product.
  • the vertical axis is in weight/weight percent.
  • the two axes are the fractions of the various fatty acids and fatty acid esters and the solvent system.
  • FIG. 5 shows the inhibition of specific 3 H-DHT binding by increasing concentrations of Saw Palmetto extract #3.
  • the molar concentrations were calculated assuming a molecular weight of 200 for the active components.
  • FIG. 6 shows the inhibition of specific 3 H-DHT binding by increasing concentrations of lauric acid ethyl ester.
  • FIG. 7 shows the inhibition of specific 3 H-DHT binding by increasing concentrations of linoleic acid ethyl ester.
  • FIG. 8 shows the chemical analysis of five different commercially available Saw Palmetto products.
  • the vertical axis is in weight/weight percent.
  • the other axes are the fatty acids and fatty acid esters and the source material.
  • FIG. 9 shows the chromatographic steps for the analysis of the mistletoe extract.
  • FIG. 10 shows the fractional analysis for St. John's Wort.
  • the vertical axis is in weight/weight percent.
  • the horizontal axes are the fractions and the chemical constituents .
  • FIG. 11 shows the results of the chemical analysis for St. John's Wort.
  • the vertical axis is the mg per 10 ml of product and the other axes are the chemical compounds and the commercial source.
  • FIG. 12 shows the fractional analysis for ginger.
  • the vertical axis is in weight/weight percent.
  • the remaining axes are fraction number and the specific chemical components .
  • FIG. 13 shows the results of the chemical analysis of five commercially available ginger products.
  • the vertical axis is in mg per capsule.
  • the horizontal axes are the ginger constituents and the commercial source.
  • the present invention provides a method for producing botanical drugs which may be classified as being of pharmaceutical grade.
  • the method is designated "Pharmaprinting.
  • the pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs made by the method of the present invention are particularly well-suited for use in clinical studies and more importantly for use in treatment of patients. The method insures that the drug being used for a particular protocol will be of consistent quality and consistently suitable for use as human and veterinary prophylatic or therapeutic agents.
  • the present invention provides the ability to closely control the quality, dosing and clinical effectiveness of botanical extracts and other botanical materials, e.g., botanical extract and mammalian tissue derived biological preparation.
  • One aspect of the present invention involves the establishment of the chemical and/or bioactivity fingerprint standards for various botanical materials. Once established, the fingerprint standards are used in drug production procedures to insure that the botanical materials meet pharmaceutical grade requirements. Specific quantitative and biological fingerprints are presented which have been established for a number of botanical materials as a further aspect of the invention. These fingerprints are useful for determining if a particular botanical material meets levels of pharmacological activity and composition requirements for a particular treatment regimen. Such a determination is important to insure that clinical studies and patient treatment with the botanical materials are based on consistent and verifiable extract composition parameters.
  • This invention is useful in providing botanical materials which are sufficiently characterized and whose compositions are consistent between batches, so that they can be precisely dosed and used effectively in clinical settings.
  • the methods described herein provide an assurance that the results of a clinical trial will be ⁇ reproducible.
  • the processed material may include a plurality of active components which exhibit a given biological activity and plurality of inactive components which do not directly exhibit the biological activity of interest.
  • an aliquot is removed from the botanical material and subjected to a quality assurance or standardization procedure.
  • the aliquot is a representative aliquot of a homogeneous botanical material. The procedure involves separating the aliquot of botanical material into a plurality of marker fractions wherein each of the marker fractions includes at least one of the active components or in some cases one of the inactive components.
  • the amount of active component or inactive component in each of the marker fractions is determined in order to provide a quantitative fingerprint of the aliquot.
  • the degree of biological activity for each of the marker fractions is also determined to provide a biological activity fingerprint for the aliquot.
  • the chemical and/or biological activity fingerprints of the aliquot are then compared to corresponding fingerprints which have been established for a pharmaceutical grade drug. If the fingerprints of the botanical match the standard fingerprints, then the botanical is identified as a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug. If not, then the botanical may be modified so as to provide a match with the standard fingerprints or may be rejected.
  • the method of developing a Pharmaprint for a botanical when a range of putative active components is known begins with a literature review. It involves reviewing the chemical literature, the biological literature, the published bioassays and clinical data for the botanical. Particularly useful sources of information are the NAPRALERT computer database managed by Dr. Norman Farnsworth in the Program for Collaborative Research in the Pharmaceutical Sciences, University of Illinois, Chicago; Leung and Foster, Encyclopedia of Common Natural Ingredients Used in Food, Drugs and Cosmetics, 2nd Ed. John Wiley & Sons: New York, NY, 1996; Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals, ed. N.G.
  • the appropriate bioassay(s) is tied to a clinically relevant endpoint(s) .
  • the bioassay(s) should be quantitative over a wide concentration range.
  • an IC b0 curve Inhibitory Concentration 50%
  • an appropriate K, curve is prepared.
  • a thorough chemical and biological analysis of both putative active components and chromatographic fractions of the botanical is then performed.
  • the results are analyzed to prepare a quantitative analysis of the biological activity for each of the chemical components in the sample.
  • the bioactivity of the sample as a whole is compared to the bioactivity of the individual components. At this point the individual chemical components can be correlated with a clinically relevant endpoint . Similar methodologies may be applied to bioassays measuring stimulatory effects.
  • the components should, when combined, account for a substantial portion of the biological activity.
  • the combined activity will account for at least 25% of the total activity.
  • the summation of the individual active components' activities account for the majority or greater than 50% of the observed biological activity. More preferably, the isolated individual components are responsible for more than 70% of the activity. More preferable still, the isolated individual components are responsible for greater than 80% of the biological activity.
  • Another consideration will be to select as few active components as possible to be part of the Pharmaprint . Fewer active components are important for practical considerations in raw material acceptance and manufacturing.
  • a correlation is established between the relevant chemical components and the bioactivity. Once a satisfactory correlation is established, it may not be necessary to perform the biological fingerprints on each sample. A chemical analysis of the appropriate components and/or marker fractions. Rather, each sample of the botanical of interest will suffice to account for most of the biological activity and establish that a given botanical sample is pharmaceutical grade .
  • the present invention may involve one of the following procedures.
  • One procedure as schematically outlined in FIG. 1, involves establishing the compositional and bioactivity fingerprint standards for a given pharmaceutical grade botanical drug. Once the fingerprint standards are established, then the actual processing of the botanical into a pharmaceutical grade drug can be carried out as schematically outlined in FIG. 2.
  • the initial step in establishing the chemical and/or bioactivity fingerprint for a given botanical involves separating the extract or powder into one or more groups as represented by step 1 in FIG. 1. These groups are separated out and identified based on their potential as markers (which may or may not comprise active components) for the fingerprint which is to be established for the processed botanical material .
  • the putative components or groups of putative components which are chosen and identified as potential markers will vary widely depending upon the botanical being processed and the pharmaceutical use. There should be at least two putative markers selected for each botanical . The number of potential markers is may be more than five and can be as high 15 to 20 or more for complex botanical extracts or powders.
  • the potential markers are identified and selected, for the most part, based on their potential biological activity or contribution to biological activity for a given pharmaceutical application.
  • the same botanical may be used for preparing an extract with a different extraction procedure in order to optimize the specific bioactive constituents. Markers which have no apparent biological activity by themselves may be separated out and may be included as markers for use in the fingerprint. These "proxy" markers may be desirable as an internal standard where the markers' presence is indicative of other active components necessary to provide a substantial portion of the overall observed biological activity for the botanical drug.
  • the initial separation of the botanical into various groups of putative markers is accomplished by conventional separation techniques ranging from simple extraction to complex affinity chromatography including gel filtration chromatography, flash silica gel chromatography and reverse phase chromatography.
  • bioactivity of each of the markers is determined as depicted by step 2 in FIG. 1.
  • the particular bioassay used to determine bioactivity of the botanical is chosen based upon the intended use for the botanical .
  • the bioassay preferably will provide a reflection of the putative markers' bioactivity with respect to the condition or indication which is to be treated with the botanical.
  • the bioassay results obtained in step 2 are used to identify the components having the desired bioactivity (step 3) and those which are less active or essentially inactive (step 4) .
  • Each of the groups identified in steps 3 and 4 is then analyzed quantitatively to determine the amount of each component present in each group.
  • the results of the bioassays and quantitative compositional assays are then used to prepare a bioassay fingerprint and/or a chemical fingerprint for the botanical as depicted by step 5 in FIG. 1.
  • acceptable ranges of bioactivity and/or chemical composition are determined. This is done primarily based upon establishing acceptable ranges of bioactivity and quantitative amounts for each marker which provide for the desired pharmacological activity of the processed material as a whole.
  • various combinations of active and inactive marker fractions may be evaluated to establish potential increases in desired bioactivity resulting from combinations of the active and inactive components.
  • the bioassay and quantitative fingerprints which are established in step 5 provide an accurate identification of the botanical which can be used in establishing the dosage regimens and treatment schedules which are necessary for clinical use.
  • the dosage regimens and treatment schedules are established using conventional clinical methods which are commonly employed when investigating any new drug.
  • the processed material which is used to determine the dosage and treatment schedules must be matched with and meet the requirements of the fingerprints established in step 5. This method insures that the dosage and treatment schedules are effective and reproducible since the processed materials used in the dosage and scheduling studies all have the same fingerprints in accordance with the present invention.
  • the bioassay and quantitative fingerprints which are determined by the general procedure as set forth in FIG. 1 are used as part of the manufacturing procedure for producing pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs.
  • the fingerprints are used as part of a quality assurance or standardization procedure to insure that a given botanical contains the appropriate compounds and is processed correctly to provide a botanical drug which will perform the same clinically as the material which has been standardized and tested in accordance with the procedure set forth in FIG. 1.
  • FIG. 2 An exemplary procedure for producing pharmaceutical grade botanicals in accordance with the present invention is shown schematically in FIG. 2.
  • the botanical of interest 21 is first processed by extraction, powdering or other manufacturing process to form a processed botanical material 22.
  • a sample of the processed material 22 is then analyzed to establish whether or not it matches the fingerprint requirements established during the standardization procedure of FIG. 1. This quality assurance or standardization procedure is depicted at 23 in FIG. 2. If the processed material meets the previously established fingerprint requirements for the particular material, then it is approved as being of pharmaceutical grade as represented by step 24. If the material is close, but does not quite match the standard fingerprint, then it is modified as required to match the fingerprint standards (step 25) .
  • the modification of the processed material to meet fingerprint standards may be done by a variety of ways .
  • the methods of further processing botanicals may including additional extraction of the botanical, selective extraction, selective processing, recombination of batches (e . g. mixing high and low dose batches to prepare the pharmaceutical grade material) or the addition of various compounds, as required. If the botanical is substantially outside the fingerprint ranges for both bioactivity markers and quantitative markers, then the batch is rejected (step 26) .
  • the quality assurance standardization step 23 used to determine if a given botanical is pharmaceutical grade involves obtaining a uniform sample, preferably a homogeneous sample, or aliquot of the botanical which is to be tested.
  • the sample should include the active components which contribute to the observed biological activity of the material and produce the bioactivity and/or chemical fingerprint of the previously determined standard.
  • the sample will also include one or more inactive components. Inactive components are those which may not have a direct measurable biological activity. Inactive components include the following categories: components with activity so low that they do not account for a substantial portion of the activity; components whose presence indicates the presence of other bioactive components and can act as proxy markers for these components; inactive components that are chemically or biologically inactive in the relevant assays.
  • the sample i ⁇ preferably only a small aliquot of the botanical material being tested. Accordingly, it is important that a uniform sample, preferably a homogeneous sample, be obtained which is representative of the entire batch of material.
  • FIG. 3 A more detailed schematic is shown in FIG. 3 showing the initial separation of the different components present in an aqueous extract of a botanical. Sequential extraction and precipitation are used to isolate the active components in either the aqueous or the organic phase.
  • the scheme in FIG. 3 is particularly well suited for separating the classes of water-soluble active components from a botanical such as mistletoe.
  • FIG. 3 An exemplary general method for separating plants into major classes of chemical components is set forth schematically in FIG. 3. Primarily fresh plants (including leaves, roots, flowers, berries and stem) should be used. Specific plant parts, such as the leaves, flowers, stems or root may be used if desired.
  • the specific part or whole plant may be frozen at liquid nitrogen temperature. This facilitates grinding and also preserves the integrity and potency of the active components.
  • the pulverized powder is extracted with distilled water repeatedly. If desired, the extraction may be carried out with hot water, alcohol, other organic solvents, aqueous alcohol, dilute acetic acid or any combination thereof.
  • the actual temperature chosen is preferably close to or at the boiling temperature of water. It is preferred that the overall bioactivity of the aqueous extract be initially determined.
  • the combined water extracts are subjected to a specific bioassay, e . g. , a test for inhibiting the growth of bacteria in Petri dishes if the drug is to be used as antibacterial.
  • tests against cell cultures of cancer cells are conducted preferably if the drug is intended for use as an anticancer agent.
  • bioactivity units contained in an extract per ml are calculated (bioactivity units are defined as the number of dilution of this extract needed to inhibit 50% growth of bacterium or cancer cell in test system) .
  • bioactivity units for a stimulatory effect, e . g . , immunostimulation can be calculated.
  • the plant is extracted according to the procedure as set forth in FIG. 3 to separate it into major components (e . g . saponins, terpenoids, lipids, alkaloids, nucleic acids, proteins and carbohydrates) .
  • major components e . g . saponins, terpenoids, lipids, alkaloids, nucleic acids, proteins and carbohydrates
  • Each separated group of components is tested for bioactivity as needed. This may point to activity (e.g. in protein and alkaloid factions as in Viscum album) .
  • the active class or classes of compounds are further separated into individual components by affinity chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or gas chromatography.
  • the components with major contribution towards biological activity are quantified on the basis of weight and specific bioactivity units. These components provide the fingerprint to establish the pharmaceutical requirements for the original herbal extract.
  • the bioactivity units per ml of the pharmaceutical grade extract provide a way to establish exact doses for clinical studies.
  • each fraction is analyzed to determine the amount of active component therein and provide a quantitative fingerprint of the sample.
  • the quantitation of each fraction can be achieved using any of the known quantitative analysis methods. Exemplary quantitation methods include gravimetric analysis, spectral analysis or the use of quantitative detectors, such as those used in gas chromatography or high performance liquid chromatography and other separation systems. Other suitable quantitative analytical methods include analysis by enzymatic, radiometric, colorimetric, spectrophotometric, fluorescent or phosphorescent methods and antibody assays such as enzyme linked immunosorbant assay (ELISA) or radioimmunoassay (RIA) .
  • ELISA enzyme linked immunosorbant assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • the results of the quantitative analysis of each fraction are used to prepare a quantitative fingerprint of the sample.
  • the fingerprint is composed of the quantity of component in each of the marker fractions and the identity of the component.
  • This quantitative fingerprint is then compared to the known standard fingerprint which has been established (FIG. 1) in order for the material to be considered as pharmaceutical grade. If the quantitative fingerprint of the sample falls with the range of quantities sat forth for the pharmaceutical grade fingerprint, then the material may be identified as being of pharmaceutical grade.
  • the individual marker fractions may be subjected to biological assays. The biological assays which are used to test the various fractions are the same as those used for the standard fingerprint and will also depend upon the particular clinical use intended for the material .
  • the bioactivity fingerprint generated for the material is compared to the standard bioactivity fingerprint which has been established in order for the material to be considered as pharmaceutical grade. If the bioactivity fingerprint of the sample falls within the range of bioactivities set forth for the pharmaceutical grade fingerprint, then the material is identified as, and approved as, being of pharmaceutical grade.
  • the method of pharmaprinting a botanical when the putative active components are not known also begins with a literature review. It involves reviewing any chemical literature, biological literature, published bioassays or clinical data available for the botanical or for botanicals with related activities. Based on the disease state, a series of relevant bioassays is chosen. The activity of the total sample or extract is analyzed in the bioassays. Those bioassays that show activity are then used to analyze fractions of the botanical for which the putative active components are not yet known. The fractionation is based on the usual methods, e . g. , separation by dielectric constant, polarity, size or absorptive power. The fractions are then analyzed to determine which fraction is responsible for the activity.
  • each active fraction is refractionated to isolate the individual putative active components, i.e., pure chemical compounds. Based on knowing the individual chemical compounds and knowing their quantitative biological activity, a quantitative potency curve may be drawn and the 50% inhibitory concentration (IC b0 ) for each individual chemical component may be determined. If the putative active components are agonists, then other parameters (binding, activation, response) will be needed. In the general case, the bioassay will consist of appropriate tests of the stimulatory or inhibitory effects of the constituents, fractions or entire extract, followed by an appropriate quantitative evaluation of those effects.
  • inhibition by the subject material may be assessed and expressed typically via the determination of an IC 50 value, or other suitable measure (e.g., K > ) .
  • IC 50 value or other suitable measure (e.g., K > ) .
  • K > suitable measure
  • two or more individual components in the fractions may be acting synergistically. For example, if you have three fractions each responsible for 10% of the bioactivity (their uncombined additive bioactivity is 30%) but the combined fractions are responsible for 100% of the activity. In that case the fractions are acting synergistically. By repeated pair-wise recombination of fractions or looking at larger fractions, any synergistic activity will be discovered. Once two fractions show synergy, they are then refractionated as above, and pairs of individual fractions or pairs of isolated components are studied to find the individual components that act synergistically. Three way comparisons of individual components or fractions may also be studied.
  • the explanations include decomposition, synergy, or many many active components such that no individual fraction shows activity.
  • the first step would be to fractionate each initial fraction and see if active components appear in the bioassay. It that does not succeed, the fractions should be recombined and assayed to determine if decomposition of the actives is taking place. If decomposition is taking place, the appropriate measures as described above should be taken. If there is no decomposition, then alternative methods of fractionation should be tried. Eventually, large enough or appropriately sized or selected fractions will show activity. If synergy is a suspected problem, then proceed as in the synergy section described above.
  • botanicals exemplified in the detailed description include the following: Agnus Castos, Aloe, Asian Ginseng, Bilberry, Black Cohosh, Chamomile, Chestnut, Coriolus Versicolor, Echinacea, Evening Primrose, Feverfew, Garlic, Ginger, Ginkgo, Goldenseal, Green Tea, Guggulipid, Hawthorn, Ivy, Kava, Licorice, Milk Thistle, Mistletoes (American, Asian and European varieties) , Passion Flower, Pumpkin, Pygeum, Rosemary, Siberian Ginseng, Saw Palmetto, St. John's Wort, Stinging Nettle and Valerian. Additionally combinations of one or more botanical materials such as Eschinacea and Goldenseal, may be processed in accordance with the present invention. 5.2.1. METHODS OF PROCESSING AND EXTRACTING BOTANICAL MATERIALS
  • the botanical material may be processed to form an aqueous or organic extract of the whole plant or a selected part of the plant.
  • the botanical material can also be 5 processed in whole or part to form a powder.
  • Many of the botanicals of interest are commercially available as powders, aqueous extracts, organic extracts or oils. In one embodiment, extracts of the plant material are preferred
  • a typical root it may be sliced, frozen or
  • solvents may be used to extract the dried botanicals, for example acetone, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, ethanol, isopropanol and supercritical carbon dioxide (Sipro et al . , 1990, Int. J. of Food Science and Technology 2j5: 566-575 and references therein) .
  • the medicinal products are the seed oil or dried berries.
  • a hexane or supercritical carbon dioxide extract is prepared.
  • Many preparations are commercially available, for example PermixonTM or TalsoTM.
  • supercritical carbon dioxide extraction of a botanical see Indena, European Patent No. 0 250 953 Bl .
  • the botanical may be crushed and extracted with an appropriate solvent (90%) in a soxhlet (Elghamry et al . , 1969, Experienia 2j5(8) :828-829) .
  • the botanical may also be ethanol extracted (Weisser et al. , 1996, The Prostate 28 . :300-306) .
  • the dried material may be prepared in a variety of ways of freeze-drying including drying via microwave, cooling with liquid nitrogen and pulverizing; drying at 70 "C under vacuum for a duration of 10 hours; or air-drying in the shade (List and Schmidt, Hagers Handbuch der Pharmazeutician für für für psupra, Springer-Verlag:New York, 1993, 1973-79; Araya et al . , 1981, Journal of Compara tive Pa thology, 135-141) . Teas, dilute aqueous extracts, also known as decoctions, may be made in 60-80 * C water (Nosel and Schilcher, 1990) . Extraction is more efficient when the particle size is less than .25 mm (List and Schmidt, Phvtopharmaceutical Technology. CRC Press:Boca Raton, FL, 1989) .
  • John's Wort two-fold increases of hypericin have been reported in oil preparations in which the material has been further extracted with alcohol, and mixed with the oil (Georgiev et al., 1983, Nauchni Tr. -Vissh Inst . Plovid. 3_0: 175-183) .
  • an alcohol-water preparation may be prepared of the botanical (Dyukova, 1985, Farmi tsiya 34 :71- 72; Georgiev et al . , 1985, Nauchni Tr. -Vissh Inst . Plovid. 3_2:257-263; Wagner and Bladt, 1994, Kowalewski et al . , 1981, HerJba Pol .
  • a tincture of a botanical such as St. John's Wort, may be prepared by using drug or freezing ethanol soaked, and filtering and preserving in dark bottles (List and H ⁇ rhammer, 1993) .
  • Some botanicals such as St. John's Wort, are both temperature and light sensitive.
  • the material should be dry packed with a refrigerant or shipped under refrigeration and protected from light and air.
  • St. John's Wort hypericin content has been shown to drop significantly in powdered extract, tablet and juice preparations when stored at temperatures of 60 * C for more than six weeks (140"F) .
  • Dry extracts stored at 20 * C were found to remain stable for at least one year (Adamski et al . , 1971, Farm . Pol . 12:237-241; Benigni et al . Hvpericum. Piante Medicinali: Chimica, Farmacologia e Terapia. Milano: Inverni &.
  • St. John's Wort constituents, hyperforin and adhyperforin found in oil preparations are highly unstable, especially when exposed to light, and can degrade in as little as 14 days (Meisenbacher et al., 1992, Planta Med. , 351-354) . Stability (in absence of air) was increased to six months in a preparation extracted with ethanol. Similarly, up to four xanthones and several flavonoids including quercetin and 13' , 118- biapigenin have been detected suggesting these may be among the active constituents in external preparations (Bystrov et al . , 1975, Tetrahedron Let ters 12:2791-2794) .
  • Each of the marker fractions will include one or more of the active or inactive components.
  • the marker fractions are established on an individual basis for each botanical material being tested. For some materials only a few marker fractions are required. For other more complex materials, there may be numerous marker fractions. For example in mistletoe, Viscum album protein extract, the preferred protein marker fractions are those fractions which are separated based on the sugar binding affinity of the fraction. However, different parameters for identifying and separating the materials into the marker fractions may be established based upon the types of components present in the botanical material. Separation of the sample into the marker fractions may be accomplished by any of the conventional separation techniques including liquid chromatography and extraction procedures. The same procedures which were used to establish the standard fingerprints should be used.
  • Liquid column chromatography is a useful separation technique with affinity chromatography based on the specific binding ability of the compounds (e.g., carbohydrates and target enzymes) being particularly used.
  • the solvent is removed and the material is dissolved in an appropriate medium for the bioassays.
  • appropriate media include DMSO, ethanol, various detergents, water and an appropriate buffer.
  • solvent will depend on the chemical nature of the component being analyzed and the compatibility with the assay system.
  • Exemplary biological assays may include any cell proliferation assays, such as the measurement of L 1210 cell inhibition, immune activity or inhibition of critical enzyme which relates to specific diseases .
  • Examples of other transformed cell lines which can be used for bioassays include HDLM-3 Hodgkin's lymphoma and Raji Burkitt's lymphoma, hepatoma cell line, primary or established cultures of human/animal cell lines which carry specific cell receptors or enzymes .
  • the results of the biological assays are used to prepare a bioactivity fingerprinting of the material.
  • the fingerprint can be as simple as an assay of two selected marker fractions.
  • the fingerprint can include numerous different bioassays conducted on numerous different fractions.
  • the same assay may be conducted on different marker fractions.
  • different assays may be conducted on the same marker fraction.
  • the combination of bioassays will depend upon the complexity of the given botanical material and its intended clinical use.
  • the bioassays will be the same as those conducted in establishing bio
  • Enzymatic and receptor based assays are preferable in the practice of this invention. Assays are chosen either based on accepted enzymatic assays for a clinical disorder or they are chosen from relevant assays for a given clinical disorder. It is important to choose appropriate bioassay. Ideally, a bioassay should be rugged, that is reproducible over time and show a quantitative dose response over a wide concentration range. An issue faced with a botanical for which the active components are not known is the choice of a relevant bioassay. Here, the human therapeutic use will serve as a guide to pick assays known in the art based on possible mechanisms of action. The mechanism of action should be consistent with a clinically relevant endpoint . There are a wide array of clinically relevant assays based on enzymatic activity, receptor binding activity, cell culture activity, activity against tissues and whole animal in vivo activity.
  • the array of bioassays might include adrenergic receptors, cholinergic receptors, dopamine receptors, GABA receptors, glutamate receptors, monoamine oxidase, nitric oxide synthetase, opiate receptors, or serotonin receptors.
  • the array of assays may include adenosine A x agonism and antagonism; adrenergic ⁇ lf a 2 l ⁇ agonism and antagonism; angiotensin I, inhibition; platelet aggregation; calcium channel blockade; ileum; cardiac arrhythmia; cardiac inotropy; blood pressure; heart rate; chronotropy; contractility; hypoxia, hypobaric; hypoxia, KCN; portal vein, potassium depolarized; portal vein, spontaneously activated; or thromboxane A 2 , platelet aggregation.
  • bioassays may be used: cholesterol, serum HPL, serum total; serum HPL/cholesterol ratio; HDL/LDL ratios; glucose, serum - glucose loaded; or renal function, kaluresis, saluresis, and urine volume change.
  • bioassays may be used: allergy, passive cutaneous anaphylaxis; bradykinin B 2 ; contractility, tracheal; histamine H 2 antagonism; inflammation, carrageenan; leukotriene D 4 antagonism; neurokinin NK X antagonism; or platelet activating factor, platelet aggregation.
  • bioassays may be used: cholecystokinin CCK A antagonism; cholinergic antagonism, peripheral; gastric acidity, pentagastrin; gastric ulcers, ethanol; ileum electrical stimulation modulation; ileum electrical stimulation spasm or serotonin 5-HT 3 antagonism.
  • Candida albicans Escherichia coli ; Klebsiella pneumonaie; Mycobacterium ranae; Proteus vulgar is; Pseudomonas aeruginosa ; Staphylococcus aureus, methicillin resistant; Trichomonas foetus ; or Tri chophyton mentagrophytes .
  • Escherichia coli Klebsiella pneumonaie
  • Proteus vulgar is; Pseudomonas aeruginosa ; Staphylococcus aureus, methicillin resistant; Trichomonas foetus ; or Tri chophyton mentagrophytes .
  • Tri chophyton mentagrophytes Tri chophyton mentagrophytes.
  • assays based on enzymes or receptors include the following: aldol-reductase; angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) ; rat androgen receptor; CNS receptors; cyclooxygenase 1 or 2 (Cox 1, Cox 2) ; DNA repair enzymes; dopamine receptors; estrogen receptors; fibrinogen; GABA A or GABA B; /3-glucuronidase; lipoxygenases, e.g., 5-lipoxygenase; monoamine oxidases (MAO-A, MAO-B) ; platelet activating factor (PAF) ; prostacyclin cyclin; prostaglandin synthetase; serotonin assays, e.g., 5-HT activity or other serotonin receptor subtypes; serotonin re- uptake activity or thromboxane synthesis activity.
  • ACE angiotensin converting enzyme
  • CNS receptors CNS receptors
  • enzymatic assays are available from a variety of sources including PanlabsTM Ine (Bothell, WA) and NovascreenTM (Baltimore, MD) . Additional assays include: ATPase inhibition, benzpyrene hydroxylase inhibition, HMG-CoA reductase inhibition, phosphodientrase inhibition, protease inhibition, protein biosynthesis inhibition, tyrosine hydroxylase inhibition, testosterone-5 ⁇ -reductase and cytokine receptor assays.
  • Cell culture assays include activity in cultured hepatocytes and hepatomers (for effect on cholesterol levels, LDL-cholesterol receptor levels and ratio of LDL/HDL cholesterol) ; anti-cancer activity against L 1210 cells, modulating receptor levels in PC12 human neuroblastoma cells; cell culture activity of luteinizing hormone (LH) , follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) or prolactin; Ca 2+ influx to mast cells; cell culture assays for phagocytosis, lymphocyte activity or TNF release; platelet aggregation activity or activity against HDLM-3 Hodgkin's lymphoma and Raji Burkitt's lymphoma cells, antimitotic activity, antiviral activity in infected cells, antibacterial activity (bacterial cell culture) and antifungal activity.
  • LH luteinizing hormone
  • FSH follicle stimulating hormone
  • Tissue or whole animal assays may also be used including anti-inflammatory mouse ear dermatitis, rat paw swelling; muscle contractility assays, vasodilation assays; or whole animal carbon clearance tests. These assays are available from a variety of sources including PanlabsTM Inc. (Bothell, WA) .
  • the anticancer effects of drug can be studied in a variety of cell culture systems; these include mouse leukemias, L 1210, P388, L1578Y etc. Tumor cell lines of human origin like KB, and HeLa have also been used.
  • tumor cells are grown in an appropriate cell culture media like RPMI-1640 containing 10% fetal calf serum. The logarithmically growing cells are treated with different concentrations of test material for 14-72 hours depending upon cell cycle time of the cell line. At the end of the incubation the cell growth is estimated by counting the cell number in untreated and treated groups. The cell viability can be ascertained by trypan blue inclusion test or by reduction of tetrazolium dyes by mitochondrial dehydrogenase.
  • the ability of a drug to inhibit cell growth in culture may suggest its possible anticancer effects. These effects can be verified in animals bearing tumors, which are models for human disease (Khwaja, T.A., et al . (1986) Oncology, 43 (Suppl. 1) : 42-50) .
  • the most economical way to evaluate the anticancer effects of an agent is to study its effects on the growth of tumor cells in minimum essential medium (MEM) containing 10% fetal calf serum.
  • MEM minimum essential medium
  • the drug-exposed cells (in duplicates) are incubated in a humidified C0 2 incubator at 37 °C for 2-4 days, depending upon the population-doubling time of the tumor cells.
  • NCI National Cancer Institute
  • KB cells a human nasopharyngeal carcinoma
  • the cell growth inhibition is determined by estimating the protein content (Lowry's method) of the drug- treated and untreated controls.
  • NCI has also recommended the use of suspension culture of mouse leukemia P388 for the evaluation of anticancer potential of plant extracts and related natural products.
  • mice leukemia L1210 cells cultured in microtiter plates for in vi tro assays for anticancer activity.
  • the cell population-doubling time of leukemia L1210 is 10-11 h and a drug exposure of 48 h (3-4 generations of logarithmic growth) is used for the evaluation of its antitumor activity.
  • All stock solutions and dilutions were made with sterile 0.9% NaCl solution.
  • the cell cultures were seeded at 2-5 x 10" cells/ml in duplicates for each inhibitor concentration in a microtiter place (0.18 ml/well) .
  • the inhibitors were added in 0.02 ml volume to achieve 1:10 dilutions in each case.
  • the covered microtiter plate was incubated for 48 h in a humidified C0 2 incubator containing 5% CO 2 in air. At the end of the incubation period aliquots of each well were added to a measured volume of isotonic saline and counted in an electronic cell counter. Because mistletoe extract at high concentrations caused rapid cellular fragmentation, the test microtiter plates were routinely checked under microscope prior to cell number counting so that the results were not compromised. The cell viability was determined by trypan blue exclusion. The results were calculated by plotting percent cell growth inhibition (as compared to cell density of the saline-treated controls) versus log of drug concentration and expressed as the concentration which caused 50% inhibition (ID 50 ) in cell growth as determined from the graph.
  • cytotoxic effects of a drug on a tumor cell line can also be evaluated but these experiments need a longer period of time and are more expensive.
  • drug- treated cells are washed free of drug and then plated in soft agar or an appropriate medium and the cellular viability is estimated by the ability of the surviving cells to multiply and form microscopic colonies. The number of cellular colonies obtained with certain drug concentrations is compared with those obtained from untreated controls to evaluate cell kill or cytotoxic activity.
  • mistletoe extract we have used suspension cultures of EMT-6 cells (a mouse mammary adenocarcinoma) . These cells were grown in Eagle's MEM (F14) containing 10% dialyzed fetal calf serum and antibiotics.
  • the cell suspension was spun and the pellet suspended in Spinner's medium supplemented with 10% dialyzed fetal calf serum (70 cells/ml) , plated in plastic Petri dishes and incubated for 2 h to permit cells to attach. At this time cells were exposed to various concentrations of extract for 2-24 h. Then, the medium was removed and replaced with drug-free medium and the dishes incubated for 5-7 days. The colonies were stained with methylene blue (0.33% in 0.01% KOH) and counted with an automatic colony counter. The plating efficiency of EMT-6 5 cells was 46%. (Khwaja et al . , 1986, Oncology, 43 (Supy . 1 ) :4250) .
  • the antiviral activity of different drugs can be 10 ascertained in cell culture of human cell lines like HeLa or H9 lymphoma cells. These cells are infected with virus and the virus is allowed to propagate in cell cultures. The ability of virus to produce cell lysis or cytopathic effects is taken to as end point. Thus HIV infection of H9 cells 15 carries production of multinucleated cells. The cytopathic effects, if reduced or eliminated by certain concentrations of the drug, will point to its potential as anti-HIV agent. These results can be validated by estimation of viral enzyme in the cell cultures, e.g., by studying the amount of the 20 expression of viral reverse transcriptase. A decreased expression of the viral enzyme would support antiviral effect of the drug treatment (Khwaja, T.A. U.S. Patent No. 5,565,200; J. Levy et al . 1984, Science 225: 840) .
  • NMR magnetic resonance
  • mass spectrum fragmentation analysis is typically used.
  • the determination of the type of chromatography will depend on the chemical components most likely responsible for the bioactivity. For example if the bioactivity is likely due to fatty acids, the fatty acids are esterified and the 5 esters analyzed on a GC. For organic compounds with alcohol groups, they are modified to prepare ethers, silyl derivatives or other less polar functional groups. These derivatives are then suitable for analysis by GC (Steinke et al., 1993, Planta Med . . 59:155-160; Breu et al . , 1992,
  • HPLC Reverse-phase HPLC
  • the following example sets forth the general production of pharmaceutical grade extracts of mistletoe which are effective in the treatment of AIDS and certain cancers. Initially the extract was separated into different classes of its chemical entities (components) . It was found that the major biological activity was associated with its protein fraction (>95%) and the residual activity was separated in the alkaloid fraction. The quantitative fingerprint is based on the measurement of specific protein fractions which have _ different binding affinities for various sugars.
  • the standard pharmaceutical grade quantitative fingerprint requires that the fractions contain between 0.01 and 1.0 mg/ml of Ca ++ dependent sugar-binding proteins which are capable of binding with lactose, galactose, melibiose, N- 0 acetyl-D-galactosamine or fucose and exhibit an inhibitory concentration of below about 0.50 pg/ml.
  • “Inhibitory concentration”, as used in this section is a measure of the sugar-binding protein's ability to inhibit the in vi tro growth of certain cancerous cell lines. The inhibitory _ concentration is expressed in ⁇ g of sugar-binding protein per ml of extract solution which is required to cause a 50% inhibition of the growth of a particular cancerous cell line.
  • the preferred cell line which is used to measure inhibitory concentrations is a leukemia cell line identified as L1210. 0 This particular cancerous cell line is available from a number of commercial sources. L1210 calls have been used in the past as a screening system for testing drug efficacy. Details regarding the culturing and growth of L1210 cell are described in a number of scientific articles ( Oncology 43 :42- _ 50 and Experien tia 1980, 3_6:599-600) .
  • Other cell lines which can be used to determine inhibitory concentrations include KB cells or other rapidly growing cell lines which demonstrate repeatable results. Other parameters like inhibition o? macromolecule synthesis in a given cell culture line may be used.
  • the standard fingerprint of the extract preferably requires that the standard fingerprint of the extract must also contain one or more Ca* 4 non-dependent sugar-binding protein fractions which are capable of binding with lactose, galactose, melibiose, N- acetyl-D-galactosamine, or fucose.
  • the quantitative level of the Ca ++ non-dependent sugar-binding proteins must be between about 0.1 and 2.0 mg/ml for each fraction.
  • the inhibitory activity of the one or more Ca ++ non-dependent sugar-binding protein fraction is preferably below about 0.5 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the mistletoe powder (processed biological material) is prepared according to any of the known powdering procedures. Any type of mistletoe may be used; however, to maintain the rejection rate of extracts at a low level, it is preferred that the mistletoe extract be prepared from the Viscum album, coloratum species, which is found on oak trees in South Korea or the Viscum album L. species, which is commonly found throughout Europe. Further, it is preferred that the mistletoe be flash frozen shortly after harvesting and then ground to a powder in the frozen state. Flash freezing with liquid nitrogen or similar cryogenic liquid is preferred. The entire mistletoe plant may be used in preparing the powder. The preferred harvesting time is when the berries are ripe.
  • the fresh soft part of the mistletoe plant may be pressed to squeeze the cell-sap, which, on dilution with water or sterile physiological saline, will provide an aqueous extract .
  • the mistletoe powder is extracted using a substantially pure aqueous solution.
  • the extracting solution may include additional components to enhance the extraction process.
  • the extract may include a salt such as calcium chloride or sodium chloride in an amount sufficient to enhance extraction of proteins from the mistletoe sap. Salt concentrations on the order of 0.02 M are preferred.
  • Detergents such as TRITON ® x- 100 may also be added to enhance extraction of protein from the plant cell walls.
  • the extractant is preferably buffered with 0.02 M Tris to a pH of about 7.8.
  • the extraction procedure should utilize an amount of extractant relative to the amount of mistletoe being extracted which will produce levels of proteins as sat forth below.
  • mistletoe powder Preferably, between about 100 and 400 grams of mistletoe powder will be extracted with between about 1000 and 4000 ml of aqueous solution.
  • the powder is mixed in the solution and left to stand for from one to four hours.
  • the powder particulates remaining after the extraction period are separated by filtration, centrifugation or other conventional separation technique to produce the aqueous mistletoe extract.
  • the mistletoe extract prior to pharmacological analysis of its contents, is preferably assayed for its overall biological activity.
  • the biological evaluation of the extract is carried out on the basis of its inhibition of the growth of mouse leukemia L1210 in culture. From this initial test, the IC 50 (concentration in ⁇ g/ml of the extract which will cause 50% inhibition in the growth of L1210 cells as compared to untreated controls) of the extract is determined.
  • the biological activity of the extract is expressed in terms of "activity units" (A.U.), which represent the ratio of concentration of the extract (expressed in ⁇ g extract/ml) to its IC 50 value ( ⁇ g/ml) .
  • 1 ml of 1 % extract (10 mg total extract) must contain 100 or more activity units. Extracts with lower than 100 A.U. values are rejected, and those with a passing grade are further analyzed to establish specific values and ratios of its biologically active components as described below.
  • the separation of the mistletoe extract into its various protein fractions is preferably conducted by affinity column chromatography as schematically represented in FIG. 10. The separation is preferably conducted in two stages in order to separate the proteins which require Ca ++ for binding to sugar and those proteins which are non-Ca ** dependent .
  • a buffer which contains ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) or other chelating agent is used to elute the Ca +T dependent sugar-binding proteins from affinity columns which have been treated with the specific sugars of interest, i.e. lactose, galactose, melibiose, N-acetyl-N-galactosamine, and fucose.
  • the resulting fractions are then analyzed for quantitative protein content.
  • Other affinity columns based on similar principles of chromatography may also be used, e.g. mannose, rhamnose, maltose, asialofeutin, glucosamine, and n-acetyl glucosamine.
  • the appropriate levels and activities of the lectins in the extract which are specific for these sugars can be established by measuring their levels in extracts which meet the criteria for sugar-specific lectins set forth above .
  • the columns are then eluted with buffers that each contain the sugar which corresponds to the sugar bound to the respective affinity columns.
  • Sepharose ® 4B is a preferred column material.
  • the various fractions resulting from this second elution contain the non-Ca * ' dependent sugar-binding proteins. The protein content of each of these fractions is also quantitatively determined.
  • Protein quantitation can be performed using any of the conventional quantitative analytical procedures including ninhydrin based tests, spectroscopic determination and Bio ⁇ Rad or Pierce analysis.
  • the use of multiple buffers as described above is preferred so that the total level of each type of protein is determined.
  • Affinity column chromatography is preferred because it is a conventional separation technique which is well-known to those of ordinary skill in the art and which is well-suited for separating the proteins from the extract based on their sugar-binding specificity. Other separation procedures may be utilized provided that an accurate measurement of each of the selected sugar-binding proteins is provided.
  • An alternate method for analyzing the lectin (sugar- binding protein) content, alkaloidal fraction and viscotoxin levels in the extract involves the use of ammonium sulfate.
  • the total proteins of mistletoe preparation are precipitated with 70% ammonium sulfate.
  • the preparation is centrifuged and the precipitate, which contains a mixture of the viscotoxins and the sugar-binding proteins (lectins) , is separated on an acid-hydrolysed Sepharose 4B column.
  • the bound lectins can be eluted from the column with buffers containing specific sugars as described above.
  • Affinity chromatography to identify the specific sugar-binding proteins can be carried out as also described above.
  • the unbound proteins which initially fan through the column contain viscotoxins which are quantitated according to conventional protein quantitative analysis.
  • the ammonium sulfate-supernatant, which contains the alkaloidal fraction, is lyophilized and the alkaloids are extracted with chloroform.
  • the chloroform residue provides the total alkaloids which are also quantitated by weighing or another conventional method.
  • the five Ca ++ dependent and non-Ca + * dependent sugar- binding protein fractions which are used to generate fingerprints are those that bind with lactose, galactose, melibiose, N-acetyl-D-galactosamine, or fucose.
  • the concentration of each of the sugar binding proteins (both Ca *4 dependent and non-Ca *+ dependent) is between 0.1 and 2.8 weight percent of the total protein content of the extract.
  • Tables 2 and 3 set forth the weight percent ranges for pharmaceutical grade extracts prepared from European and Korean mistletoe, respectively.
  • each sugar-binding protein with respect to the total protein content of the extract will remain fairly constant irrespective of extraction conditions.
  • concentration levels of the various sugar-binding proteins will vary in each extract depending upon a number of factors including the relative amounts of mistletoe and aqueous extractant, the length of extraction and temperature. It is preferred that the extract be analyzed to determine the concentration levels of the various specified sugar-binding proteins and that these concentration levels be used as the primary method of determining whether an extract meets the pharmaceutical grade requirements of the present invention.
  • the extract may be diluted or concentrated to achieve protein concentration levels outside the preferred concentration ranges provided that the relative percentages of the sugar-binding proteins remain within the limits set forth in Table 1, for general mistletoe extracts, and Tables 2 and 3, for European and Korean mistletoe extracts, respectively.
  • the extract once it has been identified as pharmaceutical grade, may be dehydrated and stored as a powder for rehydration and used at a later time to treat AIDS or cancer.
  • the preferred concentration level of the Ca * * dependent sugar-binding proteins in the extract is within the range of about 0.01 to 1.0 mg/ml.
  • the method of the present invention can be carried out by measuring only one of the Ca ** dependent sugar-binding proteins to establish if the extract is within pharmaceutical grade limits. However, it is preferred that two or more of the sugar-binding protein levels be measured, e.g. galactose, lactose and/or N-acetyl-D-galactosamine specific proteins. Even more preferably, the extract is analyzed to determine if the concentration levels of all five Ca ** dependent sugar-binding proteins meet the above quantitative fingerprint limits. The method can also be carried out by measuring various combinations of 3 or 4 of the specified Ca* * dependent sugar-binding proteins. Concentration ranges and inhibitory activity ranges are set forth in Tables 4, 5 and 6. TABLE 4
  • the concentration level of the non-Ca ** dependent sugar- binding proteins in the extract must be within the range of about 0.10 to 2.0 mg/ml.
  • the method of the present invention can be carried out by measuring only one of the non-Ca ** dependent sugar-binding proteins to ' establish if the extract is within pharmaceutical grade limits. However, as above, it is preferred that two or more of the non-Ca ** dependent sugar-binding protein levels be measured. Even more preferably, the extract is analyzed to determine if the concentration levels of all five non-Ca ** dependent sugar-binding proteins meet the required concentration limits.
  • the most preferred method involves determining the complete protein finger print, i.e. the protein concentration in all ten sugar- binding protein fractions. In this most preferred embodiment, the extract is not identified or otherwise considered to be a pharmaceutical grade extract unless all ten protein fractions have the required concentration levels set forth above.
  • the standard fingerprint parameters are set forth in Tables 4, 5 and 6.
  • the bioactivity of the various protein fractions is used in combination with their respective concentration levels to identify the extract as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
  • the various proteins which make up each of the Ca ** dependent sugar-binding protein groups must each exhibit an inhibitory concentration of between about 0.001 and 0.5 ⁇ g/ml.
  • the proteins which make up each of the non-Ca ** dependent sugar-binding groups must also each exhibit an inhibitory concentration of between about 0.0001 and 0.5 ⁇ g/ml .
  • the method for measuring inhibitory action is set forth in numerous scientific articles including the references mentioned previously. It is preferred that the inhibitory action be measured in vi tro with respect to leukemia L1210 cells. This procedure is preferred because L1210 cells are readily available, are easily maintained by well-known culturing procedures, and provide consistently reproducible results.
  • the inhibitory concentration of each sugar-binding protein fraction is determined by adding increasing amounts of the fraction and determining when cell growth is inhibited by 50% as compared to a control culture. It is preferred that both the concentration level and the inhibition concentration of each of the sugar-binding proteins be measured and that they all be within the ranges set forth above and in Tables 4, 5 and 6 in order for the extract to be identified as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
  • the extract is identified as pharmaceutical grade if the above limits are met. If one or more requirements are not met, i.e., the sample fingerprint does not match with the standard fingerprint, the extract is rejected.
  • the extracts which are identified as pharmaceutical grade are then used in treatment programs for treating diseases such as AIDS and cancer.
  • the pharmaceutical grade extracts are not only useful in treating AIDS, but may be used to treat any individual with a suppressed immune system. If the extract has protein levels which are above the limits set forth above, the extract may be diluted as required to bring the extract protein concentrations down to the established limits. If the extract protein levels are below the limits, the extract i ⁇ rejected and not identified as pharmaceutical grade.
  • the extract be initially screened for overall activity before beginning the more rigorous analysis of the sugar-binding protein fingerprint. It was discovered that extracts which do not meet certain total activity levels will also not meet the more specific protein fingerprint requirements of the present invention.
  • the activity units are determined in the same manner as for the individual protein fraction(s) with the only difference being that the entire extract is being tested.
  • the extract must have and activity of greater than 100 AU. Table 7 sets forth the results of initial screening wherein a number of different mistletoe extracts were screened to determine their biological activity using the L1210 cells as previously described. As can be seen, commercial preparations such as ISCADOR do not meet the initial screening test and therefore are not pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
  • the ISCADOR extracts also do not meet the more stringent specific protein fingerprint requirements of the present method.
  • the extracts n-T4GEN and T4GEN which do meet the specific protein concentration fingerprint of the present invention, both have activity levels well above the minimum of 100 A.U.
  • the screening procedure is preferred because it allows non- pharmaceutical grade extracts to be identified relatively quickly without having to conduct the more time consuming protein fingerprinting. Once an extract passes this initial screening step, it then still must meet the further protein fingerprint requirements in order to qualify as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
  • the fraction of the extract which contains protein that does not bind to sugar be analyzed to provide a further fingerprint that is used in identifying whether the extract is pharmaceutical grade.
  • a fraction containing unbound protein remains after separation of the sugar-binding proteins from the extract.
  • This unbound protein fraction contains an "alkaloid" fraction and a viscotoxin fraction.
  • the amount of alkaloids in the alkaloid fraction should be about 10 to 50 ⁇ g per ml of 1 percent extract.
  • the amount of viscotoxin in the protein fraction should be about 10 to 40 ⁇ g per ml of 1 percent extract.
  • a 1 percent extract is one where 1 gram of total initial non- dehydrated plant material is extracted with 100 ml of aqueous extractant.
  • the amount of viscotoxins and alkaloids will increase proportionally as the amount of plant material extracted per 100 ml increases.
  • the extracts may be used as is or diluted with suitable pharmaceutical carriers and administered according to known procedures for treating AIDS or a particular cancer.
  • the extract is preferably injected subcutaneously in doses ranging from 0.01 to 1 ml of a 1 percent extract. Extracts which are more concentrated, such as 2 and 5 percent extracts, may be used. Extracts with even higher concentrations may also be used depending upon the dosage required.
  • the injections are preferably given twice a week, but may be given more often.
  • the extract is injected directly into the tumor or may be injected subcutaneously.
  • BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS An extract identified herein as n-T4GEN was tested to demonstrate its anti-HIV activity. n-T4GEN was analyzed and found to meet the sugar-binding protein fingerprint set forth in Table 6. The amount of protein in the alkaloidal and
  • n-T4GEN extract was prepared from Korean mistletoe. n-T4GEN was added to culture wells in an amount sufficient to provide a concentration of 1 A.U. of a 1 percent extract per ml of test solution (equivalent to 10 ⁇ g of extract per ml of test solution) . This concentration of n-T4GEN inhibited HIV-induced cytopathic effects in H9 lymphoid human leukemia cells with concomitant reduction in viral reverse transcriptase levels in the infected cells. Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infects T4 lymphocytes.
  • HIV Human immunodeficiency virus
  • the virus produces giant multinucleated syncytial cells. After 3-6 days of viral infection, the number of syncytia correlates with the degree of virus growth as quantified in the presence and absence of the drug being tested.
  • These cytopathic effects and assay of viral reverse transcriptase were used to demonstrate anti-HIV effects of n-T4GEN.
  • the anti-HIV assay using 1 ⁇ g/ml of a 1 percent n-T4GEN extract per ml of test solution was conducted as follows:
  • HIV inoculum was standardized for reverse transcriptase (RT) activity using purified avian myeloblastosis viral RT (BRL Labs, Gaithersberg, MD) and used to infect polybrene treated H9 cells at 0.02 RT units of HIV per 2 x IO 6 cells.
  • the virus was adsorbed for 2 hours at 37°C and then the cells were washed twice and resuspended in RPMl 1640 containing 10% fetal bovine serum at 2 x 10 s cells/ml and dispersed in 1 ml aliquots into 24-well plates (Falcon Division, Becton Dickinson Co., Cockneyville, MD) .
  • CPE cytopathic effect
  • Reverse transcriptase activity was measured using 1 ml culture aliquots which were clarified at 600 x g for 30 minutes, precipitated in 10% polyethylene glycol - 0.13 M NaCl at 4°C for 18 hours, and centrifuged at 600 x g for 60 minutes. The pellet was dissolved in glycerol-Tris buffer (50% glycerol, 25 mM Tris HCl pH 7.5, 5 mM dithiothreitol, 15 mM KCl, 0.025% Triton-X, and 0.25 mM EDTA) . The RT assay was adapted from published methods (Levy et al. , 1984, Science 225: 840; Ho et al.
  • H9 lymphoma cells growing in RPMI-1640 media containing 10% fetal calf serum were infected with HIV (1000,000 RT counts) on day 1 and various concentrations of n-T4GEN extract On day 5 cells were observed for cytopathic effects (syncytia) , and on day 10 assayed for RT activity (++) Denotes extensive giant cell ⁇ , ( ⁇ ) fewer syncytial cell
  • T4GEN HIV-induced cytopathic effects on H9 lymphoma cells. At these concentrations (10 ⁇ g/ml) there was also a significant (67.2%) inhibition of the viral reverse transcriptase.
  • An extract identified herein as T4GEN was tested along with n-T4GEN to demonstrate their anti-cancer activity. T4GEN was analyzed and found to meet the sugar- binding protein fingerprint set forth in Table 5. The amount of protein in the alkaloidal and viscotoxin fractions were also found to be within the required fingerprint ranges.
  • the T4GEN extract was prepared from European mistletoe.
  • Anticancer activities of T4GEN and n-T4GEN were studied in animals bearing subcutaneous transplants of C3H mammary adenocarcinoma 16/C. This tumor is maintained as a lung passed tumor in C3H female mice.
  • tumors (1 x 10 s cells) were transplanted (S.C.) in 18-20 g B6C3F1 hybrid female mice.
  • the tumor bearing animals were randomized and separated into different treatment groups (10 mice per group) . There were 15 animals in the control group who received only physiological saline during the treatment periods.
  • the treatments i.p.
  • Tumors were measured on days 21 and 28 post transplants and the results are represented as tumor weights using formula (1 x w 2 ) /2
  • This animal model is an accepted model for human breast carcinomas.
  • the results are set forth in Table 9 as follows:
  • the pharmaprinted botanical materials are useful for any disease state for which a botanical drug is associated. See for example Leung and Foster, 1996 and Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals, 1994. More specific examples of disease states or therapeutic indications include AIDS, mild- to-moderate depression, anti-arthritic, anti-cancer, anti- diarrhetic, anti-inflammatory, anti-nausea via GI, anti- rheumatic, anti-spasmodic, anti-ulcer, antibacterial, antimutagenic, antioxidant, antiviral, arthritis, asthma, blood pressure, benign prostatic hyperplasty (BPH) , bronchial asthma, bronchitis, calmative, cerebral circulatory disturbances, cholesterol lowering, cirrhosis, dermatological anti-inflammatory, diabetes, diuretic, drastic cathartic, dysmenorrhea, dyspepsia, environmental stress, expectorant, free radical scavenger, GI distress, hemorrhoids, hepatitis, hepatoprotective,
  • the Saw Palmetto is a small palm indigenous to the United States. In botanical preparations, the small brownish-colored berries have been used for many years to treat diseases of the bladder and the prostate . Extracts of the Saw Palmetto are prepared in variety of ways, typically, hexane extraction or supercritical carbon dioxide extraction. The extraction methods are described above which describes methods of processing and extracting botanical materials. There are also lipidic extracts and saponifiable extracts that are commercially available from Madaus, S.A.
  • ProstasereneTM a purified extract of Serenoa repens , commercially available from Therabel PharmaTM, (Belgium) .
  • Saw Palmetto is also produced by the following companies: NaturaLife, Herbal Choice, Botalia Gold, Herb Pharm, PhytoPharmica. 6.3. CLINICAL USE FOR ALLEVIATION OF THE SYMPTOMS OF BENIGN PROSTATIC HYPERTROPHY
  • Saw Palmetto is useful to treat and/or ameliorate BPH and/or urinary dysfunction.
  • Analytical capillary GC Method The GC system was a Varian GC/FID equipped with Star data handling software.
  • the amount of dried residue recorded from each fraction of mobile phase collected was as follows 1 (-0.1 g) , 2 (-2.5 g) , 3 (-1.6 g) , 4 (-0.1 g) , 5 (-0.1 g) , 6-9 (-0.0 g) , and 10 (-0.5 g) .
  • the total dried residue recovered via flash chromatography was calculated to be 4.77 grams. Given the initial load of extract was 5.15 grams, 92% of the extract was recovered as dried residue.
  • Rats Male rats were obtained at 60 days of age (300-350 g body weight) from Harlan (St. Louis, MO) and allowed to acclimate for 24 hours to a air-conditioned, light controlled room with a 12 hour light-dark cycle. Rats were fed with Purina chow and tap water, ad libi tum .
  • the animals were treated intraperitoneally with testosterone (400 ⁇ g/100 g body wt) . After 1 hour, the animals were sacrificed by decapitation and the ventral prostates were rapidly removed and placed in ice-cold "homogenization buffer" (10 mM Tris-HCl, 1.5 mM Na 2 EDTA, 0.5 mM dithiothreitol, 0.25 M sucrose, 1 mm phenylmethylsulfonylfluoride, pH 7.4 at 22°C) . The prostates were minced and homogenized on ice with a Polytron homogenizer (set at 4) using 10 second bursts alternated with a 30 second cooling period at a tissue-buffer ratio of 550 mg/ml.
  • homoogenization buffer 10 mM Tris-HCl, 1.5 mM Na 2 EDTA, 0.5 mM dithiothreitol, 0.25 M sucrose, 1 mm phenylmethylsulfonylfluoride, pH
  • the homogenate was centrifuged at 800 g for 20 minutes at 4°C.
  • the nuclear pellet was then resuspended in ice-cold "nuclear buffer" (10 mM Tris, 0.5 mM dithiothreitol, 0.25 M sucrose, 2.5 mM MgCl 2 , pH 7.4 at 22°C, 550 mg tissue/ml) .
  • the resuspended pellet was homogenized on ice using a glass Dounce homogenizer until suspension became uniform.
  • the nuclear pellets were washed 3 times by resuspension in 1 ml of the same ice-cold nuclear buffer, with mixing and centrifugation as above. After discarding the final supernatant, 1 ml of 100% ethanol was added to each pellet and then vortexed. Test tubes were placed in a 30°C water bath for 40 minutes, with vortexing every 10 minutes and a final centrifugation at 800 g for 10 minutes. The ethanol extracts were decanted into vials containing 4 ml of scintillation fluid (Ecoscint A) , shaken and counted.
  • Ecoscint A scintillation fluid
  • 5-lipoxygenase catalyzes the oxidative metabolism of arachidonic acid to 5-hydroxyeicosatetraenoic acid (5-HETE) , the initial reaction in the biosynthetic pathway leading to the formation of the leukotrienes.
  • the procedure was as follows. 5-lipoxygenase assays were run using a crude enzyme preparation from rat basophilic leukemia cells (RBL-1) . Test compounds were pre-incubated with the enzyme for 5 minutes at room temperature and the reaction was initiated by addition of substrate (arachidonic acid) . Following an 8 minute incubation at room temperature, the reaction was terminated by addition of citric acid, and levels of 5-HETE were determined by 5-HETE radioimmunoassay (RIA) . Compounds are screened at 30 ⁇ M (Shimuzu et al . , 1984, Proc. Na tl . Acad . Sci . USA 81:689-693) .
  • Cyclooxygenase-1 (from ram seminal vesicles) , 125 units per assay tube, was pre-incubated with 1 mM GSH, 1 mM hydroquinone, 1.25 mM hemoglobin and test compound for 1 minute at 25°C. The reaction was initiated by addition of arachidonic acid (100 mM) and terminated after 20 minutes incubation at 37°C by addition of trichloroacetic acid (TCA) . Following centrifugal separation and addition of thiobarbiturate, cyclooxygenase activity was determined by reading absorbance at 530 nm (Evans et al . , 1987, Biochem .
  • Cyclooxygenase-2 (from sheep placenta) , 80 units per assay tube, was pre-incubated with 1 mM GSH, 1 mM hydroquinone, 1.25 mM hemoglobin and test compound for 1 minute at 25°C. The reaction is initiated by addition of arachidonic acid (100 mM) and terminated after 20 minutes incubation at 37°C by addition of TCA. Following centrifugal separation and addition of thiobarbiturate, cyclooxygenase activity is determined by reading absorbance at 530 nm (Boopathy and Balasubramanian, 1988; Evans et al . 1987; O'Sullivan et al . , 1992, Biochem . Biophy. Res . Commun . 187:1123-1127) .
  • Human prostatic tissue is obtained from BPH patients oc undergoing surgical transvesical resections.
  • the tissue is transported to the laboratory in ice cold saline within 60 minutes.
  • the tissue samples are cleaned, chopped into 1-3 g pieces, and quick frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at
  • the prostatic tissues are thawed and cut with fine scissors (or pulverized at liquid N 2 temp.) and homogenized with one 30 second burst of sonicator at 4°C in a 5-fold volume of buffer (100 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.4, 20% glycerol, 100 mM sodium citrate, 100 mM KCl, ImM EDTA and 15 mM ⁇ -
  • the supernatant is divided into 1 ml aliquots to be centrifuged at 120,000 g for 45 minutes to provide microsomal pellets containing 5-alpha- reductase which are stored at -70°C or suspended m buffer B containing 0.25 mg/ml Lubrol PX or 0.5 mg/ml digitonin and passed through a 25 gauge syringe to make a homogenate which is centrifuged at 120,000 g for 45 minutes.
  • the supernatant microsomal 5-alpha-reductase (estimate protein contents) is used in assays or stored in 40% glycerol at -20°C without loss of activity.
  • the 5-alpha-reductase assays are studied by following the reduction of radiolabelled [ 3 H] testosterone (T) to [ 3 H] 5- ⁇ -dihydrotestosterone (DHT) at 37°C. Tubes (duplicates) with 1 ml Tris-HCl (pH 7.4) buffer containing 100 mM sodium citrate, 100 mM KCl, 20% (v/v) glycerol, 1 mM EDTA, 15 mM ⁇ - mercaptoethanol, 5 mM glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase and 1 ⁇ M- [ 3 H] testosterone, are preincubated at 37°C for 15 minutes.
  • the assays are started by the addition of 5-50 ⁇ l of 5-alpha- reductase (rat or human) in the presence or absence of inhibitors (SPB-extract from different sources and at different concentrations) .
  • ProscarTM farnesoid
  • the reaction is stopped by the addition of 1 ml diethylether containing 25 ⁇ g each of T, DHT, and 3- alpha-androstanediol . Each tube is vortexed, centrifuged, and the top ether layer separated. The ether is evaporated with a stream of nitrogen and the residue dissolved in 20 ⁇ l chloroform/methanol (2:1, v/v) and applied to thin layer plates (silica gel 60, E.
  • Each of the fatty acids and fatty acid esters, i.e., the components, of FIG. 4 were analyzed to determine their activity in four bioassays relevant for the BPH clinical indication, see above. None of the components showed acitvity against Cox-2.
  • the activities, IC 50 s, for purified components in the other three bioassays were as follows: linolenic acid (233 ⁇ M in COX-1, 12 ⁇ M in 5-LIPO) ; linoleic acid ethyl ester (6 ⁇ M in androgen receptor assay) ; lauric acid ethyl ester (130 nM in androgen receptor assay) ; and ⁇ - sitosterol ( ⁇ 10 ⁇ M in the androgen receptor assay) . Because none of the extracts were active in the COX-1 and 5-LIPO assay, the androgen receptor assay was selected for the calcualtions shown below.
  • each individual component is calculated using (i) the total bioactivity of the botanical extract, (ii) the amount of each component present in each extract and (iii) the IC 50 s of each purified component. This calculation is exemplified below using commercial sample #3 and the androgen receptor assay. Sample #3 has a total extract IC 50 value for the androgen receptor of 3.5 ⁇ M (total bioactivity) , assuming the average molecular weight of the components is 200.
  • a capsule of sample #3 contains the following proportions of the ethyl esters of lauric acid (0.036 W/W%; 228 MWt) and linoleic acid (0.115 W/W%; 308 MWt) - 1
  • lauric acid ethyl ester and linoleic ethyl ester account for 90% of the observed in vi tro bioactivity in this assay and are defined as active components in the androgen receptor bioassay.
  • the combined bioactivity of the lauric and linoleic ethyl esters is used to define a bioactivity standard for acceptance or rejection of pharmaceutical grade compositions . 2
  • the sample must contain at least 0.018% W/W lauric acid ester or 0.84% linoleic acid ester.
  • Extract #2 displayed inconsistent behavior based on analysis in the chemical and biological assays. Extract #2 has apparent androgen receptor assay activity four times stronger than the best standard tested (30nM vs.
  • extract #2 contains very low amounts of putative components. Thus, extract #2 is not part of the analysis. Requiring that each component account for 70% of the bioactivity, the sample must contain at least 0.025% W/W lauric acid ester or 1.176% W/W linoleic acid ester.
  • the sample must contain at least 0.029% W/W lauric acid ester or 1.344% linoleic acid ester.
  • EXAMPLE KOREAN MISTLETOE 7.1. PLANT SOURCE/EXTRACTION METHOD Plant powder (2.4 Kg) obtained from Korean mistletoe wa ⁇ extracted with 300 ml batches of water in a clean blender. The extract was filtered through cheese cloth-lined filter beds to eliminate fibrous and water-insoluble residues, final volume 6.03 liters. Final concentration of the extract was 39.8% (plant weight/volume) .
  • the extract was left at 4°C for two weeks in absence of air (flushed with nitrogen) . At this time, additional insoluble residues were deposited.
  • the cold extract was filtered through 0.8 ⁇ filters and final sterile filtration was performed with 0.2 ⁇ filters in a sterile environment.
  • the semipurified product was collected in 500 ml sterile vacuum containers and identified as T4GEN. The product samples were found to be pyrogen free. Samples from the flask were removed with a sterile syringe in a laminar flow hood and diluted on the basis that each ml of the sample contains 400 mg of the extract (40% solution) .
  • the extract samples were analyzed according to the affinity chromatography system schematically shown in FIG. 9, which was the same system used to establish the standard marker fingerprints.
  • the columns used to separate the proteins were SepharoseTM 4B.
  • SepharoseTM 4B (400 ml) was repeatedly washed with double distilled water and filtered on a buchner funnel . The sepharose residue was repeatedly washed with Na 2 C0 3 (0.5 M, pH 11) and then suspended in a stirred 2 liter cylinder in 400 ml Na 2 C0 3 (0.5 M, pH 11) . The cylinder was covered with aluminum foil and to the stirred suspension of SepharoseTM 4B, divinylsulfone (48 ml, absence of light) was added dropwise over a period of 80 minutes. The reactants were stirred for another 30 minutes at room temperature.
  • the resin was filtered on a sintered glass funnel (no touching with hands or paper) with approximately 500 ml of Na 2 C0 3 (0.5 M, pH 10, make with NaHC0 3 ) . At this time the resin was suspended in 400 ml Na 2 C0 3 (0.5 M, pH 10) and used for preparing sugar-specific affinity resins as follows :
  • Galactose-specific SepharoseTM 4B To the activated resin 380 ml (in 5M Na 2 C0 3 ) , galactose (38 g) was added with stirring in absence of light. The suspension was stirred overnight and then the suspension was filtered on a sintered glass funnel. To inactivate the reacted activated sepharose, the residue was washed with 0.5 M NaHC0 3 (pH 8.5) and then suspended in 350 ml NaHC0 3 (0.5 M, pH 8.5) and 14 ml 2- mercaptoethanol . The stirred suspension was maintained at room temperature for 4 hours and then filtered on a sintered glass funnel.
  • Lactose-specific SepharoseTM 4B The method of preparation was the same as described for galactose. Here 300 ml of activated SepharoseTM was reacted with 30 g of lactose and the affinity resin was deactivated with 300 ml NaHC0 3 (0.5 M, pH 8.5) , 12 ml 2-mercaptoethanol and finally suspended in 300 ml of PBS and NaN 3 as described in the previous preparation.
  • N-acetyl-D-galactosamine-specific Sepharose B Activated Sepharose 4B (30 ml) was treated with 3 g of N-acetyl-D- galactosamine as described. The reaction was terminated with 30 ml NaHC0 3 (0.5 M, pH 8.5) and 5 ml 2-mercaptoethanol . The resin was maintained in 30 ml PBS and a few crystals of NaN 3 at 4°C.
  • Fucose-specific-SepharoseTM 4B Activated SepharoseTM 4B (50 ml) was reacted with 5 g fucose.
  • the affinity resin was treated with 50 ml NaHC0 3 and 5 ml 2-mercaptoethanol to deactivate the unreacted SepharoseTM.
  • the resin was maintained in 50 ml PBS and NaN 3 as described.
  • Melibiose-Specific SepharoseTM 4B Activated Sepharose 4B (50 ml) was reacted with 5 g melibiose. The reaction was terminated with 50 ml NaHC0 3 and 5 ml 2-mercaptoethanol . The resin was maintained in 50 ml PBS and a few crystals of NaN 3 at 4°C.
  • the same methods can be used to provide columns of different sugar specificity.
  • the used columns were regenerated by elutions with 5 M urea and followed by elution with 0.5 M NaHC0 3 (pH 8.5) . Prior to use, columns are equilibrated with 0.02 M Tris/HCl buffer (Buffer C) .
  • the Buffers used for Extraction and Affinity Chromatography were prepared as follows:
  • Tris/HCl (0.02 M, pH 7.8) containing 0.4 M KCl, 2% Triton x-100, 1 mM dithiothreitol and 0.01 mM phenyl methanesulfonyl fluoride (to be added before use) .
  • Buffer B Tris/HCl (0.02 M, pH 7.8) containing 1.25 M NaCl, 25 mM CaCl 2 , 0.05% Triton x-100 and 1 mM dithiothreitol.
  • Buffer C Tris/HCl (0.02 M, pH 7.8) containing 1.25 M NaCl, 25 mM CaCl 2 , 0.05% Triton x-100 and 1 mM dithiothreitol.
  • Buffer (C) Buffer (C) containing 4 mM EDTA instead of 25 mM CaCl 2 . (Buffer D) .
  • EGTA may be substituted for EDTA.
  • a known volume of the mistletoe extract was adjusted to pH 7.8 with 2 M Tris-buffer.
  • the solution was absorbed on a series of SepharoseTM 4B affinity columns (1.6 x 7 ml) .
  • the columns were washed with excess (200 ml) of 0.02 M Tris- buffer (pH 7.8) containing 25 mM CaCl 2 (Buffer C) to remove all unbound proteins (viscotoxins and alkaloids) .
  • each column was separately washed with Tris-buffer (pH 7.8) containing 4 mM EDTA (Buffer D) to elute proteins which require Ca ++ for their binding to specific sugars i.e. Ca +* dependent sugar-binding proteins (100 ml samples) .
  • the inhibitory concentration (IC S0 ) was determined for each sugar-binding protein as follows: Leukemia L1210 cells were maintained in asynchronous logarithmic growth at 37°C in RPMI 1640 medium supplemented with 10% (v/v) fetal bovine calf serum and 1 % (v/v) Pen Strep. The cell population doubling time was 11-12 hours. The cells were passed every 48 hours at 1 x IO 4 cells/ml in order to keep the cells in a logarithmic stage of growth. For all growth inhibition studies all stock solution ⁇ and dilutions were made with sterile 0.7% NaCl solution.
  • the cell cultures were seeded at 2-5 x IO 4 cells/ml in duplicates for each inhibitor concentration in a microtiter plate (0.18 ml/well) .
  • the covered microtiter plate was incubated for 48 hours in a humidified C0 2 incubator containing 5% C0 2 in air.
  • aliquots of each well were added to a measured volume of isotonic saline and counted in an electronic counter. Because fractions at high concentrations caused rapid cellular fragmentation, the test microtiter-plates were routinely checked under a microscope prior to cell number counting so that the results were not compromised.
  • Cell viability was determined by trypan blue exclusion. The results were calculated by plotting percent cell growth inhibition (as compared to the cell density of the saline treated controls) versus log of protein (or specific fraction) concentration which caused 50% inhibition (IC 50 ) in cell growth as determined from the graph.
  • N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.70 12.5 875 0.29 3.00 x 10 4
  • Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to
  • L1210 cells caused a 50% cell growth inhibition.
  • Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to
  • An extract from Korean mistletoe was prepared by taking a known weight of plant (100 g) and cleaning and crushing it in the presence of double distilled water to form a 40% by weight solution of mistletoe. It is preferred that the plant be cut and the cuttings put in a plastic bag and flash frozen in liquid nitrogen prior to being crushed and combined with the distilled water.
  • the crushing and combination of the frozen material with the distilled water is preferably carried out in a blender for about 2 minutes.
  • the resulting mixture is centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 65 minutes to separate extract from insoluble residue.
  • the residue is twice extracted with known volumes (100 ml) of water to remove all extract and subjected to centrifugation.
  • the supernatants are combined.
  • the resulting extract is stored in the absence of air at room temperature for two weeks.
  • the extract is then sterilized by step filtration as is conventionally known.
  • the sterile extract is then subjected to a preliminary screening test as previously described to determine if its bioactivity with respect to the L1210 leukemia system is 100 A.U. or more. If the extract passes this test, then it is subjected to the more rigorous tests as described in the prior examples to determine its sugar-binding protein fingerprint. If the protein levels fall within the limits required in accordance with the present invention, then the extract is identified as pharmaceutical grade. Table 11 sets forth the results of testing of an extract prepared as above. As can be seen, the extract has concentration levels and bioactivity values which fall within the standard fingerprint limits which are required for it to be identified as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
  • Extract (40%, FrF) 90 234 32,500 2.92 x IO 6
  • N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 4.5 0.81 49,000 0.0035 0.22 x IO 6
  • Dilution factor needed per ml to cause 50% inhibition of L1210 cells in culture.
  • Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to
  • An extract of Korean mistletoe was prepared by taking
  • the extract residue remaining after the above extraction with Buffer A may be extracted with a detergent extract - Buffer B (see Example 8) - to form an extract which, after dialysis to remove detergents and salts, also can be tested to determine if it meets the pharmaceutical grade requirements of the present invention.
  • An extract of European mistletoe ( Viscum album L . ) was prepared and analyzed according to Example 7 except that only the aqueous salt extract was analyzed for its sugar-binding protein fingerprint.
  • the extract is identified as T4GEN.
  • the results of the fingerprint determination are set forth in Table 12.
  • the T4GEN extract meets the requirement of the established standard fingerprint and therefore qualifies as a pharmaceutical grade extract.
  • Table 13 sets forth the analysis of ISCADORTM which is a fermented mistletoe extract. This fraction meets some, but not all, of the requirements of the standard fingerprint. For example, the bioactivity of the melibiose and fucose fractions are too low.
  • Table 14 shows the results of bioactivity assays for the T4GEN and ISCADORTM extracts where the IC 50 is expressed as the dilution factor needed per ml to cause 50% inhibition of L1210 cells in culture.
  • Table 14 is derived from Tables 12 and 13 and shows the general drop in ISCADORTM activity compared to the unfermented European extract (T4GEN) .
  • N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. 140 10 1.140 0.0044 3.2 x 10 5
  • Inhibitory concentration expressed as ⁇ g protein/ml which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of L1210 cells in culture.
  • Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to L1210 cells caused a 50% cell growth inhibition.
  • Inhibitory concentration expressed as ⁇ g protein/ml which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of L1210 cells in culture.
  • Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to L1210 cells caused a 50% cell growth inhibition.
  • Lactose 2 20 x 10* 0 20 x 10* -91 0
  • St. John's Wort There are many sources and many forms of St. John's Wort. It may be dried (stem, leaf, flowers, buds) . It may also be in the form of a powdered extract. It may be freeze- dried. An oil extract of the crushed flowers may be prepared. Various forms of infusions (aqueous) , oil macerates, or alcohol water extractions are available. The methods of processing and extracting St. John's Wort are discussed in the detailed description of the invention above.
  • VIMRxynTM hypericin product
  • St. John's Wort has been the subject many clinical studies on the extract and the botanical itself.
  • the major clinical indication is the alleviation of mild to moderate depression.
  • Other clinical indications include AIDS, antibacterial uses, anticancer uses, antimutagenic uses,
  • St. John's Wort has become increasingly popular in Germany where physicians routinely prescribe herbal medicines.
  • 1994 66 million daily doses of St. John's Wort were prescribed there for use in the treatment of depression (De Smet and Nolen, 1996, Bri tish Medical Journal
  • German researchers (with a colleague from San Antonio, Texas) recently published a meta-analysis of 23 randomized trials of St. John's Wort with a total of 1,757 outpatients with mild to moderately severe depressive disorders. They 0 concluded that the herb was significantly superior to placebo, and appeared comparably effective to standard antidepressants while producing fewer side effects (Linde, 1996, Bri tish Medical Journal 313:253-258) .
  • John's Wort extract, LI 160 resulted in a 15% down-regulation of ⁇ -adrenergic receptors in the rat frontal cortex after subchronic treatment (250 mg/kg for 2 weeks) .
  • these authors found a 25% down-regulation after similar doses (10 times the clinical dose) of imipramine .
  • ANTIVIRAL ACTIVITY Hypericin is currently in early clinical trials in the U.S. as an antiviral (Bombardelli and Morazzoni, 1995; Meruelo et al . , 1988) .
  • HAV-1 human immunodeficiency virus type 1
  • the antiviral activity appears to involve a photoactivation process (Carpenter and Kraus, 1991; Degar et al . , 1993; Kraus et al . , 1990; Lopez-Bazzocchi et al . , 1991) which forms singlet oxygen and inactivates viral fusion and syncytia formation (Lenard et al . , 1993; Thomas et al . , 1992; Yip et al . , 1996) . While hypericin does show antiviral activity in vivo (mice) these photodynamic properties may limit the potential usefulness as an antiretroviral agent (Stevenson and Lenard, 1993) .
  • hypericin can photo reduce oxygen to superoxide radicals and can form semiquinone radicals in the absence of light (Lavie et al . , 1995) . These later authors speculate that this ability to form semiquinones might account for the antiviral activity in the whole animals and they have maintained (since the early 1980' s) the clinical utility of hypericin. Hypericin has been reported to inhibit the growth of glioma cells in tissue culture (Couldwell et al . , 1994) . There appears to be a photoactivation involved in its antineoplastic effect as well (Andreoni et al . , 1994) .
  • Hypericin and pseudohypericin have been found to inhibit the important regulatory enzyme, protein kinase C (IC 5P of 1.7 ⁇ g/ml and 15 ⁇ g/ml, respectively) (Takahashi et al . , 1989) .
  • Receptor tyrosine kinase activity of epidermal growth factor is also inhibited by hypericin (de Witte et al . , 1993) .
  • These later effects have been linked to both the antiviral and antineoplastic activities (Lavie et al . , 1995; Panossian et al. , 1996) .
  • the essential oil and the water soluble fraction of an alcoholic extract exhibit minor antifungal and significant antibacterial activity.
  • the tannins and flavonoids inactivated E. coli .
  • At dilutions of 1:400 or 1:200 (Khosa and Bhatia, 1982; Shakirova et al . , 1970) .
  • Hyperforin and adhyperforin have been reported to possess an antibiotic effect greater than that of sulfonilamide (Negrash and Pochinok, 1972) .
  • a burn ointment prepared by extracting 5 g of fresh flowers with 100 g of olive oil for 10 days at 20 'C was used in the treatment of 1 st , 2 nd and 3 rd degree burns. First degree burns .heal in 48 hours.
  • a commercial preparation (Novoimamine; containing 0.412% quercetin) was found to be effective against Staphyloccus aureus infection (Negrash and Pochinok, 1972) . In this regard, its effects have similarly been reported to be greater than conventional treatment with sulfonilamide (Aizenman, 1969) .
  • St. John's Wort has been reported to be useful in a number of additional conditions.
  • the procyanidin (PC) fraction of St. John's Wort was tested in an isolated Guinea pig heart preparation (Melzer, et al . , 1989) and found to enhance coronary flow in the same way as the procyanidins from Cra taegus (Hawthorn) .
  • the same researchers tested the procyanidin fractions in porcine isolated coronary arteries. All PC fractions antagonized histamine or prostaglandin F2 alpha-induced arterial contractions (Melzer, et al . , 1991) .
  • preliminary findings suggest that St. John's Wort may be useful in the treatment of chronic tension headaches (Heinze and G ⁇ bel, 1996) .
  • the fractionation of alcoholic St. John's Wort tincture was performed using normal phase column chromatography. This method was selected as a preferable pre-chromatographic technique on the basis of observed excellent mass recovery (>90%) , the separation of the selected standards (flavonoids: mangiferin, rutin, hyperoside, quercitrin, quercitin; hypericin) , as well as separation of the other co-ocurring components. A detailed description of the materials and methods utilized is described below.
  • Herb Materials an alcoholic tincture of St. John's Wort (Hypericum perforatum) raw material was purchased from a commercial source.
  • Prep-CC Method Approximately 14 ml of the commercial alcoholic tincture was evaporated to dryness overnight to yield 640 mg of residue. The resultant extract was triturated with four parts of Si0 2 (silica gel) and was layered onto a preparative open glass column prepacked with 30 g of Si0 2 .
  • the CC (column chromatography) conditions were as follows: column-Si0 2 ; flow rate 133 ml/hr; five fractions (200 ml) were collected with the following elution profile using: CHCl 3 /MeOH 8:2 (two fractions made up of distinctly colored bands) ; CHCl 3 /MeOH 7:3, CHCl ⁇ /MeOH 1:1 and 100% MeOH.
  • the liquid extract (SJ041, 14 ml) was evaporated to dryness under vacuum to yield 0.64 g of residue.
  • the dried residue was triturated (intimately mixed) with four parts of Silica gel and sifted on top of a glass column pre-packed with 30 g of Silica gel in chloroform. Development of the column over a six-hour period was accomplished by step gradient using chloroform: methanol. In the elution proces ⁇ , 200 ml of solvent volume was employed for each step, with the ratio being changed from 8:2, 7:3, 1:1, and finally 100% methanol. Fractions 1 and 2, consisting of two distinctive colored bands, were obtained from the ratio 8:2 CHCl 3 :MeOH eluent. The other fractions represent the eluates from each subsequent gradient elution. The collected fractions were evaporated to dryness under vacuum and their yield given below:
  • Monoamine oxidase (MAO, E.C.I.4.3.4) is a much less discriminating enzyme, in that it will catalyze the removal of an amine group from a variety of substrates, including endogenous substances (norepinephrine, epinephrine, dopamine, tyramine, 5-hydroxytryptamine) and many drugs that are amines.
  • MAO functions as an important protective mechanism against exogenous, biologically active amines.
  • MAO neotyrene-maleic anhydride
  • MAO-A sensitivity to clorgyline and preference for 5-HT
  • MAO-B sensitivity to selegiline
  • MAO-B sensitivity to phenylethylamine
  • the two types of MAO appear to be distinct molecular entities that exist in various proportions in different tissues.
  • the MAO inhibitors currently in therapeutic use are relatively nonselective, but selective inhibitors may offer advantages in certain clinical settings.
  • MAO-A e.g. clorgyline
  • Parkinson's disease and dyskinesia are Parkinson's disease and dyskinesia.
  • MAO A enzyme activity is assayed in a mitochondrial fraction isolated from rat brain by differential centrifugation. 40 ⁇ g membrane protein in 20 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) is mixed with test compound, and the reaction is started by the addition of 95 ⁇ M [ 3 H] serotonin (2-10 mCi/mmol) . Following 20 minutes incubation at 37°C, the reaction is terminated by the addition of 5% HCl. The radioactivity of [ 3 H] serotonin in an extraction is determined.
  • Monoamine oxidase (MAO, E.C.I.4.3.4) is not a very
  • MAO 20 against exogenous, biologically active amines.
  • MAO-B phenylethylamme
  • MAO-A e . g. , clorgyline
  • a selective MAO-B inhibitor may have beneficial effect on Parkinson's disease and dyskinesia.
  • MAO-B enzyme activity was assayed in a mitochondrial fraction isolated from rat liver by differential centrifugation. 40 ⁇ g membrane protein in 20 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) was mixed with test compound, and the reaction was started by the addition of 140 ⁇ M [ 3 H] dopamine (2-10 mCi/mmol) . Following 20 minutes incubation at 37°C, the reaction was terminated by the addition of 5% HCl. The radioactivity of [ 3 H] dopamine in an extraction was determined. Compounds were screened at 10 ⁇ M (Egashira et al . 1976, Biochem. Pharmacol . 23 : 2583-2586) .
  • reference compounds were used for the inhibition of monoamine oxidase B: reference compounds, (IC S0 ( ⁇ M) ) ; N- (2-aminoethyl) -4-chlorobenzamide hydrochloride, (23) ; N- (2-aminoethyl) -3-iodobenzamide hydrochloride, (1.7) ; and clorgyline, (0.0027) .
  • This assay measured binding of [ 12S I] RTI-121 to presynaptic sites associated with the uptake of serotonin.
  • Cerebral cortical membranes of male Wistar derived rats weighing 175 + 25 g were prepared in modified Tris-HCl pH 7.4 buffer using standard techniques. A 5 mg aliquot of membrane was incubated with 10 pM [ 125 I] RTI-121 for 90 minutes at 25°C. Non-specific binding was estimated in the presence of 100 ⁇ M clomipramine. Membranes were filtered and washed 3 times and the filters were counted to determine [ 125 I]RTI-121 specifically bound. Compounds are screened at 10 ⁇ M (Boja et al. 1992, Synapse 12:27-36) .
  • 35 methyltransferase (COMT)
  • various ethanolic St. John's Wort fractions at super-physiologic concentrations of up to 500 ⁇ g/ml (Thiede and Walper, 1994) .
  • M ⁇ ller et al . reported an IC 50 for the synthetic antidepressant, clomipramine, of 0.9 nM (-0.3 ng/ml) for serotonin uptake inhibition (M ⁇ ller et al . , 1996, 2nd International Congress on Phytomedicine, Kunststoff; 1996) .
  • the crude extract of St. John's Wort had significant receptor affinity for adenosine, GABA A , GABA B , benzodiazepine, inositol triphosphate (IP 3/ ) and monoamine oxidase (MAO-A, MAO-B) .
  • IP 3/ inositol triphosphate
  • MAO-A, MAO-B monoamine oxidase
  • Hypericin had affinity only for NMDA receptors (Ki ⁇ 1 M) and this may play a role in its reported antiviral activity since NMDA antagonists prevent gp 120-induced neurotoxicity (Diop et al . , 1994, Neuroscience Letters 165 :187-190) .
  • GABA B stimulation has been found to enhance receptor down regulation during imipramine treatment (Enna, et al . , 1986, in Bartholini et al . eds. GABA and Mood Disorders : Experimental and Clinical Research : Raven Press: New York, NY, 1986:23-49) . Nielsen, et al . have reported antidepressant effects with the GABA-ergic agent, fengabine, in depressed outpatients (Nielsen et al . 1990, Acta Psychia trica Scandinavica J3_2_: 366-371) .
  • St. John's Wort contains numerous compounds with documented biological activity. Most researchers consider its effects to be due to a variety of constituents rather than any single component. Constituents that have stimulated the most interest include the naphthodianthrones, hypericin and pseudohypericin and a broad range of flavonoids including quercetin, quercitrin, amentoflavone and hyperin. Both classes of compounds are reported to contribute to its antidepressant and antiviral activity. The phloroglucinols, hyperforin and adhyperforin, the essential oil, flavonoids and xanthones all contribute to St. John's Wort's wound- healing properties.
  • the major active components of St. John's Wort are naphthodianthrone derivatives ( ⁇ 0.1-0.15%) (Deutscher Arzneiffen-Codex. 3rd Supplement 91 ed. 1986) ; hypericin [0.02-1.8%] (Benigni et al . , Hypericum, Piante Medicinali: Chimica, Farmacolo ⁇ ia e Terapia. Inverni & Delia Beffa, Milano, 1971.) , pseudohypericin, isohypericin, emodin- anthrone. In fresh material protohypericin and protopseudohypericin are also present.
  • hyperin [0.7-1.1% hyperoside] (List and H ⁇ rhammer, 1993), 13', II8-biapigenin [0.1-0.5%] (Bergh ⁇ fer and H ⁇ lzl, 1987, Planta Medica 216-219; List and H ⁇ rhammer, 1993) amentoflavone, 13', II8-biapigenin (0.01-0.05% in flowers) , rutin [0.3%] (Akhtardzhiev et al . , 1984, Farma tsiya (Sophia)
  • Flavonoid and procyanidin concentrations have been reported to be highest in the flowers during budding stage immediately before flowering (11.71%) , followed by the leaves and stems (7.4%) . Flavonoid concentrations are also reported to be highest in plants growing in higher altitudes and those growing on Northern slopes where the weight of the plant is lower than plants growing in Southern exposure (Brantner et 5 al . , 1994, Scientia Pharmaceu ti ca £2:261-276; Tsitsina, 1969; Zhebeleva, 1973, Rast . Resur. . 9:402-404) .
  • Rutin is found in all parts but is much higher in the leaves (2%) during the budding stage than in the flowers (0.095%) , is higher in plants growing in dry vs. those growing in moist 0 conditions, and is reported to be highest when harvested in the evening.
  • the essential oil consists predominantly of monoterpenes (pinenes) and sesquiterpenes and constitutes 0.1-1% (Benigni, 1971; ESCOP, 1996) .
  • the primary compounds include the saturated hydrocarbons methyl-2-octane (16.4%) and ⁇ -pinene (10.6%) ; also present are traces of methyl-2-decane, methyl- 2-butenol and undecane, ot- and /3-pinene, ⁇ terpineol, geraniol, traces of myrcene, limonene, caryophyllene, humulene, C 16 and C 24 n-alkanes, C 24 , C 26 and C 28 n-alkanols (Brondz and Greibrokk, 1983, Journal of Na tural Products 4_6: 940-941; Brondz et al .
  • Essential oil content in the stem is very small, and is greater in the mature capsule. It is also richer before flowering (0.26%) than when in flower (0.11%) . When the stem is eliminated the plant yields an average of 0.35% essential 5 oil (Benigni et al . , 1971) .
  • Hyperforin prenylated derivative of phloroglucinol
  • 10 adhyperforin similar to the bitter principle of hops, adhumulone
  • Hyperforin and adhyperforin levels increase considerably during the formation of the fruits with hyperforin increasing from 2.0% in the flowers to 4.5% in the fruits based on dry weight, and polar hyperforin-like 15 compounds increasing from 0.05-0.3%.
  • Adhyperforin increased 10-fold from 0.2% in the flowers to 1.9% in the capsules (Benigni et al . , 1971; Brondz et al . , 1982, Tetrahedron Letters 23 .
  • the hyperforins are lipophilic and unstable when exposed to heat and light .
  • Choline carotenoids (lutein, violaxanthin, cis- 25 throllixanthin, throllichromone) , beta-sitosterol, pectin, phlobaphene and rhodan; caffeic (0.1%) , chlorogenic, isovalerianic, lauric, myristic, nicotinic (0.12% in leaves) , palmitic and stearic acids; amino acids including cysteine,
  • GABA 0.7 mg/g
  • glutamine leucine
  • lysine ornithine
  • 30 proline threonine
  • scopoletin umbelliferone
  • umbelliferone 1-hydroxy-2-aminoethyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N-phenyl-N
  • Two compounds of interest as marker constituents include two naturally occurring pigments, hypericin and pseudohypericin (naphthodianthrones) . These dyes are characteristic markers for this herb and are easily extracted into methanol. They both absorb visible light with a maximum absorption at 588 nm and are highly fluorescent in methanol. Both pigments are similar in their absorption and emission spectra, including their absorbtivity. Separation of these two pigments is necessary to determine the concentration of each pigment. Flavonoids are also considered to be an important class of constituents in St. John's Wort. Methods are provided for both classes of compounds.
  • An extract of hypericin is prepared from a representative sample of dried plant material by repetitively extracting 1.0 g of the sample with four successive 10 ml portions of methanol. The entire contents of all four extractions are diluted to 50 ml in a volumetric flask. This 10 solution is filtered through a 0.45 ⁇ m filter prior to analysis by TLC or HPLC.
  • hypericin and pseudohypericin pigments are stable for months if kept in 25 the dark.
  • a small spot of the above extracts on filter paper will - . exhibit bright red fluorescence under UV-365 nm light.
  • the liquid extract solutions is also fluoresce bright red under UV-365 nm light.
  • the chromatographic conditions for TLC are typically as follows. Silica Gel (e.g., Eastman No. #6060-13181 with or without fluorescent indicator added to the gel) is developed with toluene:ethyl acetate :glacial acetic acid in the proportions of 3:6:1. Typically, 1-5 ⁇ l of sample is added via capillary. The detection is performed with UV light at 5 365 nm. Hypericin pigments also fluoresce bright red so visible light detection may be used. The Rf values for hypericin are 0.71 and for pseudohypericin 0.50. The detection limits for this assay are 0.2 ⁇ g.
  • sample presentation and standards were prepared as described in the TLC experiment above .
  • HPLC parameters are as follows. A Waters Nova-pakTM C-18 column, 3.9 X 150 mm is developed with a mobile phase under isocratic conditions where the mobile phase is methanol :0.4% phosphoric acid:triethylamine (82:17:1) . The flow rate is 1.0 ml per minute and detection is performed
  • the residue is extracted with 40 ml acetone at room temperature for 10 minutes using an ultrasonic bath and filter.
  • the methanol and acetone filtrates are combined and reduced to dryness under vacuum.
  • the dry material is dissolved in 4.0 ml methanol and filtered.
  • HPLC for flavonoids, hypericin and pseudohypericin is run under the following conditions.
  • the solvent system is acetonitrile:methanol :water:phosphoric acid (55:20:24:1) .
  • the run time is 75 minutes.
  • a quantitative extract is prepared by extracting 1.0 g of powdered herb sample with three 25 ml portions of dichloromethane (CH 2 Cl 2 ) or until filtrate is clear. The dichloromethane extract is discarded. The dried residue is extracted exhaustively with acetone. The acetone extract is evaporated to dryness under vacuum. The residue is dissolved in three 8 ml portions of methanol and transferred to a 25 ml volumetric flask. Enough additional methanol is added to make the total volume 25.00 ml. 10 ml of this solution are filtered; the first 2 ml are discarded. 5.0 ml of the filtrate is diluted to 25.00 ml with methanol in a separate 25 ml volumetric flask.
  • the analytical HPLC method was as follows.
  • the HPLC system was a WatersTM HPLC system consisting of two model 510 EF pumps, model 717 autosampler, a model 486 UV-Vis detector set at 254nm, and a MilleniumTM Version 2.15 system controller and data processing software.
  • Ginger may be prepared by a variety of methods. It may be sliced and freeze-dried and pulverized. It may be steamed and distilled to obtain the essential oil. It may be solvent extracted.
  • Ginger is also commercially available from a variety of sources, including Hauser Nutraceuticals (Boulder, CO) , Herb Phyters (West Hollywood, CA) , Nature's Fingerprint Triarco Industries, Inc., distributed by GNC, Natures Way
  • ginger appears to alleviate motion sickness by acting on the gastrointestinal tract, ⁇ rather than acting through the central nervous system as antihistamines act .
  • Some authors have proposed that it may increase gastric motility, blocking gastrointestinal reactions and subsequent nausea feedback, others have found no evidence (Mowrey and Clayson, 1982, Lancet 655) . 0
  • Ginger also ameliorates menstrual disorders and other disorders associated with nausea or gastrointestinal discomfort. Another use of ginger is preventing post ⁇ operative nausea and vomiting (Arfeen et al . , 1995, Anaesth. Intens . Care 23:449-454) . Others have reported ginger showing antiplatelet activity, preventing mucosal damage, a hypocholesterolemic activity, cardiovascular activity, cardiotonic activity, anti-inflammatory activity and antipyretic activity (Mustafa et al . , 1993, J " . Drug Dev.
  • PGE2 thromboxane
  • TXA 2 thromboxane
  • the fractionation of alcoholic raw ginger extract was performed using reversed-phase preparative HPLC. This method was selected as a preferable prep-chromatographic technique 0 on the basis of observed excellent mass recovery (>90%) , the separation of the selected standards (shogaols and gingerols) , as well as separation of the other co-ocurring components. A detailed description of the materials and methods utilized is described below.
  • Herb Materials one bag of powdered dry ginger ( Zingiber 5 officinale) raw material was obtained from Hauser Nutraceuticals, and labeled as LIMS 157381.
  • Prep-HPLC Method Approximately 150g of dry ginger powder was suspended in 500 ml of 95% MeOH/H 2 0 and mixed overnight. The resultant extract was filtered and rotary 0 evaporated to an oily residue, and 10 ml of residue was injected onto a preparative HPLC ( SepTech NavaPrep 5000TM) .
  • HPLC conditions were as follows: column-Vydac C18, 5.0 x
  • the HPLC system was an Hitachi HPLC system consisting of an L-4500A Diode Array Detector, and D-6000 Interface, L-6200A Intelligent Pump and AS4000 Intelligent AutosamplerTM.
  • the fractionation of alcoholic raw ginger extract was performed using reverse-phase preparative HPLC. This method was selected as a preferable prep-chromatographic technique 0 on the basis of observed excellent mass recovery (>90%) , the separation of the selected standards (shogaols and gingerols) , as well as separation of the other co-occurring components. A detailed description of the materials and methods utilized is described below. 5
  • Thromboxane A 2 is a potent platelet activator which serves to amplify the response to weak platelet agonists, such as ADP, epinephrine, and low concentrations of collagen and thrombin.
  • TxA 2 is generated by cyclooxygenase from arachidonic acid, itself released by phospholipases upon cell activation.
  • the resulting unstable prostaglandin endoperoxides (PGG 2 or PGH 2 ) are converted to TxA 2 by the enzyme TxA 2 synthase .
  • the endoperoxides and TxA 2 generated by aggregating platelets could produce a profound vasoconstriction largely restricted to the area of the vessel immediately adjacent to the platelet plug.
  • Vasospasm associated with coronary or cerebral infarction could be produced by potent vasoconstrictors generated during platelet clumping.
  • An enhanced production of TxA 2 is associated with the pathogenesis of various thrombotic and ischemic disorders.
  • the inhibitors of TxA 2 biosynthesis should have beneficial advantages to the ischemic heart diseases, cerebral infarction and arteriosclerosis and diabetic disorders.
  • Thromboxane A 2 synthase in microsomal fractions used in the assay is isolated from rabbit platelets by conventional centrifugation methods. The reaction is initiated by the addition of substrate, prostaglandin G 2 to the tube which contains test compound (or vehicle) , assay buffer and enzyme, and continuously incubating for 30 minutes at 30°C, and then determined the production of thromboxane A 2 , which is rapidly converted to thromboxane B 2 . The amount of thromboxane B 2 formation is quantitated by radioimmunoassay method. Compounds are screened at 100 ⁇ M (Gresele et al . , 1991, Trends Pharmacol . Sci . . 12:158-163; Brownlie et al . , 1993, Brit. J. Pharmacol . 110:1600-1606) . The results of the thromboxane assay were as follows:
  • a strip of the uterus obtained from Long Evans derived female rats weighing 275 ⁇ 25 g and sacrificed by cervical dislocation is used.
  • the tissue is placed under 1 g tension in a 10 ml bath containing phosphate buffered saline (pH 7.4) at 32°C.
  • Test substance (30 ⁇ M) -induced isometrically recorded contraction by more than 50% within 5 min, relative to control 0.1 ⁇ M PGF2a-induced response indicates possible prostanoid FP receptor agonist activity.
  • PGF2a-induced contractile response indicates prostanoid FP receptor antagonist activity.
  • Coriolus versicolor is a mushroom.
  • the extract of thin 5 mushroom has been used for the treatment of post-operative malignancies. It is believed that the activity of Coriol us versicolor is due to immunomodulatory effects.
  • the quantitative and bioactivity protein fingerprints for the sample of Coriolus versicolor are set forth in Table 21.
  • the standard fingerprints which were established for pharmaceutical grade are set forth in Table 22. A comparison of the fingerprints for the sample and standard shows that they match, so the sample qualifies as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
  • Inhibitory concentrations ( ⁇ g/ml) which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of L1210 leukemia cells in culture.
  • Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to L1210 cells causes a 50% growth inhibition.
  • Activity unit is defined as the dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which added to L1210 cells in culture causes 50% growth inhibition
  • Aloe has two primary uses. One is use for wound healing and as an anti-inflammatory. The second major use i ⁇ as a 5 stimulant laxative. It is known as aloe vera or a barbadnsis. The aloe for wound healing is a mucilaginous gel obtained from the center of the leaf. The aloe form for use as a laxative is obtained from specialized cells that occur on the border of the outer and inner layers of the mesophyll 10 located beneath the epidermis of the leaves of the plant .
  • the laxative form is made from a bitter yellow latex obtained from the plant that is dried to a reddish-black mass.
  • the two aloe forms are very different.
  • j _5 Additional uses for aloe vera gel or aloe vera extract are for liver protection, arthritis, use as an anti- inflammatory, use as an anti-pruritic, use as anti-bacterial agent, use as an anti-ulcer agent.
  • the reference books describing aloe are Leung and Foster, 1996, and Bisset,
  • aloe There are many sources for aloe. It is sold commercially in a laxative form by Natures Way Products, Inc. (Springville, Utah) . Commercially available gel formulations include aloe vera (Aloecorp) , AristoTM (Steiner, Germany) , KrauterlaxTM (Dolorgiet, Germany) and Dermaide AloeTM (Dermaide
  • aloe The major clinical indications for aloe were discussed above, namely, wound healing, anti-inflammatory, liver protection, anti-pruritic, laxative, anti-bacterial and anti- "* ulcer activity.
  • An additional indication for which aloe may be effective is as an anti-leukemic agent which has been demonstrated in vi tro (Kupchan, 1976, J. Nat . Prod . 39 :223) . Others have reported activity against peptic ulcers and also improved circulation in minimal studies. The FDA studied
  • Aloe has been shown to have many biological effects. It is known to stimulate peristalsis, inhibit gastric secretion and dilate capillaries. Aloe also has mitogenic activity,
  • the primary assays used are the hepatocyte enzymes, the rat surgical wound healing model, cyclooxygenase-1, cyclooxygenase-2 and lipoxygenase assays.
  • the cyclooxygenase and lipoxygenase activities are performed as in the Saw 5 Palmetto section above.
  • the antithromboxane activities are analyzed as in the ginger section above.
  • Aloe extracts and fractions are analyzed for wound healing ability as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,487,899, Davis, a rodent wound healing model for analyzing the ability for aloe, either alone or in combination with other agents, to assist in healing of wounds . 5
  • aloe There are many putative components in aloe, including barbaloin, iso-barbaloin, o-glycosides, polysaccharide ⁇ Q glucomannan, bradykininase, tannins and magnesium lactate.
  • Chemical analysis is performed by HPLC and GPC.
  • the chemical analysis of aloe may also be performed by gas chromatography-mass spectroscopy (GC-MS) .
  • GC-MS gas chromatography-mass spectroscopy
  • a recent example of the chemical analysis for the components of aloe 5 was performed by Yamaguchi in 1993 (Yamaguchi et al . , 1993, Biosci . Biotech . Biochem . 5_7 (8) : 1350-1352) . There they studied hexane extracts and acetone extracts of freeze-dried aloe.
  • the gel primarily consists of several types of 0 polysaccharides, including an acidic galactan, mannan, a glucomannan, an arabinan, and/or a glucogalactomannan. Polysaccharides constitute 0.2-0.3% of the fresh gel. (Tyler & Foster, 1996)
  • the components include aracedonic acid as a 5 prostaglandin precursor (Afzal et al . , 1991, Plan ta Med .
  • the other major components include polysaccharides, including acidic galactan, mannan, glucomannan, arbinan and glucogalactomannan. Polysaccharides make up 0.2-0.3 of the fresh gel. The polysaccharide content 0 is determined by GPC. The glycomannan isolated from aloe was reported by Mandel and Das, 1980 (Mandel and Das, 1980,
  • aloe include various fatty acids and various hydrocarbons (Yamaguchi et al . , 1993, Biosci . Biotech . Biochem . 5J7(8) :1350-1352) .
  • the extract is typically standardized to 36% anthocynosides in doses of 160 mg, once - j _ Q or twice a day.
  • Bilberry in capsule form 25% anthrocyanosides, is available through Herbal Choice-Botalia, PhytoPharmica, Source Natural, Nature's Herbs and Nature's Way.
  • the clinical indications of bilberry are varied.
  • the primary indication is venous insufficiency for the lower
  • Bilberry has also been shown to have anti-inflammatory activity, anti-diarrhetic activity, wound
  • the botanical having vasoprotective and anti-inflammatory activity may be administered either topically or intravenously (Lietti et al., 1976, Arzneimi ttel -Forschung 26(5) :829) .
  • the components of bilberry include tannins, anthrocyanins, flavonoids, various invert sugars and pectins.
  • the components of bilberry are separated by HPLC, GPC or gel filtration. Examples of columns include polymer laboratories PL-gel 5m 50 ⁇ A polymer, Toyopearl 8HW 40S column, and
  • SephadexTM LH-20 dextran column is also used.
  • the material subjected to the partitioning is performed with ethyl/acetate-water solution, gel filtration with water and/or alcohol and/or water and/or acetone mobile phase.
  • the HPLC is performed using reversed phase column chromatography, (RP-HPLC) using water and/or water and acetone and/or water and alcohol as the mobile phase.
  • RP-HPLC reversed phase column chromatography
  • GPC water and/or water and alcohol and/or water and acetonitrile with or without buffer are used.
  • ethanol or chloroform is used, ethanol as the eluent.
  • the primary biological methods of analysis for bilberry for venous insufficiency indication is by a blood vessel contractility assay and platelet aggregation.
  • the primary assays are cyclooxygenase -1 and -2 and 5-lipoxygenase. The experiment is performed as described in the Saw Palmetto section above.
  • the platelet activating factor assay is performed as described by Morazzion and Magistretti (1990, Fi torick 6JL (1) :13-21) . Platelet aggregation in vi tro, platelet aggregation in vivo and platelet adhesiveness ex vivo are determined.
  • Another assay for the venous insufficiency clinical indication of the vasodilator inhibitory effects is done by the study of contractile response of coronary artery segments to acetycholine (Bettini et al . , 1991, Fi torick £2(1) : 15-28) .
  • the chemical analysis is performed using HPLC.
  • the primary components are: tannins, anthocyanins, flavonoids, plant acids, invert sugars, pectins.
  • Black Cohosh is a drug that is administered as either a dried rhizome or roots. It is a member of the buttercup family. It grows in open woods and at the edges of dense forests from Ontario to Tennessee and as far west as Missouri. Black Cohosh has traditionally been used for the treatment of dysmenorrhea, dyspepsia and rheumatism.
  • the German Commission E Monograph describes the use for premenstrual discomfort and dysmenorrhea. It is typically administered in daily doses of 40-200 mg either as a tea, a decoction or as a tincture in alcohol.
  • the clinical indications for Black Cohosh are premenstrual syndrome, dysmenorrhea, dyspepsia, rheumatism, sore throat, bronchitis, sedative and as a menstrual cycle regulator.
  • the ethanol extract was found to cause selective reduction of the serum concentrations of pituitary luteinizing hormone (LH) (Bradley ed. British Herbal Compendium, Vol . 1, British Herbal Medicine Association:Dorset, England, 1992) .
  • LH pituitary luteinizing hormone
  • the primary bioassays for the premenstrual syndrome clinical indication are the estrogen receptor binding assay, luteinizing hormone assay, the FSH bioassay and the oxytocin bioassay.
  • the in vi tro binding of the fractions of the total material and the components of Black Cohosh is assayed by several estrogen assays.
  • One assay is the binding of two frozen calf uterus estrogen receptors.
  • the second assay is estrogenic antagonism in vi tro .
  • a third assay is a rat uteri estrogen receptor model .
  • Black Cohash extract and fractions are administered p.o.
  • a strip of the uterus obtained from Long Evans derived female rats weighing 275 ⁇ 25 g and sacrificed by cervical dislocation is used.
  • the tissue is placed under 1 g tension in a 10 ml bath containing phosphate buffered saline (pH 7.4) at 32°C.
  • Black Cohash and fractions are introduced at 30 ⁇ M.
  • ability to reduce the oxytocin-induced contractile response by more than 50% indicates oxytocin receptor antagonist activity.
  • LH luteinizing hormone assay
  • Black Cohosh The components in Black Cohosh include the steroidal triterpenes (actein, cimigoside, 27-deoxyactein, cimicifugin, tannin and the alkaloids) . Isoflavones are also present in Black Cohosh, including forononetins. Minor constituents also include isoferulics and salicyclics. They are analyzed by HPLC.
  • the drug chamomile consists of the dried flower head of German chamomile, Metricaria recuti ta . There is also Roman chamomile obtained from Chamaelu ⁇ ? noble which is different than German chamomile. Use of Roman chamomile is largely in the United Kingdom.
  • the German therapeutic monograph also has chamomile preparations for use for gastrointestinal spasms and gastrointestinal tract inflammatory diseases. Topical products are also used.
  • Chamomile has many clinical indications. Primary indications are use as an anti-spasmodic for GI distress and dermatological anti-inflammatory agent. Other indications include treating the common cold, dyspeptic complaints, acne, inflammation of mouth and wound healing. Chamomile is also reported to have bactericidal and fungicidal activities.
  • infusion of one or two grams of the flowers or 1 to 4 millimeters of tincture are used for gastrointestinal spasms.
  • Traditional uses include treating cholic, diarrhea, indigestion, insomnia, infantile convulsions, toothache, and bleeding and swollen gums.
  • One example of the anti-microbial use of chamomile is as a vaginal douch as described in U.S.
  • Fractional analysis for chamomile is performed in a manner similar to that described above for St. John's Wort using reverse phase chromatography.
  • the enzymatic assays for the anti-inflammatory activity are cyclooxygenase-1 and -2 and 5- lipoxygenase. These assays are performed as described in the Saw Palmetto section above.
  • the muscle spasm tissue culture assay is performed on isolated guinea pig ileum.
  • the spasmodic assay is performed as described in Carle and Gomaa, 1992 (Carle and Gomaa, 1992, Drugs of Today 28 (8) :559-565; Achterrath-Tuckermann et al. , 1980, Planta Med. 3_9:38) .
  • Whole animal assays are also performed, including the Ca 24 influx to mast cells and the mouse ear dermatitis and rat paw swelling assay. The mouse ear experiment is as described below. 15.5.1 MOUSE EAR DERMATITIS MODEL
  • Chamomile extract, oil and fractions are administered i.p. (0.1, 1, 10 and 100 mg/kg) to groups of 5 ICR derived male mice weighing 22 ⁇ 2 g one hour before sensitization to oxazolone (0.1 ml of 5% solution) applied to the preshaven abdominal surface. Seven days later, animals are challenged with oxazolone (25 ⁇ l of a 2% solution) applied to the right ear, vehicle being applied to the left ear. After 24 hours, each mouse is sacrificed and ear thickness measured with a Dyer Model micrometer gauge. A 30 % or more ( ⁇ 30) enhancement relative to the vehicle treated control group is considered significant and indicates possible immunostimulant activity. (Griswold et al . , 1974, Cell . Immunol . IX - 198- 204) .
  • the paw inflammation experiment is performed as described below.
  • Chamomile extract, oil and fractions are administered p.o. (100 mg/kg) to a group of 3 Long Evans male or female overnight fasted rats weighing 150 ⁇ 20 g one hour before right hind paw injection of carageenan (0.1 ml of 1% suspension intraplantar) .
  • Reduction of hind paw edema by 30 % or more ( ⁇ 30) three hours after carageenan administration indicates significant acute anti-inflammatory activity. (Winter et al . , 1962, Proc . Soc . Exper . Biol . Med . Ill: 544-547) ) .

Abstract

The present invention relates generally to botanical materials and methods for making such materials in medicinally useful and pharmaceutically acceptable forms. More particularly, the present invention relates to the use of compositional and activity fingerprints in the processing of botanical materials to produce drugs which qualify as pharmaceutical grade compositions which are suitable for use in clinical or veterinary settings to treat and/or ameliorate diseases, disorders or conditions.

Description

PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE BOTANICAL DRUGS
This is a continuation-in-part of co-pending U.S. Serial No. 08/632,273, filed on April 15, 1996, which is a continuation-in-part of U.S. Serial No. 08/421,993 filed on April 14, 1995 abandoned in favor of U.S. Serial No. 08/774,550, filed February 4, 1997.
1. FIELD OF THE INVENTION The present invention relates generally to botanical materials and methods for transforming such materials into medicinally useful and pharmaceutically acceptable forms. More particularly, the present invention relates to the use of compositional and activity fingerprints in the processing of botanical materials to produce botanical drugs which qualify as pharmaceutical grade compositions which are suitable for use in clinical settings to treat and/or ameliorate diseases, disorders and/or conditions.
2. BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Pharmaceutical manufacturing is based on control over the composition and bioactivity for each manufactured batch. This standardization and control provides reproducible material in the predictable and consistent treatment of patients. Herbal medicines, produced from botanical materials, have presented a unique problem for manufacturers desiring the control, reproducibility, and standardization that are required of pharmaceuticals. This problem is primarily due to the plurality of components contained in an herbal medicine and the large variation in composition and potency due to raw material growing and harvesting conditions.
Plants have been, and continue to be, the source of a wide variety of medicinal compounds. For centuries, various forms of botanically derived materials have been used to treat countless different ailments. The botanical materials have typically been in the form of powders made from of one or more plants or plant parts or extracts derived from whole plants or selected plant parts. These powders and extracts are for the most part complex mixtures of both biologically active and biologically inactive compounds. Although plant powders and extracts have been used widely for medicinal purposes, there are a number of problems associated with the use of such medicaments. For example, the complex chemical nature of the botanical materials makes it difficult to use the botanical materials in any type of controlled and predictable manner. The potential variations in the chemical composition of different batches of material obtained from different plant harvests makes such materials unsuitable for use in clinical situations.
On a positive note, the complex groupings of bioactive components typically found in botanical materials presents the potential for synergistic bioactivity profiles. However, these potential increases in medicinal effectiveness are not predictable due to the unknown nature of these complex materials. The above problems associated with the inherent chemical complexity of botanical medicaments has resulted in a great deal of effort being directed to the separation and isolation of the biologically active components from numerous medicinally important botanical materials. This area of endeavor has expanded rapidly in conjunction with the many improvements in chemical separation and analysis technology. Once isolated and purified, the various active components are used in clinical settings to establish the medicinal effectiveness of a specific component. Separation and purification of individual components from botanical materials is the cornerstone of this type of drug development procedure. Once purified, the suspected active component is typically mixed with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier and subjected to further studies in laboratory animals and eventual clinical trials in humans. Upon proof of clinical efficacy, these types of drugs are considered to be pharmaceutical grade because they contain a single or at most a small number of well-characterized compounds which are present in known quantities.
Pharmaceutical grade drugs are advantageous in that they allow careful tracking of the effects of individual compounds in treatment protocols. Further, the dosage of the drug can be carefully controlled to provide relatively predictable medicinal action. A disadvantage of the relative purity of such pharmaceutical grade drugs is that the potential for complex and synergistic biological activity provided by naturally occurring plant materials is reduced because of the isolation of the drug from its natural environment. The study of isolated products may represent also artifacts produced by breakdown of sensitive biological/botanical complexes. The potential benefit provided by such synergistic activity is believed by many industry experts to be outweighed by the clinical risks associated with the use of complex plant materials which are not well characterized or controlled in a clinical setting.
Although isolation and purification of single compounds from plant materials has been a popular form of drug research and development, there also has been interest in studying complex botanical extracts to characterize their medicinal qualities. For example, as discussed below, mistletoe extracts have been studied in some detail. Mistletoe belongs to the genus Viscum (family,
Loranthaceae) which includes a variety of semiparasitic plants found all over the world. Mistletoe is a parasite which grows on a variety of deciduous trees including apple, cherry, oak, ash Hawthorn, lime and acorn. Mistletoe and extracts of mistletoe have been used for centuries in a wide variety of therapeutic settings. The effectiveness of mistletoe as a remedy for treating a multitude of ailments has been the subject of a great deal of folklore, superstition and mystical accounts. Although many of the early uses for mistletoe may have been based more on fantasy than on fact, the reputation of mistletoe as a powerful elixir is well deserved because this parasitic plant contains a rather large variety of complex and pharmacologically potent components.
Beginning in the early 1900' s, mistletoe and the pharmacological properties of extracts from mistletoe have been subjected to a more rigorous scientific investigation. In particular, mistletoe extracts have been suggested for use in treating a variety of specific diseases including cardiovascular illnesses, especially hypertension and arteriosclerosis; cancer and arthrosis. Fermented mistletoe extracts marketed under the tradenames ISCADOR®, HELIXOR®, and PLENOSOL® have been proposed for use in treating a number of specific diseases. ISCADOR® and HELIXOR® have been injected subcutaneously while PLENOSOL® has been administered both intracutaneously and intravenously. These three commercially available preparations are derived from mistletoe found in Europe, Viscum album L .
Since 1980, the investigation of mistletoe has increased due to its immunomodulatory properties and potential usefulness in treating HIV and cancer. See International Journal of Cancer Research Treatment-ONCOLOGY- Vol. 43, Supplement 1, 1986. A major problem facing mistletoe investigators has been the analysis, identification and standardization of the pharmacologically active components in mistletoe and extracts thereof . This problem is exacerbated by the fact that the numerous complex components which are found in mistletoe extracts vary widely in type and amount depending upon the species of mistletoe, the location where the plant is grown, the time of year when the plant is harvested, the particular host tree, the extraction procedure used and a number of other factors.
The principal classes of components in mistletoe which have been found to provide pharmacological activity include phenylpropanoids, lectins, phenylpropans, viscotoxins, alkaloids, flavonoids, lignans, amines, phenyl carboxylic acids and polysaccharides. Although the general classes of pharmacologically important compounds which are generally present in mistletoe have been identified, investigators have not had a great deal of success with respect to standardizing the multitude of available extracts to establish if one or more components are responsible for the observed bioactivity and whether the specific components act together or may be effective individually. The extremely diverse nature of mistletoe extracts and the inherent variability in extract compositions makes it difficult to use the extracts to conduct clinical investigations.
The preceding discussion regarding mistletoe is exemplary of the state of the art with respect to the plant materials which have been studied in detail. Many other complex plant materials and extracts exist which have potent, but relatively unpredictable, medicinal properties. These materials are, for the most part, useless in a clinical setting because of the inherent risks involved with treating patients with poorly characterized materials which have no established batch consistency and which may differ widely in composition. Accordingly, there is a need to provide methods for standardizing such complex botanical materials so that they may be used more effectively in clinical research and patient treatments.
3. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention provides a method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug. The method is the process of "pharmaprinting. " In one embodiment, the method comprises the steps of: providing a botanical material which comprises a plurality of components which have a given biological activity; removing a representative aliquot from the botanical material; separating the aliquot into a plurality of marker fractions wherein each of the marker fractions comprises at least one of the active components; determining the degree of the given biological activity for each of the marker fractions to provide a bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot; and comparing the bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to provide a bioactivity fingerprint comparison to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug based on the bioactivity fingerprint comparison. This invention also provides a method comprising the steps of : providing a botanical material which has a given biological activity, said botanical material comprising a plurality of components; separating a representative aliquot of the botanical material into a plurality of marker fractions wherein at least one of the marker fractions comprises at least one active component; determining the degree of the given biological activity for each of the marker fractions to provide a bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot; and comparing the bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug. In one embodiment, one or more of the marker fractions contain one active component.
The method may also comprise the additional steps of : determining the amount of the active components in each of the marker fractions to provide a quantitative compositional fingerprint of the aliquot and comparing both the quantitative compositional and bioactivity fingerprints with a quantitative compositional and bioactivity fingerprint standard to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug. The method may also comprise the additional steps of: determining a total bioactivity of the aliquot of the botanical material and comparing the total bioactivity of the aliquot with that of a total bioactivity of a standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade drug.
The invention also provides a method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug, the method comprising the steps of: providing a botanical material which comprises a plurality of components which have a given biological activity and wherein each active component has a standardized bioactivity profile; removing a representative aliquot from the botanical material; separating the aliquot into a plurality of marker fractions wherein each of the marker fractions comprises at least one of the active components; measuring the amount of each of the active component (s) present in each of the marker fractions; calculating the bioactivity of each of the marker fractions based on the amount of each active component present and the standardized component bioactivity profile to provide a calculated bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot; comparing the calculated bioactivity fingerprint of the aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to provide a bioactivity fingerprint comparison to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug is obtained based on the bioactivity fingerprint comparison.
The method of the invention is useful to make a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug from any botanical material which has a given or desired biological activity. Preferably, the botanical material is an extract made from plant material such as an aqueous or organic extract such as an alcoholic extract or a supercritical carbon dioxide extract. Alternatively, the botanical material is a powdered plant material, a seed oil, an essential oil or the product of steam distillation. Preferably, the botanical material is a homogeneous material .
The botanical material may be any botanical material . Suitable botanical materials include, but are not limited to, materials of plants commonly known as Aloe, Bilberry, Black Cohosh, Chamomile, Chaste tree, Chestnut, Echinacea, Evening Primrose, Feverfew, Garlic, Ginger, Ginkgo, Ginseng (Asian) , Goldenseal, Green tea, Guggulipid, Hawthorn, Ivy, Kava, Licorice, Milk Thistle, Passion Flower, Pumpkin, Pygeum, Rosemary, Siberian Ginseng, Saw Palmetto, St. John's Wort, Stinging Nettle, Valerian, etc. The botanical material may also be a mixture of plant materials including, but not limited to, mixtures of materials of plants such as Saw Palmetto and Pumpkin seed; Echinacea and Goldenseal; St. John's Wort and Valerian.
In this invention the active component (s) may be one of the following chemicals: acetogenins, alkaloids, carbohydrates, carotenoids, cinnamic acid derivatives, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, flavonoids, glycosides, isoprenoids, macrocyclic antibiotics, nucleic acids, penicillins, peptides, phenolics, polyacetylenes, polyketides, polyphenols, polysaccharides, proteins, prostaglandins, steroids and terpenoids.
The bioactivity/clinical indication for the botanical may be associated with any disease, disorder or condition of humans or other animals. Thus the methods are useful to produce pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs for treatment and/or amelioration and/or prevention of human and/or veterinary diseases, disorders or conditions. Exemplary indications include, but are not limited to, an allergic/ inflammatory disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, a cancer or a central nervous system disorder, a gastrointestinal disorder, a metabolic disorder, nausea or a disorder induced by a microbial organism or a virus.
In these methods, the aliquot may be separated into both biologically active and inactive components. Furthermore, the marker fractions may comprise a class of related components .
This invention also provides a method of preparing a pharmaprint for a pharmaceutical grade drug. Furthermore, this invention provides for a pharmaceutical grade drug prepared by the methods described above.
3.1. DEFINITIONS
The term "pharmaceutical grade" when used in this specification means that certain specified biologically active and/or inactive components in a botanical drug must be within certain specified absolute and/or relative concentration range and/or that the components must exhibit certain activity levels as measured by a disease-, disorder- or condition-specific bioactivity assay. The disease, disorder or condition may afflict a human or an animal.
As used herein "components" means discrete compounds (i.e. chemicals) which either are present naturally in a botanical drug or have been added to the botanical drug so as to prepare a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug having components within a defined bioactivity range (s) and/or compositional range (s) . As used herein "active components (s) " means one or more component (s) for which the summation of the individual component (s) activity in a disease-specific bioassay accounts for a substantial portion of the observed biological activity of botanical material. Preferably, the summation of the active components' activities accounts of the majority or greater than 50% of the observed biological activity.
As used herein "fractions" typically means a group of components or class of structurally similar components having defined parameters such as solubility, molecular weight range, polarity range, adsorption coefficients, binding characteristics, chemical reactivity or selective soluability. Most frequently fractions will be the product of chromatographic separation techniques, i.e., flash chromatography, preparative high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) , preparative gas chromatography, preparative thin layer chromatography, affinity chromatography, size exclusion chromatography, liquid-liquid chromatography e . g. , counter-current chromatography or centripetal chromatography. The present invention may be understood more fully by reference to the following: detailed description of the invention, examples of specific embodiments in Sections below and the appended figures. 4. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 is a schematic representation of a procedure in accordance with the present invention which is used to establish standard chemical and/or bioactivity fingerprints against which subsequent processed botanical materials are compared during production of pharmaceutical grade drugs.
FIG. 2 is a schematic representation of a procedure in accordance with the present invention which is used to process botanical materials into pharmaceutical grade drugs.
FIG. 3 is a schematic representation of a procedure for isolating different classes of biologically active components .
FIG. 4 shows the result of the fractional analysis for Saw Palmetto from a commercially available product. The vertical axis is in weight/weight percent. The two axes are the fractions of the various fatty acids and fatty acid esters and the solvent system.
FIG. 5 shows the inhibition of specific 3H-DHT binding by increasing concentrations of Saw Palmetto extract #3. The molar concentrations were calculated assuming a molecular weight of 200 for the active components.
FIG. 6 shows the inhibition of specific 3H-DHT binding by increasing concentrations of lauric acid ethyl ester.
FIG. 7 shows the inhibition of specific 3H-DHT binding by increasing concentrations of linoleic acid ethyl ester.
FIG. 8 shows the chemical analysis of five different commercially available Saw Palmetto products. The vertical axis is in weight/weight percent. The other axes are the fatty acids and fatty acid esters and the source material. FIG. 9 shows the chromatographic steps for the analysis of the mistletoe extract.
FIG. 10 shows the fractional analysis for St. John's Wort. The vertical axis is in weight/weight percent. The horizontal axes are the fractions and the chemical constituents .
FIG. 11 shows the results of the chemical analysis for St. John's Wort. The vertical axis is the mg per 10 ml of product and the other axes are the chemical compounds and the commercial source.
FIG. 12 shows the fractional analysis for ginger. The vertical axis is in weight/weight percent. The remaining axes are fraction number and the specific chemical components .
FIG. 13 shows the results of the chemical analysis of five commercially available ginger products. The vertical axis is in mg per capsule. The horizontal axes are the ginger constituents and the commercial source.
5. DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION 5.1. METHODS OF PHARMAPRINTING
The present invention provides a method for producing botanical drugs which may be classified as being of pharmaceutical grade. The method is designated "Pharmaprinting. " The pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs made by the method of the present invention are particularly well-suited for use in clinical studies and more importantly for use in treatment of patients. The method insures that the drug being used for a particular protocol will be of consistent quality and consistently suitable for use as human and veterinary prophylatic or therapeutic agents.
The present invention provides the ability to closely control the quality, dosing and clinical effectiveness of botanical extracts and other botanical materials, e.g., botanical extract and mammalian tissue derived biological preparation. One aspect of the present invention involves the establishment of the chemical and/or bioactivity fingerprint standards for various botanical materials. Once established, the fingerprint standards are used in drug production procedures to insure that the botanical materials meet pharmaceutical grade requirements. Specific quantitative and biological fingerprints are presented which have been established for a number of botanical materials as a further aspect of the invention. These fingerprints are useful for determining if a particular botanical material meets levels of pharmacological activity and composition requirements for a particular treatment regimen. Such a determination is important to insure that clinical studies and patient treatment with the botanical materials are based on consistent and verifiable extract composition parameters.
This invention is useful in providing botanical materials which are sufficiently characterized and whose compositions are consistent between batches, so that they can be precisely dosed and used effectively in clinical settings. The methods described herein provide an assurance that the results of a clinical trial will be ■ reproducible.
Initially, a sample of the botanical material of interest is obtained. Many botanicals are commercially available as the raw material or as a processed extract. Often it is a botanical extract or other composition which is intended for use as a drug. The processed material may include a plurality of active components which exhibit a given biological activity and plurality of inactive components which do not directly exhibit the biological activity of interest. In one embodiment, an aliquot is removed from the botanical material and subjected to a quality assurance or standardization procedure. Preferably, the aliquot is a representative aliquot of a homogeneous botanical material. The procedure involves separating the aliquot of botanical material into a plurality of marker fractions wherein each of the marker fractions includes at least one of the active components or in some cases one of the inactive components. The amount of active component or inactive component in each of the marker fractions is determined in order to provide a quantitative fingerprint of the aliquot. The degree of biological activity for each of the marker fractions is also determined to provide a biological activity fingerprint for the aliquot. The chemical and/or biological activity fingerprints of the aliquot are then compared to corresponding fingerprints which have been established for a pharmaceutical grade drug. If the fingerprints of the botanical match the standard fingerprints, then the botanical is identified as a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug. If not, then the botanical may be modified so as to provide a match with the standard fingerprints or may be rejected.
5.1.1. METHODS OF DEVELOPING A PHARMAPRINT
The method of developing a Pharmaprint for a botanical when a range of putative active components is known begins with a literature review. It involves reviewing the chemical literature, the biological literature, the published bioassays and clinical data for the botanical. Particularly useful sources of information are the NAPRALERT computer database managed by Dr. Norman Farnsworth in the Program for Collaborative Research in the Pharmaceutical Sciences, University of Illinois, Chicago; Leung and Foster, Encyclopedia of Common Natural Ingredients Used in Food, Drugs and Cosmetics, 2nd Ed. John Wiley & Sons: New York, NY, 1996; Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals, ed. N.G. Bisset, CRC Press.-Boca Raton, FL, 1994; Duke, Handbook of Biologically Active Phytochemicals and Their Activities, CRC Press:Boca Raton, FL, 1992; Tyler and Foster "Herbs and Phytomedicinal Products" in Handbook of Nonprescription Drugs Berardi et al . eds., United Book Press, Ine . :Washington, DC, 1996. For a given indication, the literature must be studied to confirm that the putative active components are actually associated with that disease state. In addition, if there are any bioassays known for the putative active components and known for the indication, the bioassays must be consistent with both the indication and the putative active components. The appropriate bioassay(s) is tied to a clinically relevant endpoint(s) . The bioassay(s) should be quantitative over a wide concentration range. Typically, an ICb0 curve (Inhibitory Concentration 50%) or an appropriate K, curve is prepared. A thorough chemical and biological analysis of both putative active components and chromatographic fractions of the botanical is then performed. The results are analyzed to prepare a quantitative analysis of the biological activity for each of the chemical components in the sample. Then, the bioactivity of the sample as a whole is compared to the bioactivity of the individual components. At this point the individual chemical components can be correlated with a clinically relevant endpoint . Similar methodologies may be applied to bioassays measuring stimulatory effects. Based on activity of the components individually and knowing the total activity, the components should, when combined, account for a substantial portion of the biological activity. Generally, the combined activity will account for at least 25% of the total activity. Preferably, the summation of the individual active components' activities account for the majority or greater than 50% of the observed biological activity. More preferably, the isolated individual components are responsible for more than 70% of the activity. More preferable still, the isolated individual components are responsible for greater than 80% of the biological activity.
Another consideration will be to select as few active components as possible to be part of the Pharmaprint . Fewer active components are important for practical considerations in raw material acceptance and manufacturing. In this invention, a correlation is established between the relevant chemical components and the bioactivity. Once a satisfactory correlation is established, it may not be necessary to perform the biological fingerprints on each sample. A chemical analysis of the appropriate components and/or marker fractions. Rather, each sample of the botanical of interest will suffice to account for most of the biological activity and establish that a given botanical sample is pharmaceutical grade .
In one embodiment, the present invention may involve one of the following procedures. One procedure, as schematically outlined in FIG. 1, involves establishing the compositional and bioactivity fingerprint standards for a given pharmaceutical grade botanical drug. Once the fingerprint standards are established, then the actual processing of the botanical into a pharmaceutical grade drug can be carried out as schematically outlined in FIG. 2.
The initial step in establishing the chemical and/or bioactivity fingerprint for a given botanical involves separating the extract or powder into one or more groups as represented by step 1 in FIG. 1. These groups are separated out and identified based on their potential as markers (which may or may not comprise active components) for the fingerprint which is to be established for the processed botanical material . The putative components or groups of putative components which are chosen and identified as potential markers will vary widely depending upon the botanical being processed and the pharmaceutical use. There should be at least two putative markers selected for each botanical . The number of potential markers is may be more than five and can be as high 15 to 20 or more for complex botanical extracts or powders. The potential markers are identified and selected, for the most part, based on their potential biological activity or contribution to biological activity for a given pharmaceutical application. For different indication the same botanical may be used for preparing an extract with a different extraction procedure in order to optimize the specific bioactive constituents. Markers which have no apparent biological activity by themselves may be separated out and may be included as markers for use in the fingerprint. These "proxy" markers may be desirable as an internal standard where the markers' presence is indicative of other active components necessary to provide a substantial portion of the overall observed biological activity for the botanical drug.
The initial separation of the botanical into various groups of putative markers is accomplished by conventional separation techniques ranging from simple extraction to complex affinity chromatography including gel filtration chromatography, flash silica gel chromatography and reverse phase chromatography. Once the putative markers have been identified for a given botanical, then the bioactivity of each of the markers is determined as depicted by step 2 in FIG. 1. The particular bioassay used to determine bioactivity of the botanical is chosen based upon the intended use for the botanical . The bioassay preferably will provide a reflection of the putative markers' bioactivity with respect to the condition or indication which is to be treated with the botanical.
The bioassay results obtained in step 2 are used to identify the components having the desired bioactivity (step 3) and those which are less active or essentially inactive (step 4) . Each of the groups identified in steps 3 and 4 is then analyzed quantitatively to determine the amount of each component present in each group. The results of the bioassays and quantitative compositional assays are then used to prepare a bioassay fingerprint and/or a chemical fingerprint for the botanical as depicted by step 5 in FIG. 1. As part of establishing the fingerprints for the botanical, acceptable ranges of bioactivity and/or chemical composition are determined. This is done primarily based upon establishing acceptable ranges of bioactivity and quantitative amounts for each marker which provide for the desired pharmacological activity of the processed material as a whole. In addition, various combinations of active and inactive marker fractions may be evaluated to establish potential increases in desired bioactivity resulting from combinations of the active and inactive components. The bioassay and quantitative fingerprints which are established in step 5 provide an accurate identification of the botanical which can be used in establishing the dosage regimens and treatment schedules which are necessary for clinical use. The dosage regimens and treatment schedules are established using conventional clinical methods which are commonly employed when investigating any new drug. The processed material which is used to determine the dosage and treatment schedules must be matched with and meet the requirements of the fingerprints established in step 5. This method insures that the dosage and treatment schedules are effective and reproducible since the processed materials used in the dosage and scheduling studies all have the same fingerprints in accordance with the present invention.
The bioassay and quantitative fingerprints which are determined by the general procedure as set forth in FIG. 1 are used as part of the manufacturing procedure for producing pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs. The fingerprints are used as part of a quality assurance or standardization procedure to insure that a given botanical contains the appropriate compounds and is processed correctly to provide a botanical drug which will perform the same clinically as the material which has been standardized and tested in accordance with the procedure set forth in FIG. 1.
An exemplary procedure for producing pharmaceutical grade botanicals in accordance with the present invention is shown schematically in FIG. 2. The botanical of interest 21 is first processed by extraction, powdering or other manufacturing process to form a processed botanical material 22. A sample of the processed material 22 is then analyzed to establish whether or not it matches the fingerprint requirements established during the standardization procedure of FIG. 1. This quality assurance or standardization procedure is depicted at 23 in FIG. 2. If the processed material meets the previously established fingerprint requirements for the particular material, then it is approved as being of pharmaceutical grade as represented by step 24. If the material is close, but does not quite match the standard fingerprint, then it is modified as required to match the fingerprint standards (step 25) . The modification of the processed material to meet fingerprint standards may be done by a variety of ways . The methods of further processing botanicals may including additional extraction of the botanical, selective extraction, selective processing, recombination of batches ( e . g. mixing high and low dose batches to prepare the pharmaceutical grade material) or the addition of various compounds, as required. If the botanical is substantially outside the fingerprint ranges for both bioactivity markers and quantitative markers, then the batch is rejected (step 26) .
In one embodiment, the quality assurance standardization step 23 used to determine if a given botanical is pharmaceutical grade involves obtaining a uniform sample, preferably a homogeneous sample, or aliquot of the botanical which is to be tested. The sample should include the active components which contribute to the observed biological activity of the material and produce the bioactivity and/or chemical fingerprint of the previously determined standard. The sample will also include one or more inactive components. Inactive components are those which may not have a direct measurable biological activity. Inactive components include the following categories: components with activity so low that they do not account for a substantial portion of the activity; components whose presence indicates the presence of other bioactive components and can act as proxy markers for these components; inactive components that are chemically or biologically inactive in the relevant assays. The sample iε preferably only a small aliquot of the botanical material being tested. Accordingly, it is important that a uniform sample, preferably a homogeneous sample, be obtained which is representative of the entire batch of material.
A more detailed schematic is shown in FIG. 3 showing the initial separation of the different components present in an aqueous extract of a botanical. Sequential extraction and precipitation are used to isolate the active components in either the aqueous or the organic phase. The scheme in FIG. 3 is particularly well suited for separating the classes of water-soluble active components from a botanical such as mistletoe.
An exemplary general method for separating plants into major classes of chemical components is set forth schematically in FIG. 3. Primarily fresh plants (including leaves, roots, flowers, berries and stem) should be used. Specific plant parts, such as the leaves, flowers, stems or root may be used if desired.
The specific part or whole plant may be frozen at liquid nitrogen temperature. This facilitates grinding and also preserves the integrity and potency of the active components. The pulverized powder is extracted with distilled water repeatedly. If desired, the extraction may be carried out with hot water, alcohol, other organic solvents, aqueous alcohol, dilute acetic acid or any combination thereof. The actual temperature chosen is preferably close to or at the boiling temperature of water. It is preferred that the overall bioactivity of the aqueous extract be initially determined. The combined water extracts are subjected to a specific bioassay, e . g. , a test for inhibiting the growth of bacteria in Petri dishes if the drug is to be used as antibacterial. Alternatively, tests against cell cultures of cancer cells are conducted preferably if the drug is intended for use as an anticancer agent. From these data, bioactivity units contained in an extract per ml are calculated (bioactivity units are defined as the number of dilution of this extract needed to inhibit 50% growth of bacterium or cancer cell in test system) . Similarly bioactivity units for a stimulatory effect, e . g . , immunostimulation can be calculated.
For establishing fingerprints in accordance with the present invention, the plant is extracted according to the procedure as set forth in FIG. 3 to separate it into major components ( e . g . saponins, terpenoids, lipids, alkaloids, nucleic acids, proteins and carbohydrates) . Each separated group of components is tested for bioactivity as needed. This may point to activity (e.g. in protein and alkaloid factions as in Viscum album) . The active class or classes of compounds are further separated into individual components by affinity chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography, or gas chromatography. The components with major contribution towards biological activity are quantified on the basis of weight and specific bioactivity units. These components provide the fingerprint to establish the pharmaceutical requirements for the original herbal extract. The bioactivity units per ml of the pharmaceutical grade extract provide a way to establish exact doses for clinical studies.
Once the sample is separated into individual marker fractions, and at least one having at least one active component, each fraction is analyzed to determine the amount of active component therein and provide a quantitative fingerprint of the sample. The quantitation of each fraction can be achieved using any of the known quantitative analysis methods. Exemplary quantitation methods include gravimetric analysis, spectral analysis or the use of quantitative detectors, such as those used in gas chromatography or high performance liquid chromatography and other separation systems. Other suitable quantitative analytical methods include analysis by enzymatic, radiometric, colorimetric, spectrophotometric, fluorescent or phosphorescent methods and antibody assays such as enzyme linked immunosorbant assay (ELISA) or radioimmunoassay (RIA) .
In one embodiment, the results of the quantitative analysis of each fraction are used to prepare a quantitative fingerprint of the sample. The fingerprint is composed of the quantity of component in each of the marker fractions and the identity of the component. This quantitative fingerprint is then compared to the known standard fingerprint which has been established (FIG. 1) in order for the material to be considered as pharmaceutical grade. If the quantitative fingerprint of the sample falls with the range of quantities sat forth for the pharmaceutical grade fingerprint, then the material may be identified as being of pharmaceutical grade. As a further part of the quality assurance assay, the individual marker fractions may be subjected to biological assays. The biological assays which are used to test the various fractions are the same as those used for the standard fingerprint and will also depend upon the particular clinical use intended for the material .
The bioactivity fingerprint generated for the material is compared to the standard bioactivity fingerprint which has been established in order for the material to be considered as pharmaceutical grade. If the bioactivity fingerprint of the sample falls within the range of bioactivities set forth for the pharmaceutical grade fingerprint, then the material is identified as, and approved as, being of pharmaceutical grade.
5.1.2. ALTERNATIVE METHODS OF DEVELOPING A PHARMAPRINT
The method of pharmaprinting a botanical when the putative active components are not known also begins with a literature review. It involves reviewing any chemical literature, biological literature, published bioassays or clinical data available for the botanical or for botanicals with related activities. Based on the disease state, a series of relevant bioassays is chosen. The activity of the total sample or extract is analyzed in the bioassays. Those bioassays that show activity are then used to analyze fractions of the botanical for which the putative active components are not yet known. The fractionation is based on the usual methods, e . g. , separation by dielectric constant, polarity, size or absorptive power. The fractions are then analyzed to determine which fraction is responsible for the activity. Assuming activity is found, each active fraction is refractionated to isolate the individual putative active components, i.e., pure chemical compounds. Based on knowing the individual chemical compounds and knowing their quantitative biological activity, a quantitative potency curve may be drawn and the 50% inhibitory concentration (ICb0) for each individual chemical component may be determined. If the putative active components are agonists, then other parameters (binding, activation, response) will be needed. In the general case, the bioassay will consist of appropriate tests of the stimulatory or inhibitory effects of the constituents, fractions or entire extract, followed by an appropriate quantitative evaluation of those effects. For the most likely (or typical) assays in which a standard (or radiolabelled) agonist causes a measurable effect, inhibition by the subject material may be assessed and expressed typically via the determination of an IC50 value, or other suitable measure (e.g., K>) . The activities of individual putative active components are then totalled and that summation is compared to the activity in the unfractionated botanical sample. If these components account for a substantial portion of the activity, then one has an initial fingerprint of "active components" for the botanical where the active components were not known.
5.1.3 ADDITIONAL VARIATIONS ON THE METHOD OF DEVELOPING A PHARMAPRINT
The general method outlined above for Pharmaprinting a botanical whose putative active components are not known has several variations should complications arise in the course of the analysis. One variation occurs when the summation of individual components do not account for a substantial portion of the biological activity of the botanical. At this point there are several likely reasons for the reduced activity of the individual components, one, decomposition or degradation of active components or, two, a synergistic effect. In another possible scenario there may be no significant activity seen from any of the fractions, but the whole botanical or extract shows activity in the bioassay. To determine if the active components are decomposing in the course of the assay is relatively simple. One merely recombines all of the fractions and compares the activity of the recombined fractions with the activity of the crude material. If substantial activity has been lost, then the problem is probably decomposition. To determine which active components may be decomposing, the chromatographic analysis of the crude botanical is compared with that of the recombined fractions. Peaks that are missing or are reduced in size indicate that components are decomposing. To overcome decomposition many methods exist. Typically, milder extraction/fractionation methods such as liquid-liquid chromatography (counter-current chromatography) or supercritical carbon dioxide extraction or chromatography may be used. Another explanation for the activity of the individual fractions not accounting for a substantial portion of the expected total activity is a synergistic effect between one or more active components. To determine that a synergistic effect is taking place, pair-wise recombined fractions need to be analyzed. If the combined fractions show more activity than the individual fractions, two or more individual components in the fractions may be acting synergistically. For example, if you have three fractions each responsible for 10% of the bioactivity (their uncombined additive bioactivity is 30%) but the combined fractions are responsible for 100% of the activity. In that case the fractions are acting synergistically. By repeated pair-wise recombination of fractions or looking at larger fractions, any synergistic activity will be discovered. Once two fractions show synergy, they are then refractionated as above, and pairs of individual fractions or pairs of isolated components are studied to find the individual components that act synergistically. Three way comparisons of individual components or fractions may also be studied.
What if the fractions have no activity in the bioassay in which the botanical shows activity? Here, the explanations include decomposition, synergy, or many many active components such that no individual fraction shows activity. The first step would be to fractionate each initial fraction and see if active components appear in the bioassay. It that does not succeed, the fractions should be recombined and assayed to determine if decomposition of the actives is taking place. If decomposition is taking place, the appropriate measures as described above should be taken. If there is no decomposition, then alternative methods of fractionation should be tried. Eventually, large enough or appropriately sized or selected fractions will show activity. If synergy is a suspected problem, then proceed as in the synergy section described above.
5.2. TYPES OF BOTANICALS MATERIALS The examples of different types of botanical materials which may be processed in accordance with the present invention include any botanical material including but not limited to material from higher plants. Examples of botanicals may be found in the Leung and Foster, 1996; Bisset, 1994; or Tyler and Foster, 1996 references. Specific examples of botanicals exemplified in the detailed description include the following: Agnus Castos, Aloe, Asian Ginseng, Bilberry, Black Cohosh, Chamomile, Chestnut, Coriolus Versicolor, Echinacea, Evening Primrose, Feverfew, Garlic, Ginger, Ginkgo, Goldenseal, Green Tea, Guggulipid, Hawthorn, Ivy, Kava, Licorice, Milk Thistle, Mistletoes (American, Asian and European varieties) , Passion Flower, Pumpkin, Pygeum, Rosemary, Siberian Ginseng, Saw Palmetto, St. John's Wort, Stinging Nettle and Valerian. Additionally combinations of one or more botanical materials such as Eschinacea and Goldenseal, may be processed in accordance with the present invention. 5.2.1. METHODS OF PROCESSING AND EXTRACTING BOTANICAL MATERIALS
The botanical material may be processed to form an aqueous or organic extract of the whole plant or a selected part of the plant. The botanical material can also be 5 processed in whole or part to form a powder. Many of the botanicals of interest are commercially available as powders, aqueous extracts, organic extracts or oils. In one embodiment, extracts of the plant material are preferred
.. because they are easier to dissolve in liquid pharmaceutical carriers. However, powdered plant materials are well-suited for many applications where the drug is administered in solid form, e.g., tablets or capsules. Such methods are well known to those of skill in the art. Furthermore, many of the plant
. _ materials and/or extracts are available commercially. As examples of the processing and extracting of botanicals the following examples are provided. Additional examples are provided in the detailed description.
For a typical root, it may be sliced, frozen or
20 pulverized. If powdered it is then shaken with an appropriate solvent and filtered (Tanabe et al . , 1991, Shoyakugaku Zaεsi , 4.5(4) :316-320) . Alternatively, the following methods are used: the root is homogenized, acetone extracted and filtered; the botanical may be steam distilled ot. to obtain essential oils and the distillate dissolved in acetone-water or appropriate solvent; or the cut rhizomes are frozen and/or freeze-dried and the resulting powder acetone- water extracted (Tanabe et al . , 1991, Shoyakugaku Zassi 4.5(4) :321-326) . Another method of processing botanicals is
_0 aqueous extraction with 100°C water (Yamahara et al . , 1985, J. Ethnopharmacology .13.:217-225) . The initial solvent extract from the methods above may be further extracted using liquid/liquid extraction with an appropriate solvent. The botanical may be extracted in two steps using polar and non-
polar solvents respectively. The solvents are then evaporated and the fractions combined (Nagabhusan et al . , 1987, Cancer Let . 3_6:221-233) . Botanicals may also be processed as a paste or powder which may be cooked (Zhang et al., 1994, J. of Food Science 59(6) =1338-1343) .
A variety of solvents may be used to extract the dried botanicals, for example acetone, acetonitrile, dichloromethane, ethanol, isopropanol and supercritical carbon dioxide (Sipro et al . , 1990, Int. J. of Food Science and Technology 2j5: 566-575 and references therein) .
For other botanicals such as Saw Palmetto, the medicinal products are the seed oil or dried berries. In a typical preparation, a hexane or supercritical carbon dioxide extract is prepared. Many preparations are commercially available, for example Permixon™ or Talso™. For an example of supercritical carbon dioxide extraction of a botanical, see Indena, European Patent No. 0 250 953 Bl . Alternatively, the botanical may be crushed and extracted with an appropriate solvent (90%) in a soxhlet (Elghamry et al . , 1969, Experienia 2j5(8) :828-829) . The botanical may also be ethanol extracted (Weisser et al. , 1996, The Prostate 28.:300-306) .
The dried material may be prepared in a variety of ways of freeze-drying including drying via microwave, cooling with liquid nitrogen and pulverizing; drying at 70 "C under vacuum for a duration of 10 hours; or air-drying in the shade (List and Schmidt, Hagers Handbuch der Pharmazeutischen Praxis, Springer-Verlag:New York, 1993, 1973-79; Araya et al . , 1981, Journal of Compara tive Pa thology, 135-141) . Teas, dilute aqueous extracts, also known as decoctions, may be made in 60-80*C water (Nosel and Schilcher, 1990) . Extraction is more efficient when the particle size is less than .25 mm (List and Schmidt, Phvtopharmaceutical Technology. CRC Press:Boca Raton, FL, 1989) .
Various guidelines a available for preparing oil extracts of botanicals. ? botanical may be digested (macerated) in oil at 45*C for 10 days, while others recommend 70"C for 12-24 hours (Hobbs, 1989, HerbalGram 18/19 :24-33 ; Smith et al . , Quality Validation Laboratory - Herb Pharm: Williams, OR, 1996) . In St. John's Wort for example, exposing the preparation to sunlight during the extraction process has been reported to result in a four-fold increase in flavonoid content calculated as quercetin (Maisenbacher and Kovar, 1992) . Additionally, for St. John's Wort, two-fold increases of hypericin have been reported in oil preparations in which the material has been further extracted with alcohol, and mixed with the oil (Georgiev et al., 1983, Nauchni Tr. -Vissh Inst . Plovid. 3_0: 175-183) . Alternatively an alcohol-water preparation may be prepared of the botanical (Dyukova, 1985, Farmi tsiya 34 :71- 72; Georgiev et al . , 1985, Nauchni Tr. -Vissh Inst . Plovid. 3_2:257-263; Wagner and Bladt, 1994, Kowalewski et al . , 1981, HerJba Pol . .2J7:295-302) . According to Hagers Handbuch a tincture of a botanical, such as St. John's Wort, may be prepared by using drug or freezing ethanol soaked, and filtering and preserving in dark bottles (List and Hόrhammer, 1993) .
Some botanicals, such as St. John's Wort, are both temperature and light sensitive. For this type of botanical the material should be dry packed with a refrigerant or shipped under refrigeration and protected from light and air. In St. John's Wort, hypericin content has been shown to drop significantly in powdered extract, tablet and juice preparations when stored at temperatures of 60*C for more than six weeks (140"F) . Dry extracts stored at 20*C were found to remain stable for at least one year (Adamski et al . , 1971, Farm . Pol . 12:237-241; Benigni et al . Hvpericum. Piante Medicinali: Chimica, Farmacologia e Terapia. Milano: Inverni &. Delia Beffa; 1971) . Other St. John's Wort constituents, hyperforin and adhyperforin found in oil preparations are highly unstable, especially when exposed to light, and can degrade in as little as 14 days (Meisenbacher et al., 1992, Planta Med. , 351-354) . Stability (in absence of air) was increased to six months in a preparation extracted with ethanol. Similarly, up to four xanthones and several flavonoids including quercetin and 13' , 118- biapigenin have been detected suggesting these may be among the active constituents in external preparations (Bystrov et al . , 1975, Tetrahedron Let ters 12:2791-2794) .
5.3 SEPARATION OF FRACTIONS Once the sample extract has been prepared and/or alternatively purchased as a commercially available extract, a portion needs to be subjected to fractional analysis. If the fingerprint has already been established, the sample or aliquot is separated into the same plurality of marker fractions which are present in the standard fingerprint.
Each of the marker fractions will include one or more of the active or inactive components. The marker fractions are established on an individual basis for each botanical material being tested. For some materials only a few marker fractions are required. For other more complex materials, there may be numerous marker fractions. For example in mistletoe, Viscum album protein extract, the preferred protein marker fractions are those fractions which are separated based on the sugar binding affinity of the fraction. However, different parameters for identifying and separating the materials into the marker fractions may be established based upon the types of components present in the botanical material. Separation of the sample into the marker fractions may be accomplished by any of the conventional separation techniques including liquid chromatography and extraction procedures. The same procedures which were used to establish the standard fingerprints should be used. Since the various fractions may be tested for biological activity, it is preferred that non-destructive separation techniques be utilized. Liquid column chromatography is a useful separation technique with affinity chromatography based on the specific binding ability of the compounds (e.g., carbohydrates and target enzymes) being particularly used.
After the fractionation, the solvent is removed and the material is dissolved in an appropriate medium for the bioassays. Examples of appropriate media include DMSO, ethanol, various detergents, water and an appropriate buffer. The choice of solvent will depend on the chemical nature of the component being analyzed and the compatibility with the assay system.
5.4 ESTABLISHMENT OF APPROPRIATE BIOASSAYS
Exemplary biological assays may include any cell proliferation assays, such as the measurement of L 1210 cell inhibition, immune activity or inhibition of critical enzyme which relates to specific diseases . Examples of other transformed cell lines which can be used for bioassays include HDLM-3 Hodgkin's lymphoma and Raji Burkitt's lymphoma, hepatoma cell line, primary or established cultures of human/animal cell lines which carry specific cell receptors or enzymes . The results of the biological assays are used to prepare a bioactivity fingerprinting of the material. The fingerprint can be as simple as an assay of two selected marker fractions. Conversely, the fingerprint can include numerous different bioassays conducted on numerous different fractions. The same assay may be conducted on different marker fractions. Also, different assays may be conducted on the same marker fraction. The combination of bioassays will depend upon the complexity of the given botanical material and its intended clinical use. The bioassays will be the same as those conducted in establishing bioactivity fingerprint of the standard material.
5.4.1. ENZYMATIC AND RECEPTOR BASED ASSAYS
Enzymatic and receptor based assays are preferable in the practice of this invention. Assays are chosen either based on accepted enzymatic assays for a clinical disorder or they are chosen from relevant assays for a given clinical disorder. It is important to choose appropriate bioassay. Ideally, a bioassay should be rugged, that is reproducible over time and show a quantitative dose response over a wide concentration range. An issue faced with a botanical for which the active components are not known is the choice of a relevant bioassay. Here, the human therapeutic use will serve as a guide to pick assays known in the art based on possible mechanisms of action. The mechanism of action should be consistent with a clinically relevant endpoint . There are a wide array of clinically relevant assays based on enzymatic activity, receptor binding activity, cell culture activity, activity against tissues and whole animal in vivo activity.
This section will address enzymatic and receptor binding assays. There are many books on enzymatic or receptor assays, for example, Methods in Enzymology by Academic Press or Boyers, The Enzymes . "Bioactive Natural Products, Detection, Isolation, and Structural Determination", S. M. Colegate and R. J. Molyneux, CRC Press (1993) , also discusses specific bioassays. "Methods in Cellular Immunology", R. Rafael Fernandez-Botran and V. Vetvicka, CRC Press (1995) describes assays from immune cell activation and cytokine receptor assays. "Screening Microbial Metabolites for New Drugs-Theoretical and Practical Considerations" describes additional methods of finding pharmaceutical (Yarbrough et al. (1993) J. Antibioti cs 4_6 (4) : 536-544) . There are also many commercial contract research vendors, including Panlabs™ and Novascreen™.
For example, for a botanical useful for treating neurological disorders, the array of bioassays might include adrenergic receptors, cholinergic receptors, dopamine receptors, GABA receptors, glutamate receptors, monoamine oxidase, nitric oxide synthetase, opiate receptors, or serotonin receptors. For cardiovascular disorders the array of assays may include adenosine Ax agonism and antagonism; adrenergic αlf a2 l β agonism and antagonism; angiotensin I, inhibition; platelet aggregation; calcium channel blockade; ileum; cardiac arrhythmia; cardiac inotropy; blood pressure; heart rate; chronotropy; contractility; hypoxia, hypobaric; hypoxia, KCN; portal vein, potassium depolarized; portal vein, spontaneously activated; or thromboxane A2, platelet aggregation. For metabolic disorders the following bioassays may be used: cholesterol, serum HPL, serum total; serum HPL/cholesterol ratio; HDL/LDL ratios; glucose, serum - glucose loaded; or renal function, kaluresis, saluresis, and urine volume change. For allergy/inflammation disorders the following bioassays may be used: allergy, passive cutaneous anaphylaxis; bradykinin B2; contractility, tracheal; histamine H2 antagonism; inflammation, carrageenan; leukotriene D4 antagonism; neurokinin NKX antagonism; or platelet activating factor, platelet aggregation. For gastrointestinal disorders the following bioassays may be used: cholecystokinin CCKA antagonism; cholinergic antagonism, peripheral; gastric acidity, pentagastrin; gastric ulcers, ethanol; ileum electrical stimulation modulation; ileum electrical stimulation spasm or serotonin 5-HT3 antagonism. For antimicrobial, antifungal, or antitrichomonal disorders the following are used: Candida albicans ; Escherichia coli ; Klebsiella pneumonaie; Mycobacterium ranae; Proteus vulgar is; Pseudomonas aeruginosa ; Staphylococcus aureus, methicillin resistant; Trichomonas foetus ; or Tri chophyton mentagrophytes . For other indications, one of skill in the art would be able to choose a relevant list of bioassays.
Specific examples of assays based on enzymes or receptors include the following: aldol-reductase; angiotensin converting enzyme (ACE) ; rat androgen receptor; CNS receptors; cyclooxygenase 1 or 2 (Cox 1, Cox 2) ; DNA repair enzymes; dopamine receptors; estrogen receptors; fibrinogen; GABA A or GABA B; /3-glucuronidase; lipoxygenases, e.g., 5-lipoxygenase; monoamine oxidases (MAO-A, MAO-B) ; platelet activating factor (PAF) ; prostacyclin cyclin; prostaglandin synthetase; serotonin assays, e.g., 5-HT activity or other serotonin receptor subtypes; serotonin re- uptake activity or thromboxane synthesis activity. Specific enzymatic assays are available from a variety of sources including Panlabs™ Ine (Bothell, WA) and Novascreen™ (Baltimore, MD) . Additional assays include: ATPase inhibition, benzpyrene hydroxylase inhibition, HMG-CoA reductase inhibition, phosphodientrase inhibition, protease inhibition, protein biosynthesis inhibition, tyrosine hydroxylase inhibition, testosterone-5α-reductase and cytokine receptor assays.
5.4.2 CELL CULTURE AND OTHER ASSAYS
In addition to the enzymatic assays, there are also other biological assays. Preferably, these assays are performed in cell culture but may be performed on the whole organism. Cell culture assays include activity in cultured hepatocytes and hepatomers (for effect on cholesterol levels, LDL-cholesterol receptor levels and ratio of LDL/HDL cholesterol) ; anti-cancer activity against L 1210 cells, modulating receptor levels in PC12 human neuroblastoma cells; cell culture activity of luteinizing hormone (LH) , follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) or prolactin; Ca2+ influx to mast cells; cell culture assays for phagocytosis, lymphocyte activity or TNF release; platelet aggregation activity or activity against HDLM-3 Hodgkin's lymphoma and Raji Burkitt's lymphoma cells, antimitotic activity, antiviral activity in infected cells, antibacterial activity (bacterial cell culture) and antifungal activity. Tissue or whole animal assays may also be used including anti-inflammatory mouse ear dermatitis, rat paw swelling; muscle contractility assays, vasodilation assays; or whole animal carbon clearance tests. These assays are available from a variety of sources including Panlabs™ Inc. (Bothell, WA) .
5.4.3. ANTICANCER ACTIVITY
The anticancer effects of drug can be studied in a variety of cell culture systems; these include mouse leukemias, L 1210, P388, L1578Y etc. Tumor cell lines of human origin like KB, and HeLa have also been used. In a typical assay tumor cells are grown in an appropriate cell culture media like RPMI-1640 containing 10% fetal calf serum. The logarithmically growing cells are treated with different concentrations of test material for 14-72 hours depending upon cell cycle time of the cell line. At the end of the incubation the cell growth is estimated by counting the cell number in untreated and treated groups. The cell viability can be ascertained by trypan blue inclusion test or by reduction of tetrazolium dyes by mitochondrial dehydrogenase. The ability of a drug to inhibit cell growth in culture may suggest its possible anticancer effects. These effects can be verified in animals bearing tumors, which are models for human disease (Khwaja, T.A., et al . (1986) Oncology, 43 (Suppl. 1) : 42-50) . The most economical way to evaluate the anticancer effects of an agent is to study its effects on the growth of tumor cells in minimum essential medium (MEM) containing 10% fetal calf serum. The drug-exposed cells (in duplicates) are incubated in a humidified C02 incubator at 37 °C for 2-4 days, depending upon the population-doubling time of the tumor cells. At the end of the incubation period the cells are counted and the degree of cell growth inhibition is calculated from a comparison with untreated controlled cells grown under identical conditions. The type of cell lines used have varied from laboratory to laboratory depending upon individual needs. The National Cancer Institute (NCI) in the United States recommends the use of KB cells (a human nasopharyngeal carcinoma) for the evaluation of anticancer drugs in vi tro . The cell growth inhibition is determined by estimating the protein content (Lowry's method) of the drug- treated and untreated controls. NCI has also recommended the use of suspension culture of mouse leukemia P388 for the evaluation of anticancer potential of plant extracts and related natural products. We have routinely used mouse leukemia L1210 cells, cultured in microtiter plates for in vi tro assays for anticancer activity. The cell population-doubling time of leukemia L1210 is 10-11 h and a drug exposure of 48 h (3-4 generations of logarithmic growth) is used for the evaluation of its antitumor activity. For growth inhibition studies reported here, all stock solutions and dilutions were made with sterile 0.9% NaCl solution. The cell cultures were seeded at 2-5 x 10" cells/ml in duplicates for each inhibitor concentration in a microtiter place (0.18 ml/well) . The inhibitors were added in 0.02 ml volume to achieve 1:10 dilutions in each case. The covered microtiter plate was incubated for 48 h in a humidified C02 incubator containing 5% CO2 in air. At the end of the incubation period aliquots of each well were added to a measured volume of isotonic saline and counted in an electronic cell counter. Because mistletoe extract at high concentrations caused rapid cellular fragmentation, the test microtiter plates were routinely checked under microscope prior to cell number counting so that the results were not compromised. The cell viability was determined by trypan blue exclusion. The results were calculated by plotting percent cell growth inhibition (as compared to cell density of the saline-treated controls) versus log of drug concentration and expressed as the concentration which caused 50% inhibition (ID50) in cell growth as determined from the graph.
The cytotoxic effects of a drug on a tumor cell line can also be evaluated but these experiments need a longer period of time and are more expensive. In these studies drug- treated cells are washed free of drug and then plated in soft agar or an appropriate medium and the cellular viability is estimated by the ability of the surviving cells to multiply and form microscopic colonies. The number of cellular colonies obtained with certain drug concentrations is compared with those obtained from untreated controls to evaluate cell kill or cytotoxic activity. In our studies with mistletoe extract we have used suspension cultures of EMT-6 cells (a mouse mammary adenocarcinoma) . These cells were grown in Eagle's MEM (F14) containing 10% dialyzed fetal calf serum and antibiotics. The cell suspension was spun and the pellet suspended in Spinner's medium supplemented with 10% dialyzed fetal calf serum (70 cells/ml) , plated in plastic Petri dishes and incubated for 2 h to permit cells to attach. At this time cells were exposed to various concentrations of extract for 2-24 h. Then, the medium was removed and replaced with drug-free medium and the dishes incubated for 5-7 days. The colonies were stained with methylene blue (0.33% in 0.01% KOH) and counted with an automatic colony counter. The plating efficiency of EMT-6 5 cells was 46%. (Khwaja et al . , 1986, Oncology, 43 (Supy . 1 ) :4250) .
5.4.4. ANTIVIRAL ACTIVITY
The antiviral activity of different drugs can be 10 ascertained in cell culture of human cell lines like HeLa or H9 lymphoma cells. These cells are infected with virus and the virus is allowed to propagate in cell cultures. The ability of virus to produce cell lysis or cytopathic effects is taken to as end point. Thus HIV infection of H9 cells 15 carries production of multinucleated cells. The cytopathic effects, if reduced or eliminated by certain concentrations of the drug, will point to its potential as anti-HIV agent. These results can be validated by estimation of viral enzyme in the cell cultures, e.g., by studying the amount of the 20 expression of viral reverse transcriptase. A decreased expression of the viral enzyme would support antiviral effect of the drug treatment (Khwaja, T.A. U.S. Patent No. 5,565,200; J. Levy et al . 1984, Science 225: 840) .
25 5.5. ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR ANALYZING CHEMICAL
COMPONENTS
There are many methods to separate and analyze individual chemical components including gas chromatography
(GC) , mass spectroscopy (MS) , GC-MS, high pressure liquid
3_ chromatography (HPLC) , HPLC-MS, thin layer chromatography
(TLC) , gel chromatography and reverse phase chromatography
(RPC) . These chromatographic methods may be performed either on an analytical scale or a preparative scale. To determine the actual chemical structure of unknown components, nuclear
__ magnetic resonance (NMR) and mass spectrum fragmentation analysis are typically used. The determination of the type of chromatography will depend on the chemical components most likely responsible for the bioactivity. For example if the bioactivity is likely due to fatty acids, the fatty acids are esterified and the 5 esters analyzed on a GC. For organic compounds with alcohol groups, they are modified to prepare ethers, silyl derivatives or other less polar functional groups. These derivatives are then suitable for analysis by GC (Steinke et al., 1993, Planta Med . .59:155-160; Breu et al . , 1992,
10 Arzneim . -For sch/ Drug Res . 42.(1) : 547-551) . If the activity is most likely due to flavonoids, HPLC is the method of choice. Reverse-phase HPLC (RP-HPLC) has been used to analyze flavonoids from a variety of botanicals, specifically Hawthorn, passion flower, chamomile, ginkgo (Pietta et al . ,
15 1989, Chroma tographia 27.(9/10) -.509-512) . Plant constituents have been quantitatively determined by TLC (Vanhaelen and Vanhaelen-Fastre, 1983, J. Chroma tography 281:263-271) as well as MS-analysis for garlic. CRC Handbooks of Chromatography on "Analysis of Lipids", K. D. Mukherjee,
20 "Analysis and Characterization of Steroids", H. Lamparczyk, J. Sherma, and "High-Performance Liquid Chromatography of Peptides and Proteins", CT. Mant and R.S. Hodges, are available and describe columns and solvent systems.
25 5.6. ANALYSIS OF FRACTIONS
In an alternative embodiment, rather than basing the fingerprint on discrete chemical components of known bioactivity, one may also establish a fingerprint based on defined fractions or classes of compounds. Some chemical
30 constituents in botanicals form such a complex mixture of closely related components that from a practical point of view it requires to base the fingerprint on fractions or classes of components further than indivisual components. Examples of these types of components are lectins (sugar-
35 binding proteins) or glycoproteins. There are many examples of fractional analysis (Gel Filtration Principles and Methods Pharmacia Biotech, Rahms i Lund: Sweden; Utsumi et al . , 1987, J. Biochem . 101:1199-1208.
5.7. AN ILLUSTRATIVE EXAMPLE OF A PHARMAPRINTED
BOTANICAL DRUG 5
The following example sets forth the general production of pharmaceutical grade extracts of mistletoe which are effective in the treatment of AIDS and certain cancers. Initially the extract was separated into different classes of its chemical entities (components) . It was found that the major biological activity was associated with its protein fraction (>95%) and the residual activity was separated in the alkaloid fraction. The quantitative fingerprint is based on the measurement of specific protein fractions which have _ different binding affinities for various sugars. The standard pharmaceutical grade quantitative fingerprint requires that the fractions contain between 0.01 and 1.0 mg/ml of Ca++ dependent sugar-binding proteins which are capable of binding with lactose, galactose, melibiose, N- 0 acetyl-D-galactosamine or fucose and exhibit an inhibitory concentration of below about 0.50 pg/ml. "Inhibitory concentration", as used in this section is a measure of the sugar-binding protein's ability to inhibit the in vi tro growth of certain cancerous cell lines. The inhibitory _ concentration is expressed in μg of sugar-binding protein per ml of extract solution which is required to cause a 50% inhibition of the growth of a particular cancerous cell line. The preferred cell line which is used to measure inhibitory concentrations is a leukemia cell line identified as L1210. 0 This particular cancerous cell line is available from a number of commercial sources. L1210 calls have been used in the past as a screening system for testing drug efficacy. Details regarding the culturing and growth of L1210 cell are described in a number of scientific articles ( Oncology 43 :42- _ 50 and Experien tia 1980, 3_6:599-600) . Other cell lines which can be used to determine inhibitory concentrations include KB cells or other rapidly growing cell lines which demonstrate repeatable results. Other parameters like inhibition o? macromolecule synthesis in a given cell culture line may be used.
Identification of the mistletoe extract as pharmaceutical grade preferably requires that the standard fingerprint of the extract must also contain one or more Ca*4 non-dependent sugar-binding protein fractions which are capable of binding with lactose, galactose, melibiose, N- acetyl-D-galactosamine, or fucose. The quantitative level of the Ca++ non-dependent sugar-binding proteins must be between about 0.1 and 2.0 mg/ml for each fraction. The inhibitory activity of the one or more Ca++ non-dependent sugar-binding protein fraction is preferably below about 0.5 μg/ml.
5.7.1. PLANT SOURCE/EXTRACTION METHOD
The mistletoe powder (processed biological material) is prepared according to any of the known powdering procedures. Any type of mistletoe may be used; however, to maintain the rejection rate of extracts at a low level, it is preferred that the mistletoe extract be prepared from the Viscum album, coloratum species, which is found on oak trees in South Korea or the Viscum album L. species, which is commonly found throughout Europe. Further, it is preferred that the mistletoe be flash frozen shortly after harvesting and then ground to a powder in the frozen state. Flash freezing with liquid nitrogen or similar cryogenic liquid is preferred. The entire mistletoe plant may be used in preparing the powder. The preferred harvesting time is when the berries are ripe. Due to the variable and relatively unknown nature of all of the complex components in mistletoe, it is preferred that all of the above listed preferred steps be followed in order to optimize the number of extract preparations which meet the requirements of the method of the present invention. The fresh soft part of the mistletoe plant (including leaf, stem and/or berries) may be pressed to squeeze the cell-sap, which, on dilution with water or sterile physiological saline, will provide an aqueous extract .
The mistletoe powder is extracted using a substantially pure aqueous solution. The extracting solution may include additional components to enhance the extraction process. The extract may include a salt such as calcium chloride or sodium chloride in an amount sufficient to enhance extraction of proteins from the mistletoe sap. Salt concentrations on the order of 0.02 M are preferred. Detergents such as TRITON® x- 100 may also be added to enhance extraction of protein from the plant cell walls. The extractant is preferably buffered with 0.02 M Tris to a pH of about 7.8. The extraction procedure should utilize an amount of extractant relative to the amount of mistletoe being extracted which will produce levels of proteins as sat forth below. Preferably, between about 100 and 400 grams of mistletoe powder will be extracted with between about 1000 and 4000 ml of aqueous solution. The powder is mixed in the solution and left to stand for from one to four hours. The powder particulates remaining after the extraction period are separated by filtration, centrifugation or other conventional separation technique to produce the aqueous mistletoe extract.
5.7.2. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS The mistletoe extract, prior to pharmacological analysis of its contents, is preferably assayed for its overall biological activity. The biological evaluation of the extract is carried out on the basis of its inhibition of the growth of mouse leukemia L1210 in culture. From this initial test, the IC50 (concentration in μg/ml of the extract which will cause 50% inhibition in the growth of L1210 cells as compared to untreated controls) of the extract is determined. The biological activity of the extract is expressed in terms of "activity units" (A.U.), which represent the ratio of concentration of the extract (expressed in μg extract/ml) to its IC50 value (μg/ml) . To pass this initial step of extract evaluation, 1 ml of 1 % extract (10 mg total extract) must contain 100 or more activity units. Extracts with lower than 100 A.U. values are rejected, and those with a passing grade are further analyzed to establish specific values and ratios of its biologically active components as described below. The separation of the mistletoe extract into its various protein fractions is preferably conducted by affinity column chromatography as schematically represented in FIG. 10. The separation is preferably conducted in two stages in order to separate the proteins which require Ca++ for binding to sugar and those proteins which are non-Ca** dependent . A buffer which contains ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA) or other chelating agent is used to elute the Ca+T dependent sugar-binding proteins from affinity columns which have been treated with the specific sugars of interest, i.e. lactose, galactose, melibiose, N-acetyl-N-galactosamine, and fucose. The resulting fractions are then analyzed for quantitative protein content. Other affinity columns based on similar principles of chromatography may also be used, e.g. mannose, rhamnose, maltose, asialofeutin, glucosamine, and n-acetyl glucosamine. The appropriate levels and activities of the lectins in the extract which are specific for these sugars can be established by measuring their levels in extracts which meet the criteria for sugar-specific lectins set forth above . After elution of each of the sugar-specific affinity columns with EDTA or EGTA (ethylene glyceryl tetracetic acid) -containing buffer, the columns are then eluted with buffers that each contain the sugar which corresponds to the sugar bound to the respective affinity columns. Sepharose® 4B is a preferred column material. The various fractions resulting from this second elution contain the non-Ca*' dependent sugar-binding proteins. The protein content of each of these fractions is also quantitatively determined. Protein quantitation can be performed using any of the conventional quantitative analytical procedures including ninhydrin based tests, spectroscopic determination and Bio¬ Rad or Pierce analysis. The use of multiple buffers as described above is preferred so that the total level of each type of protein is determined. Affinity column chromatography is preferred because it is a conventional separation technique which is well-known to those of ordinary skill in the art and which is well-suited for separating the proteins from the extract based on their sugar-binding specificity. Other separation procedures may be utilized provided that an accurate measurement of each of the selected sugar-binding proteins is provided. An alternate method for analyzing the lectin (sugar- binding protein) content, alkaloidal fraction and viscotoxin levels in the extract involves the use of ammonium sulfate. In this method, the total proteins of mistletoe preparation are precipitated with 70% ammonium sulfate. The preparation is centrifuged and the precipitate, which contains a mixture of the viscotoxins and the sugar-binding proteins (lectins) , is separated on an acid-hydrolysed Sepharose 4B column. The bound lectins can be eluted from the column with buffers containing specific sugars as described above. Affinity chromatography to identify the specific sugar-binding proteins can be carried out as also described above. The unbound proteins which initially fan through the column contain viscotoxins which are quantitated according to conventional protein quantitative analysis. The ammonium sulfate-supernatant, which contains the alkaloidal fraction, is lyophilized and the alkaloids are extracted with chloroform. The chloroform residue provides the total alkaloids which are also quantitated by weighing or another conventional method. The five Ca++ dependent and non-Ca+* dependent sugar- binding protein fractions which are used to generate fingerprints are those that bind with lactose, galactose, melibiose, N-acetyl-D-galactosamine, or fucose. The concentration of each of the sugar binding proteins (both Ca*4 dependent and non-Ca*+ dependent) is between 0.1 and 2.8 weight percent of the total protein content of the extract. The specific relative weight percent ranges which are necessary for an extract to meet the requirements of the present invention are set forth in Table 1. Tables 2 and 3 set forth the weight percent ranges for pharmaceutical grade extracts prepared from European and Korean mistletoe, respectively.
The relative percentage of each sugar-binding protein with respect to the total protein content of the extract will remain fairly constant irrespective of extraction conditions. However, the actual concentration levels of the various sugar-binding proteins will vary in each extract depending upon a number of factors including the relative amounts of mistletoe and aqueous extractant, the length of extraction and temperature. It is preferred that the extract be analyzed to determine the concentration levels of the various specified sugar-binding proteins and that these concentration levels be used as the primary method of determining whether an extract meets the pharmaceutical grade requirements of the present invention. However, the extract may be diluted or concentrated to achieve protein concentration levels outside the preferred concentration ranges provided that the relative percentages of the sugar-binding proteins remain within the limits set forth in Table 1, for general mistletoe extracts, and Tables 2 and 3, for European and Korean mistletoe extracts, respectively. The extract, once it has been identified as pharmaceutical grade, may be dehydrated and stored as a powder for rehydration and used at a later time to treat AIDS or cancer.
TABLE 1
GENERAL QUANTITATIVE FINGERPRINT PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE MISTLETOE EXTRACT
Percentage By
Weight of Total
Protein in Extract
(Ca++ dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0.1 - - 2. .3
2. Galactose 0.1 - - 0. .9
3. Melibiose 0.1 - - 0, .6
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.1 - - 1, .6
5. Fucose 0.1 - - 1. .3
(Non-Ca*+ dependent sugar- binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0. . 1 - 2.4
2. Galactose 0. .1 - - 1.9
3. Melibiose 0. .1 - - 2.2
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. .1 - - 2.8
5. Fucose 0. .1 - - 2.0
TABLE 2
QUANTITATIVE FINGERPRINT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE EUROPEAN MISTLETOE EXTRACT
Percentage By Weight of Total Protein in Extract
(Ca++ dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1. Lactose 1.2 - - 2.3
2. Galactose 0.1 - - 0.9
3. Melibiose 0.1 - - 0.6
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.5 - - 1.6
5. Fucose 0.3 - - 1.3
(Non-Ca** dependent sugar- binding proteins)
1. Lactose 1.4 - - 2.4
2. Galactose 0.9 - 1.9
3. Melibiose 1.2 - 2.2
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.8 - - 2.8
5. Fucose 1.0 - 2.0
TABLE 3
QUANTITATIVE FINGERPRINT FOR PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE KOREAN MISTLETOE EXTRACT
Percentage By
Weight of Total
Protein in Extract
(Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0, .1 - - 0, .5
2. Galactose 0. .1 - - 0, .5
3. Melibiose 0. .1 - - 0. .5
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. .1 - - 0. .5
5. Fucose 0. .1 - - 0. .5
(Non-Ca** dependent sugar- binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0, .1 - - 0. .5
2. Galactose 0. .1 - - 0. .8
3. Melibiose 0, .1 - - 0, .5
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. .1 - - 0. .7
5. Fucose 0. .1 - - 0. .5
The preferred concentration level of the Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins in the extract is within the range of about 0.01 to 1.0 mg/ml. The method of the present invention can be carried out by measuring only one of the Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins to establish if the extract is within pharmaceutical grade limits. However, it is preferred that two or more of the sugar-binding protein levels be measured, e.g. galactose, lactose and/or N-acetyl-D-galactosamine specific proteins. Even more preferably, the extract is analyzed to determine if the concentration levels of all five Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins meet the above quantitative fingerprint limits. The method can also be carried out by measuring various combinations of 3 or 4 of the specified Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins. Concentration ranges and inhibitory activity ranges are set forth in Tables 4, 5 and 6. TABLE 4
QUANTITATIVE AND BIOACTIVITY FINGERPRINTS FOR PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE MISTLETOE EXTRACT
Inhibitory
Concentration Concentration (mg/ml) (IC50 )
(Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0.1 - - 0, .5 0.01 - - 0 .5
2. Galactose 0.01 - 0 .5 0.001 - - 0 .5
3. Melibiose 0.01 - 0 .6 0.001 - - 0. .6
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.1 - - 1 .6 0.01 - - 1. .6
5. Fucose 0.1 - 1. .3 0.01 - - 1. .3
(Non-Ca** dependent sugar- binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0. . 1 - 0, .5 0.0001 - 0.5
2. Galactose 0. .1 - - 2. .0 0.001 - 0.5
3. Melibiose 0. .1 - - 0. .5 0.001 - 0.6
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. .1 - 1, .0 0.001 - 1.6
5. Fucose 0. .1 - 1. .5 0.01 - 1.3
TABLE 5
QUANTITATIVE AND BIOACTIVITY FINGERPRINTS FOR PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE EUROPEAN MISTLETOE EXTRACT
Inhibitory
Concentration Concentration (mg/ml) (ICso)
(Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0.1 - - 0, .3 0.01 - - 0. .1
2. Galactose 0.01 - - 0 .1 0.0001 - - 0. .01
3. Melibiose 0.01 - - 0, .1 0.001 - - 0. .01
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.1 - - 0. .3 0.01 - - 0. .1
5. Fucose 0.5 - - 1. .0 0.01 - - 0. .1
(Non-Ca** dependent sugar- binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0.1 0.3 0.001 - 0. 1 2. Galactose 0.1 0.3 0.01 - 0. 1
3. Melibiose 0.1 0.3 0.1 - 0. 5
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.05 0.3 0.001 - 0. 01
5. Fucose 0.05 0.3 0.1 - 0 .5
TABLE 6
QUANTITATIVE AND BIOACTIVITY FINGERPRINTS FOR PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE KOREAN MISTLETOE EXTRACT
Inhibitory
Concentration Concentration (mg/ml) (IC50 )
(Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1. Lactose 0, .1 - - 0. .5 0.1 - 0.5
2. Galactose 0 .2 - - 0, .6 0.1 - 0.5
3. Melibiose 0 .1 - - 0, .5 0.1 - 0.5
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. .5 - - 1. .0 0.1 - 0.5
5. Fucose 0. .1 - - 0 , .5 0.1 - 0.5
(Non-Ca** dependent sugar- binding proteins)
0.0001 -
1. Lactose 0. .1 - - 0. .5 0.009
2. Galactose 1. .0 - - 2. .0 0 .001 - 0.01
3. Melibiose 0, .1 - - 0, .5 0 .001 - 0.01
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. .5 - - 1. .0 0 .001 - 0.1
5. Fucose 1. .0 - - 2. .0 0 .001 - 0.1
The concentration level of the non-Ca** dependent sugar- binding proteins in the extract must be within the range of about 0.10 to 2.0 mg/ml. The method of the present invention can be carried out by measuring only one of the non-Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins to' establish if the extract is within pharmaceutical grade limits. However, as above, it is preferred that two or more of the non-Ca** dependent sugar- binding protein levels be measured. Even more preferably, the extract is analyzed to determine if the concentration levels of all five non-Ca** dependent sugar-binding proteins meet the required concentration limits. The most preferred method involves determining the complete protein finger print, i.e. the protein concentration in all ten sugar- binding protein fractions. In this most preferred embodiment, the extract is not identified or otherwise considered to be a pharmaceutical grade extract unless all ten protein fractions have the required concentration levels set forth above. The standard fingerprint parameters are set forth in Tables 4, 5 and 6.
The bioactivity of the various protein fractions is used in combination with their respective concentration levels to identify the extract as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention. The various proteins which make up each of the Ca** dependent sugar-binding protein groups must each exhibit an inhibitory concentration of between about 0.001 and 0.5 μg/ml. The proteins which make up each of the non-Ca** dependent sugar-binding groups must also each exhibit an inhibitory concentration of between about 0.0001 and 0.5 μg/ml .
The method for measuring inhibitory action is set forth in numerous scientific articles including the references mentioned previously. It is preferred that the inhibitory action be measured in vi tro with respect to leukemia L1210 cells. This procedure is preferred because L1210 cells are readily available, are easily maintained by well-known culturing procedures, and provide consistently reproducible results. The inhibitory concentration of each sugar-binding protein fraction is determined by adding increasing amounts of the fraction and determining when cell growth is inhibited by 50% as compared to a control culture. It is preferred that both the concentration level and the inhibition concentration of each of the sugar-binding proteins be measured and that they all be within the ranges set forth above and in Tables 4, 5 and 6 in order for the extract to be identified as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention. Once the concentration levels and/or inhibitory concentration of the designated sugar-binding proteins has been established, the extract is identified as pharmaceutical grade if the above limits are met. If one or more requirements are not met, i.e., the sample fingerprint does not match with the standard fingerprint, the extract is rejected. The extracts which are identified as pharmaceutical grade are then used in treatment programs for treating diseases such as AIDS and cancer. The pharmaceutical grade extracts are not only useful in treating AIDS, but may be used to treat any individual with a suppressed immune system. If the extract has protein levels which are above the limits set forth above, the extract may be diluted as required to bring the extract protein concentrations down to the established limits. If the extract protein levels are below the limits, the extract iε rejected and not identified as pharmaceutical grade. It is preferred that the extract be initially screened for overall activity before beginning the more rigorous analysis of the sugar-binding protein fingerprint. It was discovered that extracts which do not meet certain total activity levels will also not meet the more specific protein fingerprint requirements of the present invention. The activity units are determined in the same manner as for the individual protein fraction(s) with the only difference being that the entire extract is being tested. In accordance with the present invention, the extract must have and activity of greater than 100 AU. Table 7 sets forth the results of initial screening wherein a number of different mistletoe extracts were screened to determine their biological activity using the L1210 cells as previously described. As can be seen, commercial preparations such as ISCADOR do not meet the initial screening test and therefore are not pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention. The ISCADOR extracts also do not meet the more stringent specific protein fingerprint requirements of the present method. However, the extracts n-T4GEN and T4GEN, which do meet the specific protein concentration fingerprint of the present invention, both have activity levels well above the minimum of 100 A.U. The screening procedure is preferred because it allows non- pharmaceutical grade extracts to be identified relatively quickly without having to conduct the more time consuming protein fingerprinting. Once an extract passes this initial screening step, it then still must meet the further protein fingerprint requirements in order to qualify as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
TABLE 7
BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY OF MISTLETOE EXTRACTS IN TERMS OF ACTIVITY UNITS (A.U.)
Sample Identity Activity units/ml, (1% Extract)
I. ISCADOR M, Arg. 10* 80 2. n-T4GEN, 40% 400
3. T4GEN, 5% 227
4. ISCADOR M, 5% 30
5. ISCADOR M, 20% 37
6. T4GEN, 1% 140
7. T4GEN, 10% 217
8. ISCADOR M, 20% 26
9. n-T4GEN, 40% 416 10. n-T4GEN 192
II. n-T4GEN 811
Activity unit per ml concentration of sample in ug/ml
IC50 (μg/ml)
It is also preferred that the fraction of the extract which contains protein that does not bind to sugar be analyzed to provide a further fingerprint that is used in identifying whether the extract is pharmaceutical grade. As shown in FIG. 9, a fraction containing unbound protein remains after separation of the sugar-binding proteins from the extract. This unbound protein fraction contains an "alkaloid" fraction and a viscotoxin fraction. These two fractions can be isolated from each other by column chromatography using a Sephadex G-75 column or equivalent. The amount of alkaloids in the alkaloid fraction should be about 10 to 50 μg per ml of 1 percent extract. The amount of viscotoxin in the protein fraction should be about 10 to 40 μg per ml of 1 percent extract. As previously described, a 1 percent extract is one where 1 gram of total initial non- dehydrated plant material is extracted with 100 ml of aqueous extractant. The amount of viscotoxins and alkaloids will increase proportionally as the amount of plant material extracted per 100 ml increases.
In use, the extracts may be used as is or diluted with suitable pharmaceutical carriers and administered according to known procedures for treating AIDS or a particular cancer. For treating AIDS, the extract is preferably injected subcutaneously in doses ranging from 0.01 to 1 ml of a 1 percent extract. Extracts which are more concentrated, such as 2 and 5 percent extracts, may be used. Extracts with even higher concentrations may also be used depending upon the dosage required. The injections are preferably given twice a week, but may be given more often. For cancerous tumors, the extract is injected directly into the tumor or may be injected subcutaneously.
5.7.3. BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS An extract identified herein as n-T4GEN was tested to demonstrate its anti-HIV activity. n-T4GEN was analyzed and found to meet the sugar-binding protein fingerprint set forth in Table 6. The amount of protein in the alkaloidal and
Viscotoxin fractions was also found to be within the required fingerprint ranges. The n-T4GEN extract was prepared from Korean mistletoe. n-T4GEN was added to culture wells in an amount sufficient to provide a concentration of 1 A.U. of a 1 percent extract per ml of test solution (equivalent to 10 μg of extract per ml of test solution) . This concentration of n-T4GEN inhibited HIV-induced cytopathic effects in H9 lymphoid human leukemia cells with concomitant reduction in viral reverse transcriptase levels in the infected cells. Human immunodeficiency virus (HIV) infects T4 lymphocytes. In the H9 human lymphoma cell line, the virus produces giant multinucleated syncytial cells. After 3-6 days of viral infection, the number of syncytia correlates with the degree of virus growth as quantified in the presence and absence of the drug being tested. These cytopathic effects and assay of viral reverse transcriptase were used to demonstrate anti-HIV effects of n-T4GEN. The anti-HIV assay using 1 μg/ml of a 1 percent n-T4GEN extract per ml of test solution was conducted as follows:
HIV inoculum was standardized for reverse transcriptase (RT) activity using purified avian myeloblastosis viral RT (BRL Labs, Gaithersberg, MD) and used to infect polybrene treated H9 cells at 0.02 RT units of HIV per 2 x IO6 cells. The virus was adsorbed for 2 hours at 37°C and then the cells were washed twice and resuspended in RPMl 1640 containing 10% fetal bovine serum at 2 x 10s cells/ml and dispersed in 1 ml aliquots into 24-well plates (Falcon Division, Becton Dickinson Co., Cockneyville, MD) . Syncytial giant cell formation appeared at 5-6 days post infection, and this cytopathic effect (CPE) was quantitatively measured by dispersing 0.1 ml aliquots into 0.1 ml absolute methanol and enumerating the giant cells microscopically. The inhibition of CPE by antiviral treatment with 1 A.U. (10 μg) of a 1 percent n-T4GEN extract per 1 ml of test solution was compared to untreated, infected H9 cells.
Reverse transcriptase activity was measured using 1 ml culture aliquots which were clarified at 600 x g for 30 minutes, precipitated in 10% polyethylene glycol - 0.13 M NaCl at 4°C for 18 hours, and centrifuged at 600 x g for 60 minutes. The pellet was dissolved in glycerol-Tris buffer (50% glycerol, 25 mM Tris HCl pH 7.5, 5 mM dithiothreitol, 15 mM KCl, 0.025% Triton-X, and 0.25 mM EDTA) . The RT assay was adapted from published methods (Levy et al. , 1984, Science 225: 840; Ho et al. , 1984, Science 226 :451) , using a final reaction mixture containing 40 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.8, 2.2 mM dithiothreitol, 10 mM MgClz, 50 mM KCl, 0.03% Triton-X, 25 μCi 3H-thymidine triphosphate (New England Nuclear, Boston, MA) , and 50 pg/ml poly rA oligo 12-18 (BRL, Gaithersburg, MD) , Background counts were determined using poly dA oligo 12-18 as template and subtracted from the poly rA dT primer cpm to determine the thymidine incorporation specifically due to RT- activity.
The results of the tests are set forth in Table 8 as follows : TABLE 8
Effects of Mistletoe Extract on the Infectivity of HIV to H9 Lymphoma Cells in Culture
n-T4GEN* Cytopathic Reverse Transcriptase (μg/ml) (Syncytia cells) (cpm)
Day 5 Day 10
0 01 + + 97,896 (100)
0 10 + + 77,974 (79)
1 00 65, 932 (67 3) 10 00 32, 128 (32 8)
100 00 (toxic) 4, 200
H9 lymphoma cells growing in RPMI-1640 media containing 10% fetal calf serum were infected with HIV (1000,000 RT counts) on day 1 and various concentrations of n-T4GEN extract On day 5 cells were observed for cytopathic effects (syncytia) , and on day 10 assayed for RT activity (++) Denotes extensive giant cellε, (±) fewer syncytial cell
* Amounts expressed as μg of 1 percent extract per ml of cell culture
The results show that n-T4GEN at non-toxic concentrations inhibited HIV- induced cytopathic effects on H9 lymphoma cells. At these concentrations (10 μg/ml) there was also a significant (67.2%) inhibition of the viral reverse transcriptase. An extract identified herein as T4GEN was tested along with n-T4GEN to demonstrate their anti-cancer activity. T4GEN was analyzed and found to meet the sugar- binding protein fingerprint set forth in Table 5. The amount of protein in the alkaloidal and viscotoxin fractions were also found to be within the required fingerprint ranges. The T4GEN extract was prepared from European mistletoe.
Anticancer activities of T4GEN and n-T4GEN were studied in animals bearing subcutaneous transplants of C3H mammary adenocarcinoma 16/C. This tumor is maintained as a lung passed tumor in C3H female mice. In this example, tumors (1 x 10s cells) were transplanted (S.C.) in 18-20 g B6C3F1 hybrid female mice. On the following day, the tumor bearing animals were randomized and separated into different treatment groups (10 mice per group) . There were 15 animals in the control group who received only physiological saline during the treatment periods. The treatments (i.p.) were started 48 hours after the transplants and given for a duration of 14 days (daily single injections) . Animals were weighed on days
5, 9 and 14 to assess toxic effects. Tumors were measured on days 21 and 28 post transplants and the results are represented as tumor weights using formula (1 x w2) /2
(1 = length of tumor, w = width of tumor expressed in mm) .
The results set forth below show that the T4GEN extract at a dose schedule equivalent to 1 ml of a 1 percent extract/kg (20 mg/kg) , qd (1-14) caused a 98% inhibition in the growth of this tumor. In the same experiment the n-T4GEN
(5mg/kg, qd 1-14) caused 33% inhibition of growth of mammary adenocarcinoma 16/C, however, 30% of the treated animals remained tumor free until termination of the experiment (day
93) . This animal model is an accepted model for human breast carcinomas. The results are set forth in Table 9 as follows:
TABLE 9
Effect of T4GEN and n-T4GEN on the Growth of
Subcutaneous Transplants of C3H Mammary
Adenocarcinoma 16/C in B6C3F1, Female Mice
Figure imgf000057_0001
Amounts expressed as ml of 1 percent extract. 5.8. METHODS OF USE OF PHARMAPRINTED MATERIALS
After the botanical material has an established fingerprint, individual samples are then analyzed to determine if they fall within the accepted standards. Once the sample has been approved it is suitable for a variety of diseases relevant to humans and animals. Such materials are useful in clinical trials so as to provide materials of consistent quality and precise dose formulations for trials. The pharmaprinted material is also useful for toxicological tests in animals where once again the consistency of the material is useful for quantitative toxicological analysis. In many cases it would be of use as a reference material for analytical or biological use.
The pharmaprinted botanical materials are useful for any disease state for which a botanical drug is associated. See for example Leung and Foster, 1996 and Herbal Drugs and Phytopharmaceuticals, 1994. More specific examples of disease states or therapeutic indications include AIDS, mild- to-moderate depression, anti-arthritic, anti-cancer, anti- diarrhetic, anti-inflammatory, anti-nausea via GI, anti- rheumatic, anti-spasmodic, anti-ulcer, antibacterial, antimutagenic, antioxidant, antiviral, arthritis, asthma, blood pressure, benign prostatic hyperplasty (BPH) , bronchial asthma, bronchitis, calmative, cerebral circulatory disturbances, cholesterol lowering, cirrhosis, dermatological anti-inflammatory, diabetes, diuretic, drastic cathartic, dysmenorrhea, dyspepsia, environmental stress, expectorant, free radical scavenger, GI distress, hemorrhoids, hepatitis, hepatoprotective, hyperlipidemia, hyperprolactinemia, immunomodulatory activity, increase fibrinolysis, resistance to bacterial infection, inflammation, insomnia, lactation, liver protection, longevity, menstrual cycle regulation, migraine, muscle pain, osteoarthritis, pain, peripheral vascular disease, platelet aggregation, PMS, promote menstrual flow, prostatic disorders, reduce triglycerides, relieve menstrual pain, respiratory tract infections (RTl) , retinopathy, rheumatism, sedative, sleep-promoting agent, sore throat, stimulate hair growth, superficial wound healing, tinnitus, topical eczema (dermatitis) , urinary tract infection (UTI) , varicose veins, venous insufficiency or wound healing. The following examples are presented for purposes of illustration only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention in any way.
6. EXAMPLE: SAW PALMETTO, Serenoa repeαs , Serenoa serrulata, Sabal serrulata
6.1. PLANT SOURCE/EXTRACTION METHOD
The Saw Palmetto is a small palm indigenous to the United States. In botanical preparations, the small brownish-colored berries have been used for many years to treat diseases of the bladder and the prostate . Extracts of the Saw Palmetto are prepared in variety of ways, typically, hexane extraction or supercritical carbon dioxide extraction. The extraction methods are described above which describes methods of processing and extracting botanical materials. There are also lipidic extracts and saponifiable extracts that are commercially available from Madaus, S.A.
6.2. COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are many commercial suppliers of Sabal serrula ta extracts. The following names are used: IDS 90 (Weisser et al., 1996, The Prostate 28:300-306) ; Strogen Forte, Talso™, SG290 Talso™ uno, commercially available from Sanofi Winthrop GmbH (Munich, Germany) . Extracts are also available from Madaus S.A. (Kδln, Germany) . Permixon™ is available from Centre de Recherches P. Fabre (Castres, France) . Several varieties of Permixon extract are available, including a lipophilic extract, LSESr extract, and a PA109 extract. Another product available is Prostaserene™, a purified extract of Serenoa repens , commercially available from Therabel Pharma™, (Belgium) . Saw Palmetto is also produced by the following companies: NaturaLife, Herbal Choice, Botalia Gold, Herb Pharm, PhytoPharmica. 6.3. CLINICAL USE FOR ALLEVIATION OF THE SYMPTOMS OF BENIGN PROSTATIC HYPERTROPHY
In Europe, botanical materials represent nearly half of all prescriptions for benign prostatic hypertrophy (BPH) (Di o _ Silverio et al . , 1993, Minerva Urol . Nefrol . 4_5: 143-9) (Di
Silverio et al . ) . Some of the more common plant extracts, or phytotherapeutics, prescribed for BPH are obtained from: Serenoa repens (Saw Palmetto Berry) , Pygeum africanum (Plum Bark) , and CucurJbita pepo (Pumpkin Seed) . By far the most _ widely used botanical material for the treatment of BPH is a lipid extract of Saw Palmetto berries. Saw Palmetto Berry extract (SPB-extract) is nontoxic and in extensive clinical trials has demonstrated little or no adverse side effects. The most extensive clinical trials of SPB-extract were
__ conducted in France. In these trials the SPB-extract Permixon was used. This extract has been commercially available since 1982. According to French scientists, Permixon is very safe, and there is little evidence of undesirable side effects. Today, Permixon and a variety of
9n other products are available in over twenty countries throughout the world.
A number of clinical studies with SPB-extracts have been published in recent years. In 1984, Champault et al . reported a double blind, placebo controlled study in 110 outpatients (Champault et al . , 1984, Br. J. Clin . Pharm . i8_:461-462) . In this study, 55 patients received the SPB- extract Permixon (160 mg, twice daily) and 55 patients received placebo treatment for 30 days. The study reports statistically significant improvements in nocturia, intensity of dysuria, urine flow rate, and post-nicturition residue. This report records minor side effects ( e . g. , headaches) in 5 patients. Di Silverio et al . have reported on the treatment of 34 BPH patients with the SPB-extract Strogen Forte (160 mg, twice daily) for three months (Di Silverio et al . , supra) . The results of the study showed subjective 35 improvements in 60% of patients and included a reduction of urine volume in 50%, a slight reduction in prostate volume in 53%, and significant increase in serum testosterone levels and reduction in intra-prostatic DHT concentrations. The authors have also reviewed studies during 1983-1985 which report efficacy and tolerability of the SPB-extract Strogen Forte in BPH patients. In 1993, Romics et al . reported on a one year treatment study in 42 patients (Romics et al . , 1993, Internat . Urol . and Nephrol . 23.(6) :565-569) . This study reported significant improvements in objective symptoms like night urination (68.4%) residual volume (74.7%) and interrupted urine stream and post-urination dribbling in 80% of patients. No side effects were reported. In another study, Vohlensieck et al . reported a 12-week treatment study of 1334 BPH outpatients with the SPB-extract of Sabal serrula ta (Vohlensieck et al . , 1993, Fortsch der Med . 111 (18) :323-326) . Under this treatment, the volume of residual urine decreased by 50%, pollakisuria decreased on the average by 37%, and nocturia by 54%. The number of patients with dysuria pain decreased from 75% to 37%. Furthermore, they found the efficacy of the drug "good to excellent" in more than 80% of the cases and tolerability "good to excellent" in more than 95% of the patients.
Thus, Saw Palmetto is useful to treat and/or ameliorate BPH and/or urinary dysfunction.
Other researchers have reported combination treatments. Specifically, SPB-extract used in combination with extracts from pumpkin seeds (53 patients) (Carbin et al . , 1990, Br. J. Urol . £6:639-641) or urica extract (2,080 patients) (Schneider et al . 1996, Fortsch der Med . 113(3) :37-40) . All of these studies support the efficacy of SPB-extract in the treatment of BPH and/or urinary dysfunction.
6.4. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS OF SAW PALMETTO
The fractionation of the contents of commercially available gel caps of Saw Palmetto was performed using normal phase flash chromatography. This method was selected as a preferable prep-chromatographic technique on the basis of observed excellent mass recovery (>90%) , the separation of the selected standards (fatty acids, their esters) , as well as separation of the other co-ocurring components. A detailed description of the materials and methods utilized is described below. A comprehensive search of the literature on Saw Palmetto ( Sereno repens) indicated that phytosterols (β-sitosterol) , fatty acids (palmitic, oleic, linoleic, linolenic, myristic and lauric acids) , as well as their ethyl esters, are the components of Saw Palmetto with the most consistent bioactivity in a number of assays [fatty acids/esters: 5α- reductase (Weisser, 1996, supra) , androgen receptors (Casarosa, 1988) ; phytosterols (especially β-sitosterol, although less than 10% of the activity of estradiol) : estrogenic activity (Duke, 1985)] . Prep-CC Method: Approximately 5 g of the contents of a commercial gel capsule of Saw Palmetto contents were dissolved in 25 ml of CH2C12. The resultant extract was loaded onto a preparative flash glass chromatography column prepacked with Si02. The flash CC (column chromatography) conditions were as follows: column-60μm Si02; each mobile phase volume = two column volumes; ten fractions were collected with the elution profile shown in the table below. The total recovery of 4.77 grams gave a 92% total mass balance. Analytical capillary GC Method: The GC system was a Varian GC/FID equipped with Star data handling software. Separations were made using lμl injection volumes injected onto a capillary column (Restek RTX-2330, 30 m column, 0.25 μm, 0.20 μmdf) and a temperature gradient system as follows: 55°C for 1 min.; 7.5°C/min. to 260°C, hold for 5 min. The column flow rate was kept at 1.0 ml/min., with the injection split ratio 1:100. Injector and detector temperatures usei were 260°C. There are many sources of standards for the Saw Palmetto assay, including Aldrich Chemical Co., Inc. (Milwaukee, WI, USA) .
Approximately 5 grams of commercially available SPB- extract (from gel capsules) were dissolved in 25 ml of methylene chloride. Flash chromatography was performed using this solution. The chromatography system consisted of 60 μm Silica Gel and the following eluting solvents:
Mobile Phase Hexane Acetone MeOH (% V/V)
1 100 0 0
2 90 10 0
3 80 20 0
4 70 30 0
5 60 40 0
6 50 50 0
7 40 60 0
8 30 70 0
9 20 80 0
10 0 0 100
The amount of dried residue recorded from each fraction of mobile phase collected was as follows 1 (-0.1 g) , 2 (-2.5 g) , 3 (-1.6 g) , 4 (-0.1 g) , 5 (-0.1 g) , 6-9 (-0.0 g) , and 10 (-0.5 g) . The total dried residue recovered via flash chromatography was calculated to be 4.77 grams. Given the initial load of extract was 5.15 grams, 92% of the extract was recovered as dried residue.
6.5. BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
Based on a literature review and according to the teaching of the method of the present invention, the following categories of bioassay were chosen to assess biological activity of Saw Palmetto for BPH in vi tro : anti- androgenic, anti-inflammatory, cyclooxygenase/lipoxygenase (CO/LO) inhibition, muscle contractility. From these categories, the specific assays studied were as follows: 5- lipoxygenase assay, cyclooxygenase-1-assay, cyclooxygenase-2 assay (Panlabs, WA) , and an androgen receptor assay developed at the Medical School of Georgia as described below. 6.5.1. RAT PROSTATIC ANDROGEN RECEPTOR ASSAY: COMPETITION NUCLEAR RECEPTOR LIGAND BINDING ASSAY AGAINST DIHYDROTESTOSTERONE
6.5.1.1 MATERIALS AND METHODS Animals
Male rats were obtained at 60 days of age (300-350 g body weight) from Harlan (St. Louis, MO) and allowed to acclimate for 24 hours to a air-conditioned, light controlled room with a 12 hour light-dark cycle. Rats were fed with Purina chow and tap water, ad libi tum .
All animals studies carried out were approved by the Medical College of Georgia Institutional Committee for the Care and Use of Animals in Research and Education in accordance with the guidelines of the National Institutes of Health and United States Department of Agriculture.
Steroid and reagents
General chemicals (reagent grade) , free fatty acids, fatty acid ethyl esters and radioinert steroids were obtained from Sigma Chemical Company (St. Louis, MO) . 3H- dihydrotestosterone (5α-androstan-17jβ-ol-3-one; 60 Ci/mmol) was purchased from NEN Life Science Products (Boston, MA) . 100% ethanol was used throughout for the preparations of all inhibitors and radioinert chemicals.
Androgen Receptor Binding
The animals were treated intraperitoneally with testosterone (400 μg/100 g body wt) . After 1 hour, the animals were sacrificed by decapitation and the ventral prostates were rapidly removed and placed in ice-cold "homogenization buffer" (10 mM Tris-HCl, 1.5 mM Na2EDTA, 0.5 mM dithiothreitol, 0.25 M sucrose, 1 mm phenylmethylsulfonylfluoride, pH 7.4 at 22°C) . The prostates were minced and homogenized on ice with a Polytron homogenizer (set at 4) using 10 second bursts alternated with a 30 second cooling period at a tissue-buffer ratio of 550 mg/ml. The homogenate was centrifuged at 800 g for 20 minutes at 4°C. The nuclear pellet was then resuspended in ice-cold "nuclear buffer" (10 mM Tris, 0.5 mM dithiothreitol, 0.25 M sucrose, 2.5 mM MgCl2, pH 7.4 at 22°C, 550 mg tissue/ml) . The resuspended pellet was homogenized on ice using a glass Dounce homogenizer until suspension became uniform.
Aliquots of the nuclear suspension obtained after rehomogenization of the nuclear pellets were dispensed into 12 x 75 mm glass test tubes containing 10 μl of 3H- dihydrotestosterone with or without 5 μl of various concentrations of inhibitors in a final volume of 1 ml. Non¬ specific binding was determined using radioinert dihydrotestosterone (IO"5 M) in place of the inhibitor. The test tubes were incubated for 20 hours at 15°C. After an overnight incubation, 1 ml of ice-cold nuclear buffer was added followed by centrifugation at 800 g for 10 minutes at 4°C. The nuclear pellets were washed 3 times by resuspension in 1 ml of the same ice-cold nuclear buffer, with mixing and centrifugation as above. After discarding the final supernatant, 1 ml of 100% ethanol was added to each pellet and then vortexed. Test tubes were placed in a 30°C water bath for 40 minutes, with vortexing every 10 minutes and a final centrifugation at 800 g for 10 minutes. The ethanol extracts were decanted into vials containing 4 ml of scintillation fluid (Ecoscint A) , shaken and counted.
Compounds, extracts and fractions were screened at an initial concentration of 1 X 10"b and in some cases at 2 X 10" 5. If an activity of greater than 50% inhibition was observed at 2 X IO"5 or less, a full dose response curve was carried out. The results of this analysis are shown in the summary table for Saw Palmetto. K50 displacements for auric acid ester, Linoleic acid ester and extract #3 are shown in Figs. 4, 5 and 6 respectively.
The results, expressed as percent inhibition of 3H- Dihydrotestosterone binding, at two concentrations of putative active components, of the rat prostatic androgen receptor assay are below in the summary table. 6.5.2. 5-LIPOXYGENASE ASSAY
5-lipoxygenase catalyzes the oxidative metabolism of arachidonic acid to 5-hydroxyeicosatetraenoic acid (5-HETE) , the initial reaction in the biosynthetic pathway leading to the formation of the leukotrienes. The procedure was as follows. 5-lipoxygenase assays were run using a crude enzyme preparation from rat basophilic leukemia cells (RBL-1) . Test compounds were pre-incubated with the enzyme for 5 minutes at room temperature and the reaction was initiated by addition of substrate (arachidonic acid) . Following an 8 minute incubation at room temperature, the reaction was terminated by addition of citric acid, and levels of 5-HETE were determined by 5-HETE radioimmunoassay (RIA) . Compounds are screened at 30 μM (Shimuzu et al . , 1984, Proc. Na tl . Acad . Sci . USA 81:689-693) .
The following reference compounds were used for the inhibition of 5-lipoxygenase : reference compounds, (ICS0 (μM) ) : BW-755C, (6.6) ; nordihydroguaiaretic acid (NDGA) , (0.26) ; phenidone, (30) . Compounds and fractins were screened at an initial concentration of 3 X 10"b. If an activity of greater than 50% inhibition was observed at 3 X IO"5, a full dose response curve was carried out. The results of this analysis are shown in the summary table for Saw Palmetto.
6.5.3. CYCLOOXYGENASE-1 ASSAY Cyclooxygenase-1 (from ram seminal vesicles) , 125 units per assay tube, was pre-incubated with 1 mM GSH, 1 mM hydroquinone, 1.25 mM hemoglobin and test compound for 1 minute at 25°C. The reaction was initiated by addition of arachidonic acid (100 mM) and terminated after 20 minutes incubation at 37°C by addition of trichloroacetic acid (TCA) . Following centrifugal separation and addition of thiobarbiturate, cyclooxygenase activity was determined by reading absorbance at 530 nm (Evans et al . , 1987, Biochem . Pharamac . 3_6 :2035-2037; Boopathy and Balasubramanian, 1988, J. Biochem . 239:371-377) . The following reference compounds were used for the inhibition of cyclooxygenase 1: reference compounds, (ICS0 (μM) ) ; aspirin, (240) ; indomethacin, (1.7) .
Compounds and fractions were screened at an initial concentration of 3 X IO"4. If an activity of greater than 50% inhibition was observed at 3 X IO"4, a full dose response curve was carried out . The results of this analysis are shown in the summary table for Saw Palmetto.
6.5.4. CYCLOOXYGENASE-2 ASSAY
Cyclooxygenase-2 (from sheep placenta) , 80 units per assay tube, was pre-incubated with 1 mM GSH, 1 mM hydroquinone, 1.25 mM hemoglobin and test compound for 1 minute at 25°C. The reaction is initiated by addition of arachidonic acid (100 mM) and terminated after 20 minutes incubation at 37°C by addition of TCA. Following centrifugal separation and addition of thiobarbiturate, cyclooxygenase activity is determined by reading absorbance at 530 nm (Boopathy and Balasubramanian, 1988; Evans et al . 1987; O'Sullivan et al . , 1992, Biochem . Biophy. Res . Commun . 187:1123-1127) .
The following reference compounds were used for the inhibition of cyclooxygenase-2: reference compounds, (IC50 (μM) ) : aspirin, (660) ; indomethacin, (2.4) . The results of the cyclooxygenase-2 assay are below in the summary table.
SUMMARY TABLE Saw Palmetto Extract - Biological Assay Results
Component /Ext ract Androgen Coxl Cox2 5-Lιpo Fraction Receptor
Lauric Acid Negative Negative Negative Negative
Linoleic Acid Negative Negative Negative Negative
Linolenic Acid Negative 233uM Negative 12 uM
Myristic Acid Negative Negative Negative Negative
Oleic Acid Negative Negative Negative Negative
Palmitic Acid Negative Negative Negative Negative
Lauric Ester 130 nM Negative Negative Negative Linoleic Ester 6 um Negative Negative Negative Linolenic Ester Negative Negative Negative Negative Myristic Ester Negative Negative Negative Negative Oleic Ester Negative Negative Negative Negative Palmitic Ester Negative Negative Negative Negative
Extract #1 Negative Negative Negative Negative Extract #2 30 nM* Negative Negative Negative Extract #3 3 5 uM Negative Negative Negative Extract #4 Not tested Negative Negative Negative Extract #5 Negative Negative Negative Negative
Fraction # 1 Not tested Negative Negative Negative
Fraction # 2 Negative Negative Negative Negative
Fraction # 3 Negative Negative Negative Negative
Fraction # 4 Not tested Negative Negative Negative
Fraction # 5 Not tested Negative Negative Negative
Fraction # 10 Not tested Negative Negative Negative
Fraction 6 9** Not tested Not tested Not tested Not tested
Beta-Sitosterol 60% @ lOuM Not tested Not tested Not tested
* See Discussion in The Pharmaprinting of Saw Palmetto section **Dry Residue zero grams 6.5.5. 5-ALPHA-REDUCTASE ASSAYS
6.5.5.1. PREPARATION OF PROSTATIC 5-ALPHA- REDUCTASE FROM RATS
In a typical experiment, adult male Sprague-Dawley rats
5 (10-20) are sacrificed by cervical dislocation. The prostates are removed and cleaned by removal of connective tissues. The tissues are maintained at 0-4°C and suspended in a 3-fold volume of buffer A (20 mM sod. phosphate pH 6;
0.32 mM sucrose; and 0.1 mM dithiothreitol), cut, minced, and
10 homogenized with a Polytron homogenizer. The homogenate is centrifuged at 10,000 g for 60 minutes and 10,000 g supernatant is centrifuged at 140,000 g for 60 minutes. The two pellets are combined and suspended in twice the pellet volume of buffer B (sod. phosphate 2 mM, pH 6.5; 2 M NaCl;
15 digitonin 5 mg/ml; 0.1 mM EDTA, 40% glycerol and 1 mM dithiothreitol) at 0°C for 60 minutes. The suspension is centrifuged at 150,000 g for 60 minutes and the supernatant containing solubilized 5-alpha-reductase after addition of 5 mM NADPH is estimated for its protein contents and stored
20 at -70°C as 5-alpha-reductase.
6.5.5.2. PREPARATION OF PROSTATIC 5-ALPHA- REDUCTASE FROM HUMANS
Human prostatic tissue is obtained from BPH patients oc undergoing surgical transvesical resections. The tissue is transported to the laboratory in ice cold saline within 60 minutes. The tissue samples are cleaned, chopped into 1-3 g pieces, and quick frozen in liquid nitrogen and stored at
-70°C. BPH is confirmed by histological examination.
_0 The prostatic tissues are thawed and cut with fine scissors (or pulverized at liquid N2 temp.) and homogenized with one 30 second burst of sonicator at 4°C in a 5-fold volume of buffer (100 mM Tris/HCl pH 7.4, 20% glycerol, 100 mM sodium citrate, 100 mM KCl, ImM EDTA and 15 mM β-
35 mercaptoethanol) . The homogenate is filtered through glass wool to remove cell debris and then centrifuged at 800 g for
10 minutes to provide a nuclear pellet. The supernatant is divided into 1 ml aliquots to be centrifuged at 120,000 g for 45 minutes to provide microsomal pellets containing 5-alpha- reductase which are stored at -70°C or suspended m buffer B containing 0.25 mg/ml Lubrol PX or 0.5 mg/ml digitonin and passed through a 25 gauge syringe to make a homogenate which is centrifuged at 120,000 g for 45 minutes. The supernatant microsomal 5-alpha-reductase (estimate protein contents) is used in assays or stored in 40% glycerol at -20°C without loss of activity.
6.5.5.3. ASSAY OF 5-ALPHA-REDUCTASE ACTIVITY The 5-alpha-reductase assays are studied by following the reduction of radiolabelled [3H] testosterone (T) to [3H] 5-α-dihydrotestosterone (DHT) at 37°C. Tubes (duplicates) with 1 ml Tris-HCl (pH 7.4) buffer containing 100 mM sodium citrate, 100 mM KCl, 20% (v/v) glycerol, 1 mM EDTA, 15 mM β- mercaptoethanol, 5 mM glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase and 1 μM- [3H] testosterone, are preincubated at 37°C for 15 minutes. The assays are started by the addition of 5-50 μl of 5-alpha- reductase (rat or human) in the presence or absence of inhibitors (SPB-extract from different sources and at different concentrations) . Proscar™ (finasteride) is used as a positive control. The reaction is stopped by the addition of 1 ml diethylether containing 25 μg each of T, DHT, and 3- alpha-androstanediol . Each tube is vortexed, centrifuged, and the top ether layer separated. The ether is evaporated with a stream of nitrogen and the residue dissolved in 20 μl chloroform/methanol (2:1, v/v) and applied to thin layer plates (silica gel 60, E. Merck, 5748-7, Darmstadt, Germany) . The plates are developed with chloroform/ethyl acetate (3:1, v/v) , autoradiographed at -70°C for 18 hours and radioactive zones (corresponding to T, DHT, and 3-alpha-androstanediol) cut and counted for radioactivity in a liquid scintillation counter. The method is used to calculate K^ and Vmax values and percent inhibition of the conversion of T to DHT in presence of a SPB-extract at different concentrations. 6.6. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS GC-MS, HPLC OF OLEIC, LAURIC,
LINOLEIC, LINOLENIC, PALMITIC, MYRISTIC ACIDS BOTH FREE FATTY ACIDS AND ETHYL ESTERS
Saw Palmetto. methyl palmitate, methyl stearate, methyl oleate, methyl Imoleate, ethyl laurate, methyl Imolenate, ethyl myristate, methyl caproate, ethyl palmitate, methyl caprylate, methyl caprate, ethyl oleate, methyl laurate, ethyl Imolenate, methyl myristate and ethyl lmolmeate.
Figure imgf000071_0001
30
6.7. THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE PHARMAPRINT
Five commercially available extracts of Saw Palmetto were quantitatively analyzed to determine the amount of several fatty acids and fatty acid esters present in each
35 extract. The results are depicted in FIG. 4. The figure shows the wide variability of each of the components present in the various extracts.
Each of the fatty acids and fatty acid esters, i.e., the components, of FIG. 4 were analyzed to determine their activity in four bioassays relevant for the BPH clinical indication, see above. None of the components showed acitvity against Cox-2. The activities, IC50s, for purified components in the other three bioassays were as follows: linolenic acid (233 μM in COX-1, 12 μM in 5-LIPO) ; linoleic acid ethyl ester (6 μM in androgen receptor assay) ; lauric acid ethyl ester (130 nM in androgen receptor assay) ; and β- sitosterol (~10μM in the androgen receptor assay) . Because none of the extracts were active in the COX-1 and 5-LIPO assay, the androgen receptor assay was selected for the calcualtions shown below.
The contribution of each individual component to the observed total bioactivity is calculated using (i) the total bioactivity of the botanical extract, (ii) the amount of each component present in each extract and (iii) the IC50s of each purified component. This calculation is exemplified below using commercial sample #3 and the androgen receptor assay. Sample #3 has a total extract IC50 value for the androgen receptor of 3.5 μM (total bioactivity) , assuming the average molecular weight of the components is 200. A capsule of sample #3 contains the following proportions of the ethyl esters of lauric acid (0.036 W/W%; 228 MWt) and linoleic acid (0.115 W/W%; 308 MWt) -1 A calculation of the per cent contribution of the androgen receptor bioactivity of lauric acid ethyl ester relative to the total extract bioactivity is made using the following formula: the extract ICS0 bioactivity (3.5μM = 3,500nM; average MWt. <200>) is multiplied times the amount of lauric acid ethyl ester present (0.036%W/W) and then divided by the lauric acid ethyl ester observed IC50 (130
/3-sitosterol is present in -0.2% W/W of the total extract. The activity of purified /S-sitosterol (-10 μM) Due to the preliminary nature of these results, β- sitosterol is not included in the calculation. nM) and multiplied by 100 and corrected for the molecular weight (3,500nM x 200 MWt x 0.0355 x 100)/(130nM x 228 MWt) = 83.9%] . The per cent contribution of linoleic acid ethyl ester using the same formula is calculated as follows: (3.5μM x 200 x 0.1146 x 100)/(6μM x 308) = 4.4%. Thus, two of the components in combination, lauric acid ethyl ester and linoleic ethyl ester, account for 90% of the observed in vi tro bioactivity in this assay and are defined as active components in the androgen receptor bioassay. The combined bioactivity of the lauric and linoleic ethyl esters is used to define a bioactivity standard for acceptance or rejection of pharmaceutical grade compositions .2
The bioactivity ranges are set to determine if a given botanical qualifies as a pharmaceutical grade botanical as follows: In one calculation, the requirements are set such that the active components must account for 25% of the bioactivity based on the active component standard described above. Given the bioactivity required (25% of the standard) and known bioactivity for the active component, the calculation is as follows: The weight percent of the active component multiplied by the minimal percentage of the biological activity required, e.g., (0.036% W/W x 25% = 0.009% W/W) for lauric acid. Similarly, for linoleic acid must account for 0.42%. Alternatively, the requirements are established such the combination of the two esters accounts for at least 25% of the observed bioactivity.
Requiring that each component account for 50% of the bioactivity, the sample must contain at least 0.018% W/W lauric acid ester or 0.84% linoleic acid ester.
Extract #2 displayed inconsistent behavior based on analysis in the chemical and biological assays. Extract #2 has apparent androgen receptor assay activity four times stronger than the best standard tested (30nM vs.
130 mN for lauric acid ethyl ester) . However, extract #2 contains very low amounts of putative components. Thus, extract #2 is not part of the analysis. Requiring that each component account for 70% of the bioactivity, the sample must contain at least 0.025% W/W lauric acid ester or 1.176% W/W linoleic acid ester.
Requiring that each component account for 80% of the bioactivity, the sample must contain at least 0.029% W/W lauric acid ester or 1.344% linoleic acid ester.
Using either combined lauric and linoleic ethyl esters or the individual esters bioactivities, we can set now clearly defined standards for acceptance or rejection for pharmaceutical grade compositions of each of the five commercial samples tested on the basis of % W/W of these esters. For the five commercial samples shown in FIG. 4, even using the least rigorous requirements, e.g. 25%, samples 1, 2, 4 and 5 are rejected as unsuitable for pharmaceutical grade drug compositions due to the levels of the two esters determined for each sample.
7. EXAMPLE: KOREAN MISTLETOE 7.1. PLANT SOURCE/EXTRACTION METHOD Plant powder (2.4 Kg) obtained from Korean mistletoe waε extracted with 300 ml batches of water in a clean blender. The extract was filtered through cheese cloth-lined filter beds to eliminate fibrous and water-insoluble residues, final volume 6.03 liters. Final concentration of the extract was 39.8% (plant weight/volume) .
7.2. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The extract was left at 4°C for two weeks in absence of air (flushed with nitrogen) . At this time, additional insoluble residues were deposited. The cold extract was filtered through 0.8μ filters and final sterile filtration was performed with 0.2 μ filters in a sterile environment. The semipurified product was collected in 500 ml sterile vacuum containers and identified as T4GEN. The product samples were found to be pyrogen free. Samples from the flask were removed with a sterile syringe in a laminar flow hood and diluted on the basis that each ml of the sample contains 400 mg of the extract (40% solution) .
The extract samples were analyzed according to the affinity chromatography system schematically shown in FIG. 9, which was the same system used to establish the standard marker fingerprints. The columns used to separate the proteins were Sepharose™ 4B.
The columns were prepared as follows:
Activation of Sepharose™ 4B: Sepharose™ 4B (400 ml) was repeatedly washed with double distilled water and filtered on a buchner funnel . The sepharose residue was repeatedly washed with Na2C03 (0.5 M, pH 11) and then suspended in a stirred 2 liter cylinder in 400 ml Na2C03 (0.5 M, pH 11) . The cylinder was covered with aluminum foil and to the stirred suspension of Sepharose™ 4B, divinylsulfone (48 ml, absence of light) was added dropwise over a period of 80 minutes. The reactants were stirred for another 30 minutes at room temperature. Then the resin was filtered on a sintered glass funnel (no touching with hands or paper) with approximately 500 ml of Na2C03 (0.5 M, pH 10, make with NaHC03) . At this time the resin was suspended in 400 ml Na2C03 (0.5 M, pH 10) and used for preparing sugar-specific affinity resins as follows :
Galactose-specific Sepharose™ 4B: To the activated resin 380 ml (in 5M Na2C03) , galactose (38 g) was added with stirring in absence of light. The suspension was stirred overnight and then the suspension was filtered on a sintered glass funnel. To inactivate the reacted activated sepharose, the residue was washed with 0.5 M NaHC03 (pH 8.5) and then suspended in 350 ml NaHC03 (0.5 M, pH 8.5) and 14 ml 2- mercaptoethanol . The stirred suspension was maintained at room temperature for 4 hours and then filtered on a sintered glass funnel. The resin was washed with 0.2 M PBS (phosphate buffered saline) and finally suspended in 380 ml 0.2 M PBS and stored at 4°C along with a few crystals of NaN3. Lactose-specific Sepharose™ 4B: The method of preparation was the same as described for galactose. Here 300 ml of activated Sepharose™ was reacted with 30 g of lactose and the affinity resin was deactivated with 300 ml NaHC03 (0.5 M, pH 8.5) , 12 ml 2-mercaptoethanol and finally suspended in 300 ml of PBS and NaN3 as described in the previous preparation.
N-acetyl-D-galactosamine-specific Sepharose B: Activated Sepharose 4B (30 ml) was treated with 3 g of N-acetyl-D- galactosamine as described. The reaction was terminated with 30 ml NaHC03 (0.5 M, pH 8.5) and 5 ml 2-mercaptoethanol . The resin was maintained in 30 ml PBS and a few crystals of NaN3 at 4°C.
Fucose-specific-Sepharose™ 4B: Activated Sepharose™ 4B (50 ml) was reacted with 5 g fucose. The affinity resin was treated with 50 ml NaHC03 and 5 ml 2-mercaptoethanol to deactivate the unreacted Sepharose™. The resin was maintained in 50 ml PBS and NaN3 as described.
Melibiose-Specific Sepharose™ 4B: Activated Sepharose 4B (50 ml) was reacted with 5 g melibiose. The reaction was terminated with 50 ml NaHC03 and 5 ml 2-mercaptoethanol . The resin was maintained in 50 ml PBS and a few crystals of NaN3 at 4°C.
The same methods can be used to provide columns of different sugar specificity. The used columns were regenerated by elutions with 5 M urea and followed by elution with 0.5 M NaHC03 (pH 8.5) . Prior to use, columns are equilibrated with 0.02 M Tris/HCl buffer (Buffer C) .
The Buffers used for Extraction and Affinity Chromatography were prepared as follows:
All buffers made in double distilled water (DD) . A) Tris/HCl (0.02 M, pH 7.8) containing NaCl (0.2
M) dithiothreitol (1 mM) and just prior to use add phenyl methanesulfonyl fluoride (0.01 mM) . (Buffer A) .
B) Tris/HCl (0.02 M, pH 7.8) containing 0.4 M KCl, 2% Triton x-100, 1 mM dithiothreitol and 0.01 mM phenyl methanesulfonyl fluoride (to be added before use) . (Buffer B) . C) Tris/HCl (0.02 M, pH 7.8) containing 1.25 M NaCl, 25 mM CaCl2, 0.05% Triton x-100 and 1 mM dithiothreitol. (Buffer C) .
D) Buffer (C) containing 4 mM EDTA instead of 25 mM CaCl2. (Buffer D) .
If desired, EGTA may be substituted for EDTA.
A known volume of the mistletoe extract was adjusted to pH 7.8 with 2 M Tris-buffer. The solution was absorbed on a series of Sepharose™ 4B affinity columns (1.6 x 7 ml) . The columns were washed with excess (200 ml) of 0.02 M Tris- buffer (pH 7.8) containing 25 mM CaCl2 (Buffer C) to remove all unbound proteins (viscotoxins and alkaloids) . Then each column was separately washed with Tris-buffer (pH 7.8) containing 4 mM EDTA (Buffer D) to elute proteins which require Ca++ for their binding to specific sugars i.e. Ca+* dependent sugar-binding proteins (100 ml samples) . Subsequently, the columns were washed with Tris-buffer (Buffer C, 200 ml) and then eluted with the same buffer (100 ml) containing 0.5 M corresponding sugars to remove non-Ca" dependent sugar binding proteins. The unbound proteins were fractionated on a Sephadex™ G-75 column (2.5 x 75 cm) to separate viscotoxins from alkaloids. All fractions were dialyzed to remove salts and other buffer ingredients. Each dialyzed fraction was concentrated by an Amicon™ concentrator using DIAFLO™ ultrafiltration membrane YM10 (10,000 cutoff) . Protein concentration was measured by Bio-Rad assay with bovine-globulin as a standard (each separated protein may be characterized for its purity and molecular weight by SDS page gel chromatography) .
7.3. BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The inhibitory concentration (ICS0) was determined for each sugar-binding protein as follows: Leukemia L1210 cells were maintained in asynchronous logarithmic growth at 37°C in RPMI 1640 medium supplemented with 10% (v/v) fetal bovine calf serum and 1 % (v/v) Pen Strep. The cell population doubling time was 11-12 hours. The cells were passed every 48 hours at 1 x IO4 cells/ml in order to keep the cells in a logarithmic stage of growth. For all growth inhibition studies all stock solutionε and dilutions were made with sterile 0.7% NaCl solution. The cell cultures were seeded at 2-5 x IO4 cells/ml in duplicates for each inhibitor concentration in a microtiter plate (0.18 ml/well) . The covered microtiter plate was incubated for 48 hours in a humidified C02 incubator containing 5% C02 in air. At the end of the incubation period, aliquots of each well were added to a measured volume of isotonic saline and counted in an electronic counter. Because fractions at high concentrations caused rapid cellular fragmentation, the test microtiter-plates were routinely checked under a microscope prior to cell number counting so that the results were not compromised. Cell viability was determined by trypan blue exclusion. The results were calculated by plotting percent cell growth inhibition (as compared to the cell density of the saline treated controls) versus log of protein (or specific fraction) concentration which caused 50% inhibition (IC50) in cell growth as determined from the graph.
The results of the analysis are shown in Tables 10 and 11 for n-T4GEN salt and detergent extracts prepared in accordance with this example. As can be seen from Tables 10 and 11, the extracts from both the sap and the cell walls of the Korean mistletoe have protein levels and inhibitory activities which all fall within the limits required to be identified as pharmaceutical grade extracts in accordance with the present invention. Accordingly, these extracts may be used in clinical studies directed to cancer or AIDS treatment . They may also be used for routine patient treatment since their quality and efficacy have been established in accordance with the protein fingerprint identifiers as required by the present invention. TABLE 10
FRACTIONATION OF THE VARIOUS CONSTITUENTS OF V. ALBUM
COLORATUM WITH ANTILEUKEMIA - L1210 ACTIVITY - n-T4GEN
(40 PERCENT EXTRACT)
(Affinity Method, Fractionation of Salt Extract)
Protein Total Total ICa 50 Total
Content Volume Protein Activityb
(μg
Fraction identity (mg/ml) (ml) (mg) Protein/ml) Units
Salt Extract 7.63 350 2673 0.1 1 2.4 x 107
Affinity columns eluted with
EDTA buffer - Ca+ + dependent
1. Lactose 0.31 20 6.24 0.38 1.6 x IO4
2. Galactose 0.39 20 7.91 0.25 3.1 x IO4
3. Melibiose 0.28 20 5.44 0.20 2.7 x 10"
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.70 12.5 875 0.29 3.00 x 104
5. Fucose 0.28 18 5.04 0.36 1.4 x 104
Affinity columns eluted with corresponding sugars - non- Ca* * dependent
1. Lactose 0.27 22 5.98 0.00027 2.2 x IO7
2. Galactose 1 .40 9 12.60 0.0013 9.6 x 106
3. Melibiose 0.32 10 3.20 0.0034 9.4 x 105
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.66 18 1 1.90 0.017 7.0 x 105
5. Fucose 1.17 15 2.59 0.019 1 .3 x 105
Sephadex - G75 (Unbound proteins) Fractions0
I (12-50) 1.84 46 84.6 0.5 1 .69 x 105
II (51 -70) 1.22 22.5 27.45 4.0 6.8 x 103
III (71-100) 1 .12 40 44.80 2.8 1 .6 x 10"
IV (101-140)" -0- 50 -0- 13.5 1 .6 x 10"
Inhibitory concentration expressed as μg protein/ml which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of
L1210 cells in culture.
Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to
L1210 cells caused a 50% cell growth inhibition.
50 ml on column from a total eluate of 325 ml .
31 mg alkaloids obtained from fraction IV. TABLE 11
FRACTIONATION OF THE VARIOUS CONSTITUENTS OF V. ALBUM
COLORATUM WITH ANTILEUKEMIA - L1210 ACTIVITY
(40 PERCENT EXTRACT)
(Affinity Method, Fractionation of Detergent Extract)
Protein Total Total lv~ 50 Total
Content Volume Protein Actιvιtyb
(μg
Fraction identity (mg/ml) (ml) (mg) Protein/ml) Units
Detergent Extract 1.68 450 756 0.27 2.8 x 10"
Affinity columns eluted with
EDTA buffer
1. Lactose 0.18 22 4.04 0.250 1.6 x IO4
2. Galactose 0.08 11.5 0 97 0.031 3.1 x 10"
3 Melibiose 0.16 20 3.12 0.054 5.7 x 10"
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0 17 19 3.20 0.076 4.2 x IO4
5 Fucose 0.12 6.5 0.78 0.100 0.5 x 104
Affinity columns eluted with corresponding sugars
1. Lactose 0.35 95 3.23 0.0045 2.1 x IO6
2. Galactose 0.50 15 7.50 0.0055 1.3 x IO6
3. Melibiose 0.15 12 0.61 0.0084 0.07 x IO6
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.62 4 7.68 0.0035 2.1 x IO6
5. Fucose 0.50 10 5.10 0.0500 0.1 x IO6
Sephadex - G75 (Unbound proteins) Fractions0
I (9-35) 1.58 33 52.1 1.25 0.05 x 10"
II (36-55) 1.36 20 27.2 1.70 0.008 x IO6 HI (56-120") -0- 50 -0- 14.00 0.002 x IO6
Inhibitory concentration expressed as μg protein/ml which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of
L1210 cells in culture.
Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to
L1210 cells caused a 50% inhibition.
50 ml on column from a total eluate of 420 ml.
22 mg alkaloids obtained from fraction III The protein containing fractions (12-100) with biological activity in L1210 system obtained from Sephadex™ G75 columns (see Table 10) contained a mixture of viscotoxins (1.0 1 9 g) . The fractions (101-140) were combined and extracted with 3 x 200 ml chloroform. The chloroform layer was dried over anhydrous Na2S04 filters and the filtrate was evaporated under vacuum to obtain 201 mg of alkaloids (weights of viscotoxins and alkaloids set forth in Table 10 are adjusted to a total of 325 ml for the unbound fraction obtained from affinity columns) . Thus 1 ml of the 1 percent extract contained 4.9 pg lectins; 72 pg unbound proteins which contains from 10 to 40 pg of viscotoxins; and 14.3 μg alkaloids.
7.4. PREPARATION OF PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE WATER EXTRACT
An extract from Korean mistletoe was prepared by taking a known weight of plant (100 g) and cleaning and crushing it in the presence of double distilled water to form a 40% by weight solution of mistletoe. It is preferred that the plant be cut and the cuttings put in a plastic bag and flash frozen in liquid nitrogen prior to being crushed and combined with the distilled water. The crushing and combination of the frozen material with the distilled water is preferably carried out in a blender for about 2 minutes. The resulting mixture is centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 65 minutes to separate extract from insoluble residue. The residue is twice extracted with known volumes (100 ml) of water to remove all extract and subjected to centrifugation. The supernatants are combined. The resulting extract is stored in the absence of air at room temperature for two weeks. The extract is then sterilized by step filtration as is conventionally known.
The sterile extract is then subjected to a preliminary screening test as previously described to determine if its bioactivity with respect to the L1210 leukemia system is 100 A.U. or more. If the extract passes this test, then it is subjected to the more rigorous tests as described in the prior examples to determine its sugar-binding protein fingerprint. If the protein levels fall within the limits required in accordance with the present invention, then the extract is identified as pharmaceutical grade. Table 11 sets forth the results of testing of an extract prepared as above. As can be seen, the extract has concentration levels and bioactivity values which fall within the standard fingerprint limits which are required for it to be identified as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
TABLE 12
FRACTIONATION OF DIFFERENT BIOLOGICALY ACTIVE
CARBOHYDRATE BINDING PROTEINS FROM VISCUM ALBUM C.
EXTRACT (40%, FrF) (n-T4GEN)
(Affinity Method, Fractionation of Detergent Extract)
Total Total Total
Volume Protein IC50" Activity
Fraction identity (mg/ml) (ml) IC50 a (μg/ml) Units"
Extract (40%, FrF) 90 234 32,500 2.92 x IO6
Affinity columns eluted with corresponding sugars
1. Lactose 8 2.24 208,000 0.001 1.66 x IO6
2. Galactose 11 2.68 68,000 0.0035 0.75 x IO6
3. Melibiose 6.5 0.96 5,600 0.025 0.036 x IO6
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 4.5 0.81 49,000 0.0035 0.22 x IO6
5. Fucose 5 0.33 10,500 0.0056 0.052 x IO6
Sephadex - G75 (Unbound proteins) Fractions0
I (9-35) 1.58 33 52.1 1.25 0.05 x IO6
II (36-55) 1.36 20 27.2 1.70 0.008 x IO6
III (56-120") -0- 50 -0- 14.00 0.002 x 106
Unbound proteins and alkaloids 168 285 1 ,600 1 .25 0.27 x 10*
Dilution factor needed per ml to cause 50% inhibition of L1210 cells in culture.
Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to
L1210 cell will cause a 50% inhibition of the cell growth. 7.5. PREPARATION OF PHARMACEUTICAL GRADE TOTAL EXTRACT OF KOREAN MISTLETOE
An extract of Korean mistletoe was prepared by taking
100 g of mistletoe, freezing it, and powdering it. The frozen powder was then thawed and extracted with 200 ml of cold acetone. The extraction mixture was centrifuged at
10,000 rpm for 60 minutes. The precipitate was washed with two 100 ml aliquots of cold acetone and centrifuged again at
10,000 rpm for 60 minutes. The resulting extract residue is extracted with two 200 ml aliquots of Buffer A (see Example
8) in a blender for 2 minutes each. The two extract aliquots are centrifuged at 10,000 rpm for 60 minutes and the supernatants combined. The extract residue is extracted a final time with an additional 200 ml of Buffer A. After centrifugation, this final extractant is combined with the other two aliquots to form a salt extract which, after removal of salts, is then tested in accordance with the present invention to determine if its sugar-binding protein fingerprint meets the pharmaceutical grade requirements set forth above.
The extract residue remaining after the above extraction with Buffer A may be extracted with a detergent extract - Buffer B (see Example 8) - to form an extract which, after dialysis to remove detergents and salts, also can be tested to determine if it meets the pharmaceutical grade requirements of the present invention.
8. EXAMPLE: EUROPEAN MISTLETOE
An extract of European mistletoe ( Viscum album L . ) was prepared and analyzed according to Example 7 except that only the aqueous salt extract was analyzed for its sugar-binding protein fingerprint. The extract is identified as T4GEN. The results of the fingerprint determination are set forth in Table 12. The T4GEN extract meets the requirement of the established standard fingerprint and therefore qualifies as a pharmaceutical grade extract. Table 13 sets forth the analysis of ISCADOR™ which is a fermented mistletoe extract. This fraction meets some, but not all, of the requirements of the standard fingerprint. For example, the bioactivity of the melibiose and fucose fractions are too low.
Table 14 shows the results of bioactivity assays for the T4GEN and ISCADOR™ extracts where the IC50 is expressed as the dilution factor needed per ml to cause 50% inhibition of L1210 cells in culture. Table 14 is derived from Tables 12 and 13 and shows the general drop in ISCADOR™ activity compared to the unfermented European extract (T4GEN) .
TABLE 13
FRACTIONATION OF BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE CARBOHYDRATE BINDING PROTEINS FROM T-4GEN
(Affinity Method, Fractionation of Salt Extract)
Protein Total Total ICa 50 Total
Content Volume Protein Activityb
(μg
Fraction identity (mg/ml) (ml) (mg) Protein/ml) Units
T4GEN
(10 % , FrF) 0.9 100 90 0.32 4.6 x 105
Affinity columns eluted with
EDTA buffer (Ca+ + dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1 . Lactose 0.236 7 1.652 0.0337 0.49 x 105
2. Galactose 0.040 9 0.360 0.0035 1.00 x 10s
3. Melibiose 0.052 4 0.208 0.0042 0.44 x 105
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. 128 8 1.024 0.080 0.12 x 10s
5. Fucose 0.920 8 0.734 0.050 0.14 x 105
Affinity columns eluted with buffer containing corresponding sugars (Non- Ca+ + dependent sugar-binding proteins)
1 . Lactose 0. 158 1 1 1 .738 0.0079 2.2 x 105
2. Galactose 0.128 10 1.280 0.0156 0.8 x IO3
3. Melibiose 0.200 8 1.600 0.345 0.4 x 105
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0. 140 10 1.140 0.0044 3.2 x 105
5. Fucose 0.148 9 1.332 0.360 0.36 x 105
Inhibitory concentration expressed as μg protein/ml which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of L1210 cells in culture.
Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to L1210 cells caused a 50% cell growth inhibition.
TABLE 14
FRACTIONATION OF BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE CARBOHYDRATE BINDING PROTEINS FROM ISCADOR 'M', (20%)
Protein Total Total " IC- 50 Total
Content Volume Protein Activity"
(μg
Fraction identity (mg/ml) (ml) (mg) Protem/ml) Units
Iscador 'M\ 20% 4.6 12 55 0.25 2.2 x : 105
Fractions from
G-75 column
(21-65) 0.315 65 20.50 0.078 2.6 x : 10s
Affinity columns eluted with
EDTA buffer
1. Lactose 0.203 10 2.08 0.039 0.57 x 10"
2. Galactose 0.064 12 0.70 0.07 0.63 x IO4
3. Melibiose 0.182 12 2.20 0.90 1.20 x IO4
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.048 12 0.50 0.29 0.35 x IO4
5. Fucose 0.151 9 1.36 0.28 0.80 x 10"
Affinity columns eluted with buffer containing corresponding sugars
1. Lactose 0.053 8.5 0.45 0.30 0.15 x 104
2. Galactose 0.080 9 0.70 0.26 0.27 x 10"
3. Melibiose 0.009 7 0.06 0.035 0.17 x IO4
4. N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 0.066 12.5 0.82 0.027 3.00 x 10"
5. Fucose 0.198 10.5 2.07 0.55 0.38 x IO4
Unbound proteins
(after sugar buffer elution) 0.225 50 1 1.25 0.25 4.5 x 10"
Inhibitory concentration expressed as μg protein/ml which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of L1210 cells in culture.
Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to L1210 cells caused a 50% cell growth inhibition.
TABLE 15
EFFECT OF FERMENTATION ON THE BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY
OF CARBOHYDRATE BINDING PROTEINS (LECTINS)
OF VISCUM ALBUM L. (ISCADOR™ 'M')
Protein T4GEN ISCADOR™ % Change
(A U ) (A U ) (±)
(Ca+ +) dependent sugar binding proteins
1 Lactose 0 49 x 10* 0 02 x 10* -95 0
2 Galactose 1 00 x 10* 0 12 x 10* -88 0
3 Melibiose 0 44 x 10* 0 07 x 10* -84 1
4 N-Acetyl-D-gal actosamme 0 12 x 10* 0 01 x 10* -97 1
5 Fucose 0 12 x 10* 0 02 x 10* -85 7
(Non-Ca+ + dependent sugar- binding proteins)
1 Lactose 2 20 x 10* 0 20 x 10* -91 0
2 Galactose 0 80 x 10* 0 02 x 10* -97 5 3. Melibiose 0 40 x 10* 0 06 x 10* -85 0
4 N-Acetyl-D-galactosamine 3 20 x 10* 0 72 x 10* -77 5
5 Fucose 0 36 x 10* 0.01 x 10* -97 3
ISCADOR™ 'M', 20% and T4GEN (10%) were used as examples of fermented and unfermented mistletoe clinical preparations Activity is described as total activity units as described elsewhere
9. EXAMPLE: ST. JOHN'S Wort, Hypericum perforation 9.1. PLANT SOURCE/EXTRACTION METHOD:
There are many sources and many forms of St. John's Wort. It may be dried (stem, leaf, flowers, buds) . It may also be in the form of a powdered extract. It may be freeze- dried. An oil extract of the crushed flowers may be prepared. Various forms of infusions (aqueous) , oil macerates, or alcohol water extractions are available. The methods of processing and extracting St. John's Wort are discussed in the detailed description of the invention above.
9.2. COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are many commercial suppliers of St. John's Wort and extracts of St. John's Wort, including the following listing: Jarsin™, Jarsm™ 300 (LI160) (Lichtwer Pharma GmbH, Berlin) , Psychotonm™ M, Psychotonm™ forte (Hersteller, Darmstadt) , Hyperforat™, Extract™ Z 90017, Neuroplant™, Neuropas™, Esbericum™, Remotiv™ (Bayer, Germany) and Sedaristan™. The following companies also produce St. John's Wort commercially: PhytoPharmica, Nature's Way, Herbal 5 Choice, Botalia Gold and Herb Pharm.
There iε one commercially available hypericin product called VIMRxyn™ available from VIMRx Pharmaceuticals™.
9.3 CLINICAL STUDIES
10 St. John's Wort has been the subject many clinical studies on the extract and the botanical itself. The major clinical indication is the alleviation of mild to moderate depression. Other clinical indications include AIDS, antibacterial uses, anticancer uses, antimutagenic uses,
15 antiviral uses, use as an immunostimulant and use for immunosuppression. These will be discussed in greater detail in the sections that follow.
9.3.1. MILD-TO-MODERATE DEPRESSION
20 St. John's Wort has become increasingly popular in Germany where physicians routinely prescribe herbal medicines. In 1994, 66 million daily doses of St. John's Wort were prescribed there for use in the treatment of depression (De Smet and Nolen, 1996, Bri tish Medical Journal
25 313 :241-247) . This phytomedicine has now been tested in more than 3,000 patients against placebo and various active medications (Hansgen et al . , 1994, Nervenheilkunde 12 :285- 289; Harrer et al . , 1994, J. Geria tric Psychia try Neurology 2:S24-28; Hύbner et al . , 1994, J. Geriatric Psychia try
30 Neurology 2=S12-14 ; Martinez et al . , 1994, J. Geria tri c Psychia try Neurology 2=S29-33; Sommer and Harrer, 1994, J. Geria tric Psychia try Neurology 2:S9-11; Vorbach et al . , 1994, J. Geria tric Psychia try Neurology 2:S19-23; Woelk et al . , 1994, J. Geria tric Psychia try Neurology 2:S34-38) . The
35 primary formulations used in the German clinical trials are summarized in Table 15. All these formulations are standardized according to hypericin content . TABLE 15 : Description of the Primary St . John' s Wort Preparations Used in the Depression Studies
Figure imgf000089_0001
♦Also contains valerian extract 5
German researchers (with a colleague from San Antonio, Texas) recently published a meta-analysis of 23 randomized trials of St. John's Wort with a total of 1,757 outpatients with mild to moderately severe depressive disorders. They 0 concluded that the herb was significantly superior to placebo, and appeared comparably effective to standard antidepressants while producing fewer side effects (Linde, 1996, Bri tish Medical Journal 313:253-258) .
The controlled studies of St. John's Wort's efficacy in 5 depression included in the meta-analysis were randomized, or "quasi-randomized" through alternation. Comparisons were made of the herb alone, or in combination with other plant extracts, to placebo and/or a standard antidepressant. Twenty of the 23 trials were double-blind, one was single 0 blind, and two were open label. Most were 4 to 8 weeks in duration. The methodological quality of each study was assessed by at least two reviewers to determine eligibility for inclusion in the meta-analysis.
In each study, improvement in depressive symptoms had 5 been evaluated with depression scales with interrater reliability, most commonly the Hamilton depression scale (HAM-D) and the clinical global impressions index (CGI) . The daily dose of either hypericin, the reference substance for standardization, or of total extract varied considerably between studies, from 0.4, 2.7 mg and 300 and 1000 mg, respectively. In 13 studies comparing a single St. John's Wort preparation with placebo, 55.1 percent (225) patients receiving the herb were improved, compared with 22.3 percent (94) responding to the placebo. In the comparisons to standard antidepressants, in three trials with single preparations and two with combinations, 63.9 percent (101) patients responded to single preparations compared with 58.5 percent (93) with standard antidepressants, and 67.7 percent (88) responded to combination extract products (St. John's Wort and Valeriana) compared with 50 percent (66) with standard antidepressants.
The researchers acknowledged the problems in drawing valid conclusions from the pooled data of quite heterogeneous studies. These problems are compounded by the different amounts and preparations of the herb used across the studies and the possibility that hypericin is not the only bioactive component.
These limitations aside, Linde and colleagues find sufficient evidence to conclude that St. John's Wort is better than placebo in treating some depressive disorders. These data were inadequate, however, to judge whether it is as effective as standard antidepressants, although it appears to cause fewer side effects. They consider that these initial indications of efficacy warrant the undertaking of longer controlled trials comparing several doses of different St. John's Wort preparations to standard antidepressants.
In separate commentary accompanying the meta-analysis, Netherlands researchers Peter De Smet and Willen Nolen agreed that these data are promising, but not yet sufficient to accept St. John's Wort as an effective antidepressant preparation (De Smet and Nolen, 1996, Bri tish Medical Journal 3_1_3:241-247) . Besides the need for dose standardization and adequate trial lengths, they call for studies in severely depressed patients and long-term studies to assess the risk of relapse and emergence of late side effects (De Smet and Nolen, supra ) .
In another single blind study of patients with Seasonal Affective Disorder (DSM-III-R criteria) it was observed that 900 mg of St. John's Wort daily was equal to the effects of conventional light therapy (Kapser et al . , 1996, 2nd International Congress on Phytomedicine, Munich) .
Animal Studies
A commercial standardized extract of St. John's Wort (Psychotonin™) was tested in several animal models predictive of psychotropic activity (Okpanyi and Weicher, 1987, Arzneim- Forsch 32:10-13) . These activities included two used for antidepressants: increased activity in a water wheel test in mice, and reduced aggressiveness in isolated male mice.
In a recent presentation, Butterweck et al . , compared the St. John's Wort extract, LI 160, with bupropion, a synthetic antidepressant (Butterweck et al . 2nd International Congress on Phytomedicine. Munich; 1996) . The authors found that both drugs resulted in similar effects including the tail suspension test (mice) and the forced swim test (rats) . Since St. John's Wort treatment was antagonized by drugs known to reduce dopamine functional activity (haloperidol, sulpiride, χ-methyltyrosine, and γ-butyrolactone) , the authors concluded that St. John's Wort exerts its activity via dopaminergic activation. Studies on various fractions of the methanol extract revealed that different constituents were responsible for the various activities. A hepatoprotective activity of a water/alcohol extract has been reported in mice at a dose of 500 mg/kg intraperitoneally (Ozturk, et al . , 1992) . This conclusion was based on the ability of St. John's Wort to increase bile duct flow in rats and to reduce CC14-induced narcosis in barbiturate treated mice. Mϋller et al . , (1996) reported that the St. John's Wort extract, LI 160, resulted in a 15% down-regulation of β-adrenergic receptors in the rat frontal cortex after subchronic treatment (250 mg/kg for 2 weeks) . In the same study, these authors found a 25% down-regulation after similar doses (10 times the clinical dose) of imipramine .
9.3.2. ANTIVIRAL ACTIVITY Hypericin is currently in early clinical trials in the U.S. as an antiviral (Bombardelli and Morazzoni, 1995; Meruelo et al . , 1988) . Studies have shown that two of St. John's Wort's primary components, hypericin and pseudohypericin, inhibit a variety of encapsulated viruses, including herpes simplex (Weber et al . , 1994) and the human immunodeficiency virus type 1 (HIV-1) virus associated with AIDS (Lavie et al . , 1989; Lopez-Bassocchi et al . , 1991; Meruelo et al . , 1988) . While the latter researchers have concluded that hypericin and pseudohypericin display a unique and uncommonly effective antiviral activity, Weber et al . , (1994) suggest that it may be due to nonspecific association with cellular and viral membranes. Activity has also been reported against murine cytomegalovirus, Sindbis virus,
(Hudson et al, 1991; Lopez-Bazzocchi et al . , 1991) and equine infectious anemia virus (Carpenter and Kraus, 1991) .
The antiviral activity appears to involve a photoactivation process (Carpenter and Kraus, 1991; Degar et al . , 1993; Kraus et al . , 1990; Lopez-Bazzocchi et al . , 1991) which forms singlet oxygen and inactivates viral fusion and syncytia formation (Lenard et al . , 1993; Thomas et al . , 1992; Yip et al . , 1996) . While hypericin does show antiviral activity in vivo (mice) these photodynamic properties may limit the potential usefulness as an antiretroviral agent (Stevenson and Lenard, 1993) . However, besides singlet oxygen production, hypericin can photo reduce oxygen to superoxide radicals and can form semiquinone radicals in the absence of light (Lavie et al . , 1995) . These later authors speculate that this ability to form semiquinones might account for the antiviral activity in the whole animals and they have maintained (since the early 1980' s) the clinical utility of hypericin. Hypericin has been reported to inhibit the growth of glioma cells in tissue culture (Couldwell et al . , 1994) . There appears to be a photoactivation involved in its antineoplastic effect as well (Andreoni et al . , 1994) . Hypericin and pseudohypericin have been found to inhibit the important regulatory enzyme, protein kinase C (IC5P of 1.7 μg/ml and 15 μg/ml, respectively) (Takahashi et al . , 1989) . Receptor tyrosine kinase activity of epidermal growth factor is also inhibited by hypericin (de Witte et al . , 1993) . These later effects have been linked to both the antiviral and antineoplastic activities (Lavie et al . , 1995; Panossian et al. , 1996) .
9.3.3. WOUND-HEALING EFFECTS St. John's Wort has historically been one of the most relied upon botanicals for the treatment of wounds. Part of this activity is due to St. John's Wort's anti-microbial activity which is attributed to the essential oil. Flavonoids, the phloroglucinol derivatives hyperforin and adhyperforin, and the xanthone kielcorin are also considered to contribute to St. John's Wort's wound-healing effects.
The essential oil and the water soluble fraction of an alcoholic extract exhibit minor antifungal and significant antibacterial activity. The tannins and flavonoids inactivated E. coli . At dilutions of 1:400 or 1:200 (Khosa and Bhatia, 1982; Shakirova et al . , 1970) . Hyperforin and adhyperforin have been reported to possess an antibiotic effect greater than that of sulfonilamide (Negrash and Pochinok, 1972) . A burn ointment prepared by extracting 5 g of fresh flowers with 100 g of olive oil for 10 days at 20 'C was used in the treatment of 1st, 2nd and 3rd degree burns. First degree burns .heal in 48 hours. Second and third degree burns healed without scarring ≥3 times as rapidly as burns treated with conventional methods. Keloid formation was inhibited (Saljic, 1975) . A commercial preparation (Novoimamine; containing 0.412% quercetin) was found to be effective against Staphyloccus aureus infection (Negrash and Pochinok, 1972) . In this regard, its effects have similarly been reported to be greater than conventional treatment with sulfonilamide (Aizenman, 1969) . A homeopathic tincture (1:10) of St. John's Wort was studied for its wound-healing properties, and compared with Calendula officinalis, another widely used wound-healing herb. The effect of orally administered tincture of St. John's Wort was more pronounced than topical application of Cal endula tincture in the healing of incision, excision and dead space wounds as evidenced by an increase in epithelization, and wound breaking strength (Gurumadhva et al., 1991) . [See Table 16]
TABLE 16
Effects of the Tinctures of St. John's Wort and Calendula on Wound-Healing
Figure imgf000094_0001
=7, *P<0.001 (Gurumadhva et al., 1991 )
9.3.4 MISCELLANEOUS EFFECTS
St. John's Wort has been reported to be useful in a number of additional conditions. In one study the procyanidin (PC) fraction of St. John's Wort was tested in an isolated Guinea pig heart preparation (Melzer, et al . , 1989) and found to enhance coronary flow in the same way as the procyanidins from Cra taegus (Hawthorn) . The same researchers tested the procyanidin fractions in porcine isolated coronary arteries. All PC fractions antagonized histamine or prostaglandin F2 alpha-induced arterial contractions (Melzer, et al . , 1991) . In another study, preliminary findings suggest that St. John's Wort may be useful in the treatment of chronic tension headaches (Heinze and Gόbel, 1996) .
9.4. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS ON A SILICA GEL COLUMN
The fractionation of alcoholic St. John's Wort tincture was performed using normal phase column chromatography. This method was selected as a preferable pre-chromatographic technique on the basis of observed excellent mass recovery (>90%) , the separation of the selected standards (flavonoids: mangiferin, rutin, hyperoside, quercitrin, quercitin; hypericin) , as well as separation of the other co-ocurring components. A detailed description of the materials and methods utilized is described below.
The chemical markers for St. John's Wort were chosen using the following procedure. A comprehensive search of the literature on St. John's Wort (Hypericum perforatum) indicated the hypericins, as well as some of the major flavonoids (rutin, quercetin, quercitrin) , as the components with the most consistent bioactivity in a number of assays [flavonoids: analgesic (Vasil' chenko, 1986), sedative (Berghofer, 1987) , MAO activity (Kitanov, 1987) ; hypericin: antiviral (Bystrov, 1975) , antidepressant & anxiolytic (Duke, 1992) ] support of the common uses in Europe for treating infections and depression. This was determined in the following by different groups either by biotesting individual components or the compound class enriched fractions, which contains the bulk of the hypericins and flavonoids.
Herb Materials: an alcoholic tincture of St. John's Wort (Hypericum perforatum) raw material was purchased from a commercial source.
Prep-CC Method: Approximately 14 ml of the commercial alcoholic tincture was evaporated to dryness overnight to yield 640 mg of residue. The resultant extract was triturated with four parts of Si02 (silica gel) and was layered onto a preparative open glass column prepacked with 30 g of Si02. The CC (column chromatography) conditions were as follows: column-Si02; flow rate 133 ml/hr; five fractions (200 ml) were collected with the following elution profile using: CHCl3/MeOH 8:2 (two fractions made up of distinctly colored bands) ; CHCl3/MeOH 7:3, CHCl^/MeOH 1:1 and 100% MeOH.
The liquid extract (SJ041, 14 ml) was evaporated to dryness under vacuum to yield 0.64 g of residue. The dried residue was triturated (intimately mixed) with four parts of Silica gel and sifted on top of a glass column pre-packed with 30 g of Silica gel in chloroform. Development of the column over a six-hour period was accomplished by step gradient using chloroform: methanol. In the elution procesε, 200 ml of solvent volume was employed for each step, with the ratio being changed from 8:2, 7:3, 1:1, and finally 100% methanol. Fractions 1 and 2, consisting of two distinctive colored bands, were obtained from the ratio 8:2 CHCl3:MeOH eluent. The other fractions represent the eluates from each subsequent gradient elution. The collected fractions were evaporated to dryness under vacuum and their yield given below:
Figure imgf000096_0001
TLC Analysis :
The TLC chromatogram showed a text-book separation of the five fractions listed above. Reference standards of contained phytochemicals were not co-chromatographed. The chemical content of the fractional analysis is shown in FIG, 10. 9.5. BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS MONOAMINE
OXIDASE, SEROTONIN TRANSPORTER ASSAY, OTHER ASSAYS
9.5.1. MONOAMINE OXIDASE-A (MAO-A)
Monoamine oxidase (MAO, E.C.I.4.3.4) is a much less discriminating enzyme, in that it will catalyze the removal of an amine group from a variety of substrates, including endogenous substances (norepinephrine, epinephrine, dopamine, tyramine, 5-hydroxytryptamine) and many drugs that are amines. MAO functions as an important protective mechanism against exogenous, biologically active amines. There are at least two types of MAO, which display dissimilar preferences for substrates and differential sensitivities to selective inhibitors; these were originally defined by sensitivity to clorgyline and preference for 5-HT (MAO-A) , and sensitivity to selegiline (deprenyl) and preference for phenylethylamine (MAO-B) . The two types of MAO appear to be distinct molecular entities that exist in various proportions in different tissues. The MAO inhibitors currently in therapeutic use are relatively nonselective, but selective inhibitors may offer advantages in certain clinical settings.
Only selective inhibitors of MAO-A (e.g. clorgyline) appear to have efficacy in the treatment of major depression, and a selective MAO-B inhibitor may have a beneficial effect on
Parkinson's disease and dyskinesia.
MAOA enzyme activity is assayed in a mitochondrial fraction isolated from rat brain by differential centrifugation. 40 μg membrane protein in 20 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) is mixed with test compound, and the reaction is started by the addition of 95 μM [3H] serotonin (2-10 mCi/mmol) . Following 20 minutes incubation at 37°C, the reaction is terminated by the addition of 5% HCl. The radioactivity of [3H] serotonin in an extraction is determined.
Compounds are screened at 10 μM. (Medvedev et al . , 1994,
Biochem . Pharmacol . 4J7: 303-308) . Inhibition of Monoamine Oxidase A Activity
Compound IC (μM)
Tetrindole Mesylate 0.046 Pirlindole Mesylate 0.016 *Clorgyline 0.00089
* Standard reference compound
The results of the monoaminooxidase A assay are
10 described in the summary tables below.
9.5.2. MONOAMINE OXIDASE B
Monoamine oxidase (MAO, E.C.I.4.3.4) is not a very
15 discriminating enzyme and will catalyze the removal of an amine group from a variety of substrates, including endogenous substances (norepinephrine, epinephrine, dopamine, tyramine, 5-hydroxytryptamine) and many drugs that are amines. MAO functions as an important protective mechanism
20 against exogenous, biologically active amines. There are at least two types of MAO, which display dissimilar preferences for substrates and differential sensitivities to selective inhibitors; there were originally defined by sensitivity to clorgyline and preference for 5-HT (MAO-A) , and sensitivity
25 to selegiline (deprenyl) and preference for phenylethylamme (MAO-B) . The two types of MAO appear to be distinct molecular entities that exist in various proportions in different tissues. The MAO inhibitors currently in therapeutic use are relatively nonselective, but selective
30 inhibitors may offer advantages in certain clinical settings. Only selective inhibitors of MAO-A ( e . g. , clorgyline) appear to have efficacy in the treatment of major depression, and a selective MAO-B inhibitor may have beneficial effect on Parkinson's disease and dyskinesia.
" MAO-B enzyme activity was assayed in a mitochondrial fraction isolated from rat liver by differential centrifugation. 40 μg membrane protein in 20 mM phosphate buffer (pH 7.4) was mixed with test compound, and the reaction was started by the addition of 140 μM [3H] dopamine (2-10 mCi/mmol) . Following 20 minutes incubation at 37°C, the reaction was terminated by the addition of 5% HCl. The radioactivity of [3H] dopamine in an extraction was determined. Compounds were screened at 10 μM (Egashira et al . 1976, Biochem. Pharmacol . 23 : 2583-2586) .
The following reference compounds were used for the inhibition of monoamine oxidase B: reference compounds, (ICS0 (μM) ) ; N- (2-aminoethyl) -4-chlorobenzamide hydrochloride, (23) ; N- (2-aminoethyl) -3-iodobenzamide hydrochloride, (1.7) ; and clorgyline, (0.0027) .
9.5.3. SEROTONIN TRANSPORTER ASSAY
This assay measured binding of [12SI] RTI-121 to presynaptic sites associated with the uptake of serotonin. Cerebral cortical membranes of male Wistar derived rats weighing 175 + 25 g were prepared in modified Tris-HCl pH 7.4 buffer using standard techniques. A 5 mg aliquot of membrane was incubated with 10 pM [125I] RTI-121 for 90 minutes at 25°C. Non-specific binding was estimated in the presence of 100 μM clomipramine. Membranes were filtered and washed 3 times and the filters were counted to determine [125I]RTI-121 specifically bound. Compounds are screened at 10 μM (Boja et al. 1992, Synapse 12:27-36) .
Assay Reference Data: Kd 1.1 nM
Bmax: 322 fmol/mg protein
Specific Binding: 85%
Reference Data:
Compound ICS0 (nM) Ki (nM) nH
Clomipramine 1,100 1,100 0.5 Quipazine maleate 560 550 0.8 6-NO-Quipazine 3,400 3,r400 0..7
Trazodone 5,500 5, ,400 0. .8
Mianserin 6.4 2. .1 1. .0
The results for the MAO-B and the serotonin transporter assay are described in the summary table below.
- 9i St. John's Wort Extract-Biological Assay Results
Standard/Extract/Fraction MAO 5-HT Reuptake
Hypericin Negative 4 μM 5
Hyperoside Negative Negative
Rutin Negative Negative
Quercetin 1.9 μM Negative 0 Quecetrin Negative Negative
Magniferin Negative Negative
Extract #1 Negative Negative
Extract #2 Negative Negative 5
Fraction 1 Negative Negative
Fraction 2 Negative Negative
Fraction 3 Negative Negative 0 Fraction 4 Negative Negative
Fraction 5 Negative Negative
5 The biological assays verified the MAO-A activity of quercetin and the serotonin uptake activity of hypericin. However, neither the extracts (FIG. 11) nor the fractions (FIG. 10) contained sufficient quantities of either standard (quercetin, hypericin) to detect the two bioactivities. Q Therefore it was not possible to calculate the percent contribution of each of these components.
9.5.4. OTHER IN VITRO STUDIES
While previous studies report that hypericin inhibits 5
MAO at concentrations of 50 g/ml ( e . g . , Suzuki et al . , 1984,
Planta Medica . 5_0 :272-274) , others have failed to confirm this effect (Bladt and Wagner, 1994, J. Geria tri c Psychia try Neurology 1_ :S57-59; Demisch et al . , 1989, Pharmacopεychia try 2/2 : 194; Thiede and Walper, 1994, J. Geria tric Psychia try Neurology 1_ :S54-56) . One explanation is that the hypericin 5 used by Suzuki was apparently an extract of only 80% purity. It is possible that one or more constituents of the remaining 20% of this preparation could account for this weak enzyme inhibition. This possibility is supported by Bladt and Wagner (1994) which shows that the St. John's Wort fractions
10 with the greatest MAO inhibition contain the highest concentration of flavonoids. Computer modeling of St. John's Wort constituents also suggests flavonoids to be the most likely MAO inhibitor fraction (Hόltje and Walper, 1993, Nervenheilkunde 2=2. -339-340) ; and in a related species
15 (Hypericum brasil iense) the xanthone fraction was most active, particularly against MAO-A (Rocha et al . , 1994, Phytochemistry 3jS) .
However, the MAO inhibition shown for St. John's Wort may not be pharmacologically relevant, since it could not be
^° confirmed in vivo . Bladt and Wagner (1994) reported that no MAO inhibition was seen ex vivo after administration of 300 mg/kg St. John's Wort extract to rats. Whether this is due to a rapid metabolism of the active constituents or to other reasons cannot be said with certainty at this point.
^ However, pharmacokinetic studies with the St. John's Wort extract, LI 160, showed plasma levels of only 1.5 ng/m of hypericin after a single 300 mg dose and 8.5 ng/ml at steady state in human volunteers (Staffeldt et al . , 1994, J. Geriatri c Psychia try Neurology 7.=S47-53) • Unless the active
3 compounds are present in much larger quantities than hypericin, or are concentrated in synaptic terminals, these blood levels are several orders of magnitude below the concentrations needed to inhibit MAO. Inhibition of another degradative catecholamine enzyme, catechol-o-
35 methyltransferase (COMT) , can also be seen with various ethanolic St. John's Wort fractions at super-physiologic concentrations of up to 500 μg/ml (Thiede and Walper, 1994) .
Other proposed mechanisms involve effects on serotonin. Mϋller and Rossel (1994) report that St. John's Wort extract inhibits serotonin receptor expression at 50 μM (-25 μg/ml (according to the way these authors use the term "molarity" when referring to a crude extract) and Perovic and Mϋller (1995) reported inhibition of serotonin uptake (IC50 = 6.2 μg/ml) (Mϋller and Rossel, 1994, J". Geriatric Psychia try Neurology 7.=S63-64; Perovic and Mϋller, 1995, Arzneim-Forsch 4_5:1145-1148) . The concentration required for the former effect could surely never be achieved in the whole animal and even the latter concentration seems unlikely. As a reference comparison, Mϋller et al . reported an IC50 for the synthetic antidepressant, clomipramine, of 0.9 nM (-0.3 ng/ml) for serotonin uptake inhibition (Mϋller et al . , 1996, 2nd International Congress on Phytomedicine, Munich; 1996) . In addition, Mϋller et al . also reported an inhibition of both synaptosomal GABA uptake (IC50 = 1 μg/ml LI 160) and GABAA- receptor binding (IC50 = 3 μg/ml) .
Another novel proposal is that St. John's Wort extract (concentration not provided) reduces cytokine expression [interleukin-6] (Thiele et al. , 1994, J". Geria tric Psychia try Neurology 7.(suppl . l) :S60-62) . The hypothesis is that; interleukins can reduce depression in susceptible individuals (Smith, 1991, Med. Hypotheses 3.5:298-306) . The field of psychoneuroimmunology is perhaps too new to give a definitive answer regarding this mechanism in the near future, but the link between depression and the immune system is still drawing attention (Kook, et al . , 1995, Biol . Psychia try 37:817-819) .
Through an NIMH screening contract (NovaScreen™, Baltimore, Maryland) a commercially available crude extract from the fresh flowers and buds of Hyperi cum perfora tum
[1:1.5; hydro-alcohol (40:60) made from flowering tops; Herb Pharm™] containing -0.1% hypericin was dried under vacuum, dissolved in 4% DMSO, and diluted to an initial concentration of 5 g/ml for in vi tro assay in a battery of 39 receptor types, and two enzyme systems. The receptor assay showing at least 50% displacement of radioligand (or 50% inhibition of MAO) were considered "hits." Concentration-responsive curves (IC50) were then performed for the hits. The results are shown in Table 17.
TABLE 17 NiMH/Nova Screen Receptor Binding/Enzyme Activity Assays Performed with St. John's Wort
Extract (Herb Pharm)
Figure imgf000104_0001
The crude extract of St. John's Wort had significant receptor affinity for adenosine, GABAA, GABAB, benzodiazepine, inositol triphosphate (IP3/) and monoamine oxidase (MAO-A, MAO-B) . The inhibition of MAO by crude St. John's Wort extracts is consistent with previous reports (Bladt and
Wagner, 1994; Suzuki et al . , 1984, Planta Medica . 50 :272-27'4; Thiede and Walper, 1994) . The results are shown in Table 18. TABLE 18
Figure imgf000105_0001
*KX = IC50/1 + ligand affinity/ligand concentration
Unlike the crude extract, however, synthetic hypericin (95%) lacked significant MAO-A or MAO-B inhibition at concentrations up to 0.1 mM (Table 18) . Hypericin had affinity only for NMDA receptors (Ki ~ 1 M) and this may play a role in its reported antiviral activity since NMDA antagonists prevent gp 120-induced neurotoxicity (Diop et al . , 1994, Neuroscience Letters 165 :187-190) .
TABLE 19 Receptor Binding/Enzyme Inhibition by Hypericin
Figure imgf000105_0002
These data are consistent with recent pharmacologic evidence suggesting that other constituents of this plant may be more important for the reported psychotherapeutic activity. Some of these results have been previously reported (Cott, 1995, Psychopharm . Bull etin 11:131-137; Cott, 1996, Psychopharm . Bul letin 3J1: 745-751) . With the exception of GABAA and GABAB, the concentrations of St. John's Wort extract required for these in vi tro activities may not be attained after oral administration in whole animals or humans. It is conceivable that the very high affinity of St. John's Wort extract for GABA receptors presented here may be important. Unless the responsible components are metabolized before they enter the general circulation, plasma levels sufficient to bind GABA receptors would be predicted. It should be noted that Mϋller, et al . , (1996) reported an IC50 of 3 μg/ml for GABAA. The reason for this difference with the present finding is unknown.
The significance of this GABA binding is unknown at the present, but there is considerable literature on the role of GABA in affective disorders. GABAB stimulation has been found to enhance receptor down regulation during imipramine treatment (Enna, et al . , 1986, in Bartholini et al . eds. GABA and Mood Disorders : Experimental and Clinical Research : Raven Press: New York, NY, 1986:23-49) . Nielsen, et al . have reported antidepressant effects with the GABA-ergic agent, fengabine, in depressed outpatients (Nielsen et al . 1990, Acta Psychia trica Scandinavica J3_2_: 366-371) . Petty et al . have reported that GABA plasma levels are low in both bipolar and unipolar depression, and that benzodiazepines (which enhance GABAA activity) may be effective antidepressants as well as anxiolytics (Petty et al . , 1992, Biological Psychia try 32:354-363; Petty et al . , 1993, Neuropsychopharma col ogy ,9:125-132 ; Petty et al . , 1995, Biologi cal Psychiatry 38:578-591) . GABA neuronal systems also modulate dopamine and dopamine-induced behaviors (Cott, et al . , 1976, Naunyn Schmiedebergs Arch . Pharmacol . 295 : 203- 209; Cott and Engel , 1977, J". Neural Transm . 40 =253-268) .
9.6. ACTIVE COMPONENTS OF ST. JOHN'S WORT IN THE LITERATURE
St. John's Wort contains numerous compounds with documented biological activity. Most researchers consider its effects to be due to a variety of constituents rather than any single component. Constituents that have stimulated the most interest include the naphthodianthrones, hypericin and pseudohypericin and a broad range of flavonoids including quercetin, quercitrin, amentoflavone and hyperin. Both classes of compounds are reported to contribute to its antidepressant and antiviral activity. The phloroglucinols, hyperforin and adhyperforin, the essential oil, flavonoids and xanthones all contribute to St. John's Wort's wound- healing properties.
9.6.1. ST. JOHN'S WORT COMPONENTS
The major active components of St. John's Wort are naphthodianthrone derivatives (<0.1-0.15%) (Deutscher Arzneimittel-Codex. 3rd Supplement 91 ed. 1986) ; hypericin [0.02-1.8%] (Benigni et al . , Hypericum, Piante Medicinali: Chimica, Farmacoloαia e Terapia. Inverni & Delia Beffa, Milano, 1971.) , pseudohypericin, isohypericin, emodin- anthrone. In fresh material protohypericin and protopseudohypericin are also present. These biosynthetic precursors are transformed into hypericin and pseudohypericin by exposure to light. Cyclopseudohypericin is also cited and is an oxidation product of pseudohypericin (ESCOP, 1996, Monograph St. John's wort. European Scientific Cooperative for Phytomedicines) . 9.6.2. HYPERICIN CONTENT OF ST. JOHN'S WORT
The highest concentrations of hypericin have been observed in the dried flowers (Benigni, 1971) followed by the capsules and uppermost leaves (Benigni, 1971; Southwell and Campbell, 1991, Phγtochemis trγ 30:475-478) . Narrow-leafed varieties which have a relatively high number of oil glands [6.2 per mm] are reported to yield significantly higher concentrations of hypericin than broad-leafed varieties [2.2 oil glands per mm] (Southwell and Campbell, 1991) .
Hypericin content in various parts of H. perforatum in g%
Figure imgf000108_0001
(Benigni et al . , 1971; List and Hόrhammer, 1993)
Hypericin content in parts per million (Benigni et al. , 1971)
Figure imgf000108_0002
(Benigni et al . , 1971; Southwell and Campbell, 1991!
9.6.3. FLAVONOID CONTENT OF ST. JOHN'S WORT t- Of 223 species of plants tested for flavonoid content, the flowers of Hypericum perfora tum were the highest at 11.7% (Tsitsina, 1969, Tr. Bot . Sadov. Akad . Nauk . Kaz . , 111-114) . Among the biflavonoids, the proanthocyanidins consisting of dimers, trimers, tetramers and high polymers represent 12% of
10 the dried weight of the aerial portion of the plant. These include the following flavonols; kaempferol, luteolin, myricetin, quercetin (2%) ; flavone glycosides; quercitrin (0.524-0.3%) , isoquercitrin [0.3%] (Dorossiev, 1985, Pharmazie 585-586; Koget, 1972, Khimiya Prirodnykh Soedinea
15 242-243) , hyperin [0.7-1.1% hyperoside] (List and Hδrhammer, 1993), 13', II8-biapigenin [0.1-0.5%] (Berghόfer and Hδlzl, 1987, Planta Medica 216-219; List and Hόrhammer, 1993) amentoflavone, 13', II8-biapigenin (0.01-0.05% in flowers) , rutin [0.3%] (Akhtardzhiev et al . , 1984, Farma tsiya (Sophia)
20 11:1-6; Berghόfer and Hδlzl, 1989, Planta Medica . 91; Kitanov, 1987, Khimiya Prirodnykh Soedinenii 2:185-203) , gentistic acid, leucocyanidin (Benigni et al . , 1971) .
25
30
Figure imgf000109_0001
(Benigni et al . , 1971)
35 Flavonoid and procyanidin concentrations have been reported to be highest in the flowers during budding stage immediately before flowering (11.71%) , followed by the leaves and stems (7.4%) . Flavonoid concentrations are also reported to be highest in plants growing in higher altitudes and those growing on Northern slopes where the weight of the plant is lower than plants growing in Southern exposure (Brantner et 5 al . , 1994, Scientia Pharmaceu ti ca £2:261-276; Tsitsina, 1969; Zhebeleva, 1973, Rast . Resur. .9:402-404) . The highest concentration of 13', II8-biapigenin occurs in buds and flowers, the fruit has very low concentrations and the stems and leaves no trace (Berghόfer and Hδlzl, 1987) . Hyperin is 0 highest in the flowers (3%) followed by the leaves (1.05- 1.80%) and only traces in the stems [0.13%] (Maksyutina and Koget, 1971, Khimiya Prirodnykh Soedinenii , 2:363-367) . Quercetin is found in the leaves and flowers (0.1-0.582%) with trace amounts in green leaves, higher amounts in red 5 colored leaves, the highest amount in the leaves during flowering, and still higher amounts in the flowering tops. Rutin is found in all parts but is much higher in the leaves (2%) during the budding stage than in the flowers (0.095%) , is higher in plants growing in dry vs. those growing in moist 0 conditions, and is reported to be highest when harvested in the evening.
Sun-macerated preparations yield higher amounts of rutin than preparations macerated in the dark (Benigni et al . , 1971) . In one analysis of fresh material quercetin was found ^ to be higher in the top half of the plant than in the leaves only or flowering tops only (Smith et al . , 1996, Quality Validation Laboratory - Herb Pharm™:Williams, OR, 1996) .
0
5
Figure imgf000111_0001
(Akhtardzhiev et al . , 1984; Benigni et al . , 1971; Berghόfer and Hδlzl, 1989; Brantner et al . , 1994; Dorossiev, 1985; Kitanov, 1987; Koget, 1972; List and Hόrhammer, 1993; Smith et al . , 1996; Tsitsina, 1969)
9.6.4 ESSENTIAL OIL FROM ST. JOHN'S WORT
The essential oil consists predominantly of monoterpenes (pinenes) and sesquiterpenes and constitutes 0.1-1% (Benigni, 1971; ESCOP, 1996) . The primary compounds include the saturated hydrocarbons methyl-2-octane (16.4%) and α-pinene (10.6%) ; also present are traces of methyl-2-decane, methyl- 2-butenol and undecane, ot- and /3-pinene, α terpineol, geraniol, traces of myrcene, limonene, caryophyllene, humulene, C16 and C24 n-alkanes, C24, C26 and C28 n-alkanols (Brondz and Greibrokk, 1983, Journal of Na tural Products 4_6: 940-941; Brondz et al . , 1983, Phytochemistrγ 22:295-296; Mathis and Ourisson, 1964, Phytochemi s try 3.: 37-378) . Essential oil content in the stem is very small, and is greater in the mature capsule. It is also richer before flowering (0.26%) than when in flower (0.11%) . When the stem is eliminated the plant yields an average of 0.35% essential 5 oil (Benigni et al . , 1971) .
9.6.5. PHLOROGLUCINOLS IN ST. JOHN'S WORT
Hyperforin (prenylated derivative of phloroglucinol) , 10 adhyperforin (similar to the bitter principle of hops, adhumulone) . Hyperforin and adhyperforin levels increase considerably during the formation of the fruits with hyperforin increasing from 2.0% in the flowers to 4.5% in the fruits based on dry weight, and polar hyperforin-like 15 compounds increasing from 0.05-0.3%. Adhyperforin increased 10-fold from 0.2% in the flowers to 1.9% in the capsules (Benigni et al . , 1971; Brondz et al . , 1982, Tetrahedron Letters 23.: 1299-1300; Bystrov, 1975, Tetrahedron Letters 32:2791-2794; Maisenbacher and Kovar, 1992, Planta Medica 20 291-293) . The hyperforins are lipophilic and unstable when exposed to heat and light .
9.6.6. MISCELLANEOUS COMPOUNDS IN ST. JOHN'S WORT
Choline, carotenoids (lutein, violaxanthin, cis- 25 throllixanthin, throllichromone) , beta-sitosterol, pectin, phlobaphene and rhodan; caffeic (0.1%) , chlorogenic, isovalerianic, lauric, myristic, nicotinic (0.12% in leaves) , palmitic and stearic acids; amino acids including cysteine,
GABA (0.7 mg/g) , glutamine, leucine, lysine, ornithine, 30 proline, threonine; scopoletin, umbelliferone,- vitamin C, xanthonolignoids (1.28 mg/lOOg, kielcorin) (Bennett and Lee,
1989, Phytochemis try 21:967-998; Karryev, 1980, Izv. Akad.
Nauk . Turkm . SSR . 52-57; List and Hόrhammer, 1993) .
35
Figure imgf000113_0001
9.6.7. ANALYTICAL METHODS OF ANALYSIS
Two compounds of interest as marker constituents include two naturally occurring pigments, hypericin and pseudohypericin (naphthodianthrones) . These dyes are characteristic markers for this herb and are easily extracted into methanol. They both absorb visible light with a maximum absorption at 588 nm and are highly fluorescent in methanol. Both pigments are similar in their absorption and emission spectra, including their absorbtivity. Separation of these two pigments is necessary to determine the concentration of each pigment. Flavonoids are also considered to be an important class of constituents in St. John's Wort. Methods are provided for both classes of compounds.
- Ill 9.6.8. THIN LAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY (TLC) OF HYPERICIN AND PSEUDOHYPERICIN
Sample Preparation
5
An extract of hypericin is prepared from a representative sample of dried plant material by repetitively extracting 1.0 g of the sample with four successive 10 ml portions of methanol. The entire contents of all four extractions are diluted to 50 ml in a volumetric flask. This 10 solution is filtered through a 0.45 μm filter prior to analysis by TLC or HPLC.
Standard Preparation
J-5 Synthetic hypericin standard (ICN Biochemical™,
Cleveland, OH, Cat # 193423) is dissolved in pure methanol at a concentration of 0.10 mg/ml and filtered through a 0.45 μm filter. This standard stock solution is used for both TLC and HPLC calibration. 20
Stability of Standards/Sample Solutions
Both hypericin and pseudohypericin pigments, as well as solutions prepared from them are stable for months if kept in 25 the dark.
Stop Test;
A small spot of the above extracts on filter paper will - . exhibit bright red fluorescence under UV-365 nm light. The liquid extract solutions is also fluoresce bright red under UV-365 nm light.
Chromatographic Conditions
35
The chromatographic conditions for TLC are typically as follows. Silica Gel (e.g., Eastman No. #6060-13181 with or without fluorescent indicator added to the gel) is developed with toluene:ethyl acetate :glacial acetic acid in the proportions of 3:6:1. Typically, 1-5 μl of sample is added via capillary. The detection is performed with UV light at 5 365 nm. Hypericin pigments also fluoresce bright red so visible light detection may be used. The Rf values for hypericin are 0.71 and for pseudohypericin 0.50. The detection limits for this assay are 0.2 μg.
10
9.6.9. HIGH PERFORMANCE LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY
(HPLC) OF HYPERICIN AND PSEUDOHYPERICIN
The sample presentation and standards were prepared as described in the TLC experiment above .
__ The HPLC parameters are as follows. A Waters Nova-pak™ C-18 column, 3.9 X 150 mm is developed with a mobile phase under isocratic conditions where the mobile phase is methanol :0.4% phosphoric acid:triethylamine (82:17:1) . The flow rate is 1.0 ml per minute and detection is performed
_ using a visible detector at 588 nm. The column is run at ambient temperature. Run time is typically 12 minutes for injection of 10-50 μl of sample. The elution rates of the active components pseudohypericin and hypericin are 2.8 and 9.6 minutes, respectively.
25
Limits of Quantitation and Detection
Limits of detection depend upon instrumentation. For our use a Waters Mod I™ HPLC system with a Waters 991M Photodiode
Array (PDA) detector and monitoring at 588 nm was used. The 30 detection limits are approximately 2.5 μg for both pseudohypericin and hypericin.
Spike Recovery Validation
35 Spike recovery is typically 100% (+/-5%) when total absorbency of spiked sample is less than 0.8 AUFS. HPLC (Flavonoids, Hypericin and Pseudohypericin) Extraction
After filtration, the residue is extracted with 40 ml acetone at room temperature for 10 minutes using an ultrasonic bath and filter. The methanol and acetone filtrates are combined and reduced to dryness under vacuum. The dry material is dissolved in 4.0 ml methanol and filtered.
The HPLC for flavonoids, hypericin and pseudohypericin is run under the following conditions.
A LichroCart™ reverse phase (RP) 18 supersphere column,
4 x 250 mm with a reverse phase (RP) 8 pre-column is developed at ambient temperature with a flow rate of 1 ml/minute for minutes 0-39 and after 40 minutes 0.6 ml per minute. The injection volume is 20 μl and detection is at UV
254 nm.
Three different mobile phases are used. To detect rutin, hyperoside and isoquercitrin, acetonitrile :water:phosphoric acid (16:83:1) is used with a run time of 30 minutes.
For detecting quercitrin and isoquercetin, the following system is used, acetonitrile:water:phosphoric acid (32:67:1) with a run time of 45 minutes.
For 13, II8-biapigenin, amentoflavone, pseudohypericin and hypericin the conditions are as follows. The solvent system is acetonitrile:methanol :water:phosphoric acid (55:20:24:1) . The run time is 75 minutes.
The retention times (in minutes) are as follows: rutin
(16.7) ; hyperoside (18.5) ; isoquercetrin (19.2) ; quercetin
(23.8) ; luercetin (36.4) ; 13, II-biapigenin (42.8) ; amentoflavone (55.9) ; pseudohypericin (59.7) ; and hypericin
(68.4) . Standards for rutin, hyperoside, isoquercitrin, quercitrin and hypericin is available from Sigman, St. Louis, MO, USA, with the rest available from Roth. The samples are quantified for the procedure of Kartnig et al . , 1996, Plan ta Medica 62=51-53 against an external standard in methanol at 25 μg/ml.
9.6.10. UV/VIS SPECTROSCOPIC METHOD
(HYPERICIN/PSEUDOHYPERICIN)
SAMPLE PREPARATION
A quantitative extract is prepared by extracting 1.0 g of powdered herb sample with three 25 ml portions of dichloromethane (CH2Cl2) or until filtrate is clear. The dichloromethane extract is discarded. The dried residue is extracted exhaustively with acetone. The acetone extract is evaporated to dryness under vacuum. The residue is dissolved in three 8 ml portions of methanol and transferred to a 25 ml volumetric flask. Enough additional methanol is added to make the total volume 25.00 ml. 10 ml of this solution are filtered; the first 2 ml are discarded. 5.0 ml of the filtrate is diluted to 25.00 ml with methanol in a separate 25 ml volumetric flask.
9.7. HPLC ANALYSIS OF ST. JOHN'S WORT COMPONENTS HYPEROSIDE, RUTIN, QUERCETIN, QUERCITRIN, HYPERICIN, MANGIFERIN
The analytical HPLC method was as follows. The HPLC system was a Waters™ HPLC system consisting of two model 510 EF pumps, model 717 autosampler, a model 486 UV-Vis detector set at 254nm, and a Millenium™ Version 2.15 system controller and data processing software. Separations were made using 10 μl injection volumes loaded onto a reversed-phase C-18 column (Beckman Ultrasphere™, ODS column, 5μum, 250 x 4.6 mm) and a gradient elution system, using eluents A and B (A = 0.1 M NaH2P04 in 0.05% TFA H20; B = ACN) according to the following profile: 0-10 minutes 100-60% A, 0-40% B; 10-20 minutes 60-0% A; 40-100% B; 20-30 minutes 0-100% A, 100-0%B. The flow rate was kept at 1.0 ml/min., with peak monitoring at 254 nm. Magniferin, rutin, hyperoside, quercetrin, quercetin and hypericin components were determined. The results for five commercially available samples were as follows:
Figure imgf000118_0001
The results are also represented in FIG. 11.
10. EXAMPLE: GINGER, Zingiber officinale
Ginger may be prepared by a variety of methods. It may be sliced and freeze-dried and pulverized. It may be steamed and distilled to obtain the essential oil. It may be solvent extracted.
10.1. PLANT SOURCE/EXTRACTION METHOD:
Further methods of processing and extracting natural ginger may be found in the methods of processing and extracting section of the detailed description.
10.2. COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Ginger is also commercially available from a variety of sources, including Hauser Nutraceuticals (Boulder, CO) , Herb Phyters (West Hollywood, CA) , Nature's Fingerprint Triarco Industries, Inc., distributed by GNC, Natures Way
(Springvale, UT) , Solaray (Ogden, UT) and Zintona (Israel) . Herbal Choice-Botalia, Herb Pharm, Nature's Resource. 10.3. CLINICAL UTILITY
The clinical use of ginger is for motion sickness and treating nausea and vomiting. Ginger appears to alleviate motion sickness by acting on the gastrointestinal tract, ^ rather than acting through the central nervous system as antihistamines act . Some authors have proposed that it may increase gastric motility, blocking gastrointestinal reactions and subsequent nausea feedback, others have found no evidence (Mowrey and Clayson, 1982, Lancet 655) . 0
Ginger also ameliorates menstrual disorders and other disorders associated with nausea or gastrointestinal discomfort. Another use of ginger is preventing post¬ operative nausea and vomiting (Arfeen et al . , 1995, Anaesth. Intens . Care 23:449-454) . Others have reported ginger showing antiplatelet activity, preventing mucosal damage, a hypocholesterolemic activity, cardiovascular activity, cardiotonic activity, anti-inflammatory activity and antipyretic activity (Mustafa et al . , 1993, J". Drug Dev.
6.(1) :25-39) . Mustafa also report that ginger acts through 0 the thromboxane B2 levels in humans . Other workers have investigated that ginger's activities through prostacyclin
(PGE2) and thromboxane (TXA2) moieties (Bakon, 1986, Med .
Hypothesis 20:271-278) . 5
10.4. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS PREPARATIVE HPLC
The fractionation of alcoholic raw ginger extract was performed using reversed-phase preparative HPLC. This method was selected as a preferable prep-chromatographic technique 0 on the basis of observed excellent mass recovery (>90%) , the separation of the selected standards (shogaols and gingerols) , as well as separation of the other co-ocurring components. A detailed description of the materials and methods utilized is described below.
The selection of chemical markers for ginger was based on the following protocol. A comprehensive search of the literature on ginger ( Zingiber officinale) indicated the 6-, 8- and 10-gingerols, as well as the 6-, 8- and 10-shogaols as the components with the most consistent bioactivity in a large number of diverse assays [analgesic, anti-emetic, anti- 5 5-HT, cardiotonic, prostaglandin and thromboxan suppression (Duke, 1992)] . The non-CNS anti-emetic clinical indication is supported by the prostaglandin/thromboxan bioactivities, as this pathway plays a key role in the gut (regulation of acid production/absorportion/membrance regeneration) . These 0 biodata were determined by different groups either by biotesting individual components or the essential oil extract of ginger, which contains the bulk of the gingerols and shogaols.
Herb Materials: one bag of powdered dry ginger ( Zingiber 5 officinale) raw material was obtained from Hauser Nutraceuticals, and labeled as LIMS 157381.
Prep-HPLC Method: Approximately 150g of dry ginger powder was suspended in 500 ml of 95% MeOH/H20 and mixed overnight. The resultant extract was filtered and rotary 0 evaporated to an oily residue, and 10 ml of residue was injected onto a preparative HPLC ( SepTech NavaPrep 5000™) .
The HPLC conditions were as follows: column-Vydac C18, 5.0 x
25 cm ID; UV-detector @ 282 nm; flow rate 100 ml/min. ; gradient from 10% ACN to 100% ACN over 30 minutes, followed 5 by a 10 minute hold at 100% ACN. Fractions (300 ml) were collected every three minutes for the first thirty minutes, followed by a 1 liter fraction collected from 30-40 minutes for a total of 11 fractions. Q Analytical HPLC Method: The HPLC system was an Hitachi HPLC system consisting of an L-4500A Diode Array Detector, and D-6000 Interface, L-6200A Intelligent Pump and AS4000 Intelligent Autosampler™. Separations were made using lOul injection volumes loaded onto a reversed-phase C-18 column c (Alltech Hypersil™ ODS, 5μm, 4.6-260mm) and a gradient elution system, using eluents A and B (A = ACN; B = 99/1 H20/MeOH) according to the following profile: 0-5 minutes 55 % ACN, 45 % MeOH/H20; 14 minutes 80 % ACN, 20 % MeOH/H20; 20-25 minutes 55 % ACN, 45 % MeOH/H20; 0-5 minutes 55 % ACN, 45 % MeOH/H20; 0-5 minutes 55 % ACN, 45 % MeOH/H20. The flow rate was kept at 1.0 ml/min., with peak monitoring at 282 nm. The 5 reproducibility of this analytical method should not exceed 2.5% relative standard deviation.
The fractionation of alcoholic raw ginger extract was performed using reverse-phase preparative HPLC. This method was selected as a preferable prep-chromatographic technique 0 on the basis of observed excellent mass recovery (>90%) , the separation of the selected standards (shogaols and gingerols) , as well as separation of the other co-occurring components. A detailed description of the materials and methods utilized is described below. 5
Approximately 150 g of dry ginger powder was suspended in 500 ml of 95% methanol in water and mixed overnight. The sample extract was then rotary evaporated to an oily residue, and 10 ml of this residue was injected onto a preparative HPLC. The HPLC conditions were as follows: column-Vydac 0 C18, 5.0 x 25 cm ID, cat number 218TP101550; detector-282 nm; flow rate 100 ml/minutes; gradient from 10% acetonitrile to 100% acetonitrile over 30 minutes followed by a 10 minute hold at 100% acetonitrile. Fractions were collected every 3 minutes for the first 30 minutes followed by a 1 1 fraction 5 collected from 30 to 40 minutes for a total of 11 fractions.
A comprehensive search of the literature on ginger (Zingiber officinale) indicated the 6-, 8- and 10-gingerols, as well as the 6-, 8- and 10-shogaols as the components with Q the most consistent bioactivity in a number of assays (analgesic, anti-emetic, anti 5-HT, cardiotonic, prostaglandin suppressor; see Duke, 1992) . The choice amongst the compounds in the literature was determined in the following by different groups either by biotesting individual 5 components or the essential oil extract of ginger, which contains the bulk of the gingerols and shogaols. The fractions were then analyzed by HPLC as above for the determination of 6-gingerol, 8-gingerol, 10-gingerol, 6- shogaol, 8-shogaol, and 10-shogaol. Quantification for all components was performed based upon the response of a capsaicin standard purchased from Sigma Chemical Co.™ The standards for the ginger chemical analysis are available through literature methods. For example, several reviews exist and sources may be found in the following: (Gvindaragan, 1982, CRC: Cri tical Reviews in Science and Nutri tion r7:191-96, 189-256; Van Beek et al . , 1987, Phytochemistry 2.6:3005-3010) .
Results for each fraction are listed in Table 20. The results are represented in FIG. 12.
TABLE 20 Results of Ginger Fractionation
Figure imgf000122_0001
After HPLC analysis, each fraction was evaporated to an oily residue and the weight of the residue was determined. 10.5. BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS INHIBITS THROMBOXANE SYNTHESIS, PROSTACYCLIN AGONIST; PG SYNTHETASE INHIBITOR; SPECIFIC BIOASSAY THROMBOXANE SYNTHETASE INHIBITION 10.5.1 THROMBOXANE A2 BIOASSAY
Thromboxane A2 (TxA2) is a potent platelet activator which serves to amplify the response to weak platelet agonists, such as ADP, epinephrine, and low concentrations of collagen and thrombin. TxA2 is generated by cyclooxygenase from arachidonic acid, itself released by phospholipases upon cell activation. The resulting unstable prostaglandin endoperoxides (PGG2 or PGH2) are converted to TxA2 by the enzyme TxA2 synthase . The endoperoxides and TxA2 generated by aggregating platelets could produce a profound vasoconstriction largely restricted to the area of the vessel immediately adjacent to the platelet plug. Vasospasm associated with coronary or cerebral infarction could be produced by potent vasoconstrictors generated during platelet clumping. An enhanced production of TxA2 is associated with the pathogenesis of various thrombotic and ischemic disorders. The inhibitors of TxA2 biosynthesis should have beneficial advantages to the ischemic heart diseases, cerebral infarction and arteriosclerosis and diabetic disorders.
Thromboxane A2 synthase in microsomal fractions used in the assay is isolated from rabbit platelets by conventional centrifugation methods. The reaction is initiated by the addition of substrate, prostaglandin G2 to the tube which contains test compound (or vehicle) , assay buffer and enzyme, and continuously incubating for 30 minutes at 30°C, and then determined the production of thromboxane A2, which is rapidly converted to thromboxane B2. The amount of thromboxane B2 formation is quantitated by radioimmunoassay method. Compounds are screened at 100 μM (Gresele et al . , 1991, Trends Pharmacol . Sci . .12:158-163; Brownlie et al . , 1993, Brit. J. Pharmacol . 110:1600-1606) . The results of the thromboxane assay were as follows:
Ginger Extract-Biological Assay Results
Standard/Extract/Fraction Thromboxane
6-Gingerol Negative 8-Gingerol N.T. 10-Gingerol N.T. 6-Shogaol N.T. 8-Shogaol N.T. 10-Shogaol N.T. Extract Negative Fraction #1 Negative Fraction #2 Negative Fraction #3 Negative Fraction #4 Negative Fraction #5 Negative Fraction #6 Negative Fraction #7 Negative Fraction #8 Negative Fraction #9 Negative Fraction #10 Negative Fraction #11 Negative
N.T. = not tested
The negative results of the extract, the standard and the fractions, in the thromboxane assay indicate that this assay may be too selective (the mechanism is too narrow) and may not be an appropriate assay for pharmaprinting ginger. A more general assay for probing prostaglandin-related bioactivities of ginger extracts, fractions and standards is the prostanoid FP assay. The details of this tissue assay are described below. 10.5.2 PROSTANOID FP ASSAY
A strip of the uterus obtained from Long Evans derived female rats weighing 275 ± 25 g and sacrificed by cervical dislocation is used. The tissue is placed under 1 g tension in a 10 ml bath containing phosphate buffered saline (pH 7.4) at 32°C. Test substance (30 μM) -induced isometrically recorded contraction by more than 50% within 5 min, relative to control 0.1 μM PGF2a-induced response, indicates possible prostanoid FP receptor agonist activity. At a test substance concentration where no significant agonist activity is seen, ability to reduce the PGF2α-induced contractile response by more than 50% indicates prostanoid FP receptor antagonist activity. (Pettibone et al . , 1991, J. Pharmacol . Exp . Ther . 256 : 304-308; Vane et al . , 1973, Br. J. Pharmacol . 48_ : 629- 639) .
Agonist EC50 (μM)
'Prostaglandin F2α (PGF2α) 0.0012
10.6. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC FOR 6-GINGEROL, 8-
GINGEROL, 10-GINGEROL, 6-SHOGAOL, 8-SHOGAOL, 10-SHOGAOL
The results of the chemical analysis from several commercial suppliers of ginger are below. The results are represented in FIG. 13.
Figure imgf000125_0001
11. EXAMPLE: CORIOLUS VERSICOLOR
11.1. ISOLATION OF COMPONENTS OF CORIOLUS VERSICOLOR
Coriolus versicolor is a mushroom. The extract of thin 5 mushroom has been used for the treatment of post-operative malignancies. It is believed that the activity of Coriol us versicolor is due to immunomodulatory effects.
650 mg of crude Coriolus versicolor powder polysaccharide peptide (PSP) (Landford, 18 capsules lot #941 10
23 1) were added to 45 ml of a buffer C (see Example 11) and stirred at 4°C overnight. The next day, the solution was centrifuged (10,000 r.p.m., 1 hour) and the supernatant was removed and passed through a series of sugar specific columns
(flow rate 6 ml per hour) . The columns were washed with
15 buffer C to remove all unbound proteins. Then each column was washed with a buffer D (see mistletoe section) containing
EDTA (10 column volumes) . These eluates were separately collected and each contained carbohydrate binding proteins which require Ca++ for their binding specificities. 20
Then each column was washed with buffer C and then separately eluted with buffer C containing 0.5 M sugars
(lactose, galactose and melibiose) . Each eluate was collected and each contained carbohydrate binding proteins
__ which do not require Ca*+ for their binding specificities.
All six eluates were concentrated using 5K cutoff ultramembrane filters to remove salts and low molecular weight components.
The biological activities of each protein and the 3° materials which did not bind to the columns were assayed in the same leukemia L1210 system in culture as was used in the preceding examples. The protein contents of each sample were assayed by Bio Rad and molecular weights of samples were assayed by 6.5% SDS gels.
35
The proteins isolated 13.87mg yield = (13.87x100) /605 = 2.29% The quantitative and bioactivity protein fingerprints for the sample of Coriolus versicolor are set forth in Table 21. The standard fingerprints which were established for pharmaceutical grade are set forth in Table 22. A comparison of the fingerprints for the sample and standard shows that they match, so the sample qualifies as pharmaceutical grade in accordance with the present invention.
TABLE 21
QUANTITATIVE AND BIOACTIVITY FINGERPRINT OF CORIOLUS VERSICOLOR SAMPLE
Protein Total Total Total
Content Volume Protein TΓ • Activity
Fraction identity (mg/ml) (ml) (mg) (μg/ml) Unitsh
PSP 13.4 45 603 - -
EDTA Eluted
Proteins
Lactose 0.430 5.0 2.15 0.0600 3.5 x IO4
Galactose 0.240 6.0 1.44 0.0210 6.8 x IO4
Melibiose 0.480 6.5 3.12 0.0033 91.0 x IO4
0.5 M Sugar
Eluted Proteins
Lactose 0.370 8.5 3.14 0.028 1 1.0 x 104
Galactose 0.459 7.5 3.44 0.110 3.1 x IO4
Melibiose 0.074 6.0 0.44 0.150 0.2 x 10"
Unbound sugars 3.950 136.0 537 - -
Inhibitory concentrations (μg/ml) which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of L1210 leukemia cells in culture.
Activity unit is defined as dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which when added to L1210 cells causes a 50% growth inhibition.
TABLE 22
STANDARD QUANTITATIVE AND BIOACTIVITY FINGERPRINT OF CORIOLUS VERSICOLOR
Figure imgf000129_0001
Inhibitory concentrations (μg/ml) which caused 50% inhibition of the growth of L 1210 leukemia cells in culture
Activity unit is defined as the dilution factor needed for a specific fraction which added to L1210 cells in culture causes 50% growth inhibition
12. EXAMPLE: ALOE, Aloe Vera 12.1. PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Aloe has two primary uses. One is use for wound healing and as an anti-inflammatory. The second major use iε as a 5 stimulant laxative. It is known as aloe vera or a barbadnsis. The aloe for wound healing is a mucilaginous gel obtained from the center of the leaf. The aloe form for use as a laxative is obtained from specialized cells that occur on the border of the outer and inner layers of the mesophyll 10 located beneath the epidermis of the leaves of the plant .
The laxative form is made from a bitter yellow latex obtained from the plant that is dried to a reddish-black mass. The two aloe forms are very different. j_5 Additional uses for aloe vera gel or aloe vera extract are for liver protection, arthritis, use as an anti- inflammatory, use as an anti-pruritic, use as anti-bacterial agent, use as an anti-ulcer agent. Amongst the reference books describing aloe are Leung and Foster, 1996, and Bisset,
20 1994. Aloe has been approved as the subject of the Germany E Monograph in the dried laxative form (Germany Commission E Monograph B Anz . No. 154, dated August 21, 1985.
12.2. COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
25
There are many sources for aloe. It is sold commercially in a laxative form by Natures Way Products, Inc. (Springville, Utah) . Commercially available gel formulations include aloe vera (Aloecorp) , Aristo™ (Steiner, Germany) , Krauterlax™ (Dolorgiet, Germany) and Dermaide Aloe™ (Dermaide
30 Research Corp.) . Stabilized aloe gel compositions have been reported (U.S. Patent No. 3,878,197, Maret) .
35 12.3. CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The major clinical indications for aloe were discussed above, namely, wound healing, anti-inflammatory, liver protection, anti-pruritic, laxative, anti-bacterial and anti- "* ulcer activity. An additional indication for which aloe may be effective is as an anti-leukemic agent which has been demonstrated in vi tro (Kupchan, 1976, J. Nat . Prod . 39 :223) . Others have reported activity against peptic ulcers and also improved circulation in minimal studies. The FDA studied
^° aloe for treating burns and found that there was insufficient evidence and insufficient documentation to approve it as a product. Other studies have shown that aloe accelerated wound healing under normal circumstances or for patients with frostbite (Fulton, 1990, J. Derma tol . Surg. Oncol . 16 (5) :480 ;
15 McCauly et al . , 1990, Postgrad. Med . 8.8(8) =67) . However, another study found that aloe delayed wound healing (Schmidt and Greenspon, 1991, Obs tet . Gynecol . 78 (1) :115) .
20 12.4. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
Fractional analysis of the carbohydrate components of aloe is performed using gel filtration chromatography as described above.
25
12.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
Aloe has been shown to have many biological effects. It is known to stimulate peristalsis, inhibit gastric secretion and dilate capillaries. Aloe also has mitogenic activity,
30 hemagglutination activity and antithromboxane activity. The primary assays used are the hepatocyte enzymes, the rat surgical wound healing model, cyclooxygenase-1, cyclooxygenase-2 and lipoxygenase assays. The cyclooxygenase and lipoxygenase activities are performed as in the Saw 5 Palmetto section above. The antithromboxane activities are analyzed as in the ginger section above. Aloe extracts and fractions are analyzed for wound healing ability as described in U.S. Patent No. 5,487,899, Davis, a rodent wound healing model for analyzing the ability for aloe, either alone or in combination with other agents, to assist in healing of wounds . 5
12.6. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
There are many putative components in aloe, including barbaloin, iso-barbaloin, o-glycosides, polysaccharide ^ Q glucomannan, bradykininase, tannins and magnesium lactate.
Chemical analysis is performed by HPLC and GPC. In addition, the chemical analysis of aloe may also be performed by gas chromatography-mass spectroscopy (GC-MS) . A recent example of the chemical analysis for the components of aloe 5 was performed by Yamaguchi in 1993 (Yamaguchi et al . , 1993, Biosci . Biotech . Biochem . 5_7 (8) : 1350-1352) . There they studied hexane extracts and acetone extracts of freeze-dried aloe.
The gel primarily consists of several types of 0 polysaccharides, including an acidic galactan, mannan, a glucomannan, an arabinan, and/or a glucogalactomannan. Polysaccharides constitute 0.2-0.3% of the fresh gel. (Tyler & Foster, 1996)
The components include aracedonic acid as a 5 prostaglandin precursor (Afzal et al . , 1991, Plan ta Med .
5.7:38-40) . The other major components include polysaccharides, including acidic galactan, mannan, glucomannan, arbinan and glucogalactomannan. Polysaccharides make up 0.2-0.3 of the fresh gel. The polysaccharide content 0 is determined by GPC. The glycomannan isolated from aloe was reported by Mandel and Das, 1980 (Mandel and Das, 1980,
Carbohydrate Research JT7:249-256) . Other chemically-active compounds in aloe include lectin-like proteins which show anti-cancer and anti-inflammatory activities (Winters et al . , 5
1981, Economi c Botany 35 (1) : 89-95; Winters et al . , 1995,
Phytotherapy Research 9.: 395-400) . Other small molecule components of aloe include various fatty acids and various hydrocarbons (Yamaguchi et al . , 1993, Biosci . Biotech . Biochem . 5J7(8) :1350-1352) .
5
13. EXAMPLE: BILBERRY, Vaccinium Myrtillus
It is typically administered either in the fruit form of berries or as an extract. The extract is typically standardized to 36% anthocynosides in doses of 160 mg, once -j_Q or twice a day.
13.1 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of bilberry. One of the major proprietary products is Tegens™, by Indena -
15 Inverni della Beffa Research Laboratories (Milan, Italy) . Myrtocyan™ (Morazzoni et al. , 1990, Fitoterapia, v LXI : 1) is the trade name for an anthocyanoside complex from V. myrtill us (one component in Tegens™) . Bilberry extracts are also available from Natural Factors Nutritional Products,
20 Ltd. (Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada) and Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) . Bilberry in capsule form, 25% anthrocyanosides, is available through Herbal Choice-Botalia, PhytoPharmica, Source Natural, Nature's Herbs and Nature's Way.
25
13.2 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications of bilberry are varied. The primary indication is venous insufficiency for the lower
30 limbs, varicose veins, atherosclerosis and degenerative retinal conditions. It is believed that this is due to capillary strengthening activity and improvement of blood vessel contractility. Bilberry has also been shown to have anti-inflammatory activity, anti-diarrhetic activity, wound
35 healing activity, and vasoprotective activity. The botanical having vasoprotective and anti-inflammatory activity may be administered either topically or intravenously (Lietti et al., 1976, Arzneimi ttel -Forschung 26(5) :829) .
13.3 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The components of bilberry include tannins, anthrocyanins, flavonoids, various invert sugars and pectins. The components of bilberry are separated by HPLC, GPC or gel filtration. Examples of columns include polymer laboratories PL-gel 5m 50θA polymer, Toyopearl 8HW 40S column, and
Sephadex™ LH-20 dextran column is also used. The material subjected to the partitioning is performed with ethyl/acetate-water solution, gel filtration with water and/or alcohol and/or water and/or acetone mobile phase. The HPLC is performed using reversed phase column chromatography, (RP-HPLC) using water and/or water and acetone and/or water and alcohol as the mobile phase. For GPC, water and/or water and alcohol and/or water and acetonitrile with or without buffer are used. On the Sephadex™ column, ethanol or chloroform is used, ethanol as the eluent.
13.4 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The primary biological methods of analysis for bilberry for venous insufficiency indication is by a blood vessel contractility assay and platelet aggregation. For the anti- inflammatory activity, the primary assays are cyclooxygenase -1 and -2 and 5-lipoxygenase. The experiment is performed as described in the Saw Palmetto section above.
The platelet activating factor assay is performed as described by Morazzion and Magistretti (1990, Fi toterapia 6JL (1) :13-21) . Platelet aggregation in vi tro, platelet aggregation in vivo and platelet adhesiveness ex vivo are determined. Another assay for the venous insufficiency clinical indication of the vasodilator inhibitory effects is done by the study of contractile response of coronary artery segments to acetycholine (Bettini et al . , 1991, Fi toterapia £2(1) : 15-28) .
13.5 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
The chemical analysis is performed using HPLC. The primary components are: tannins, anthocyanins, flavonoids, plant acids, invert sugars, pectins.
14. EXAMPLE: BLACK COHOSH, Cimicifuga racemosa
14.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Black Cohosh is a drug that is administered as either a dried rhizome or roots. It is a member of the buttercup family. It grows in open woods and at the edges of dense forests from Ontario to Tennessee and as far west as Missouri. Black Cohosh has traditionally been used for the treatment of dysmenorrhea, dyspepsia and rheumatism.
14.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Black Cohosh. One of the major proprietary products is Remifemin™, by Shaper & Brummer (Salzgitter, Germany) . Another European product is called Klimadynon™ (Jarry et al . , 1995, Phytopharmaka Forsch. Klin. Anwend. - Conference Proceedings pp. 99-112) . Also, a product sold simply as Wild Appalachian Black Cohosh Root Extract™ is available from Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) .
14.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The German Commission E Monograph describes the use for premenstrual discomfort and dysmenorrhea. It is typically administered in daily doses of 40-200 mg either as a tea, a decoction or as a tincture in alcohol. The clinical indications for Black Cohosh are premenstrual syndrome, dysmenorrhea, dyspepsia, rheumatism, sore throat, bronchitis, sedative and as a menstrual cycle regulator. In one clinical study the ethanol extract was found to cause selective reduction of the serum concentrations of pituitary luteinizing hormone (LH) (Bradley ed. British Herbal Compendium, Vol . 1, British Herbal Medicine Association:Dorset, England, 1992) .
14.4. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
Clinical analysis of Black Cohosh is performed using reverse phase HPLC as described in the St. John's Wort section above.
14.5. BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The primary bioassays for the premenstrual syndrome clinical indication are the estrogen receptor binding assay, luteinizing hormone assay, the FSH bioassay and the oxytocin bioassay.
14.5.1. ESTROGEN RECEPTOR
The in vi tro binding of the fractions of the total material and the components of Black Cohosh is assayed by several estrogen assays. One assay is the binding of two frozen calf uterus estrogen receptors. The second assay is estrogenic antagonism in vi tro . A third assay is a rat uteri estrogen receptor model .
Black Cohash extract and fractions are administered p.o.
(10 mg/kg) for three consecutive days to a group of 5 ICR derived immature female mice weighing 13 ± 1 g and challenged with estradiol benzoate (3 μg/kg s.c.) immediately after the final dose. The animals are sacrificed 24 hours after the final dose and wet weight of the uterus of each animal is measured. A 50 % or more (≥50) reduction in the estradiol- induced increase in uterine weight indicates estrogen antagonist activity. (Hirotsu et al . , 1986, Arzneim. -Forsch. 38 (11) : 1410-1416) .
Compound ED50 mg/kg p.o,
"Tamoxif en 0.1 x 3
'Indicates standard reference agent used.
The binding of the total Black Cohosh extract, the Black Cohosh fractions and the components to the rat estrogen receptor is performed as described in Jarry et al . , 1985 (Jarry et al . , 1985, Planta Med. 1:316-319) .
14.5.2 THE OXYTOCIN RECEPTOR AGONIST ASSAY
A strip of the uterus obtained from Long Evans derived female rats weighing 275 ± 25 g and sacrificed by cervical dislocation is used. The tissue is placed under 1 g tension in a 10 ml bath containing phosphate buffered saline (pH 7.4) at 32°C. Black Cohash and fractions are introduced at 30 μM. The induced isometrically recorded contraction by more than 50% within 5 min, relative to control 2 nM oxytocin response, indicates possible oxytocin receptor agonist activity. At a test substance concentration where no significant agonist activity is seen, ability to reduce the oxytocin-induced contractile response by more than 50% indicates oxytocin receptor antagonist activity. (Pettibone et al . , 1991, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 256 : 304-308) .
Agonist (#45900) EC50 (μM)
*Oxytocin 0.0012
Prostaglandin F^ 0.035
Figure imgf000137_0001
Indicates standard reference agent used. 14.5.3 THE LH REDUCTION ASSAY
The luteinizing hormone assay (LH) is performed as described by Jarry and Harnischfeger, 1985 (Jarry and Harnischfeger, 1985, Plan ta Med . 1:46-49) .
14.6. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
The components in Black Cohosh include the steroidal triterpenes (actein, cimigoside, 27-deoxyactein, cimicifugin, tannin and the alkaloids) . Isoflavones are also present in Black Cohosh, including forononetins. Minor constituents also include isoferulics and salicyclics. They are analyzed by HPLC.
15. EXAMPLE: CHAMOMILE, Λfatricharia rβcutita
15.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The drug chamomile consists of the dried flower head of German chamomile, Metricaria recuti ta . There is also Roman chamomile obtained from Chamaeluπ? noble which is different than German chamomile. Use of Roman chamomile is largely in the United Kingdom. The German therapeutic monograph also has chamomile preparations for use for gastrointestinal spasms and gastrointestinal tract inflammatory diseases. Topical products are also used.
15.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Chamomile. One of the major proprietary products is
Kamillosan™, by Asta Medica AG (Frankfurt am Main, Germany) . Chamomile dry extract is available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) and is standardized to contain 1% total apigenin and 0.5% essential oil. Also, a product sold simply as German Chamomile Flowers™ is available from Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) . 15.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
Chamomile has many clinical indications. Primary indications are use as an anti-spasmodic for GI distress and dermatological anti-inflammatory agent. Other indications include treating the common cold, dyspeptic complaints, acne, inflammation of mouth and wound healing. Chamomile is also reported to have bactericidal and fungicidal activities.
Typically, infusion of one or two grams of the flowers or 1 to 4 millimeters of tincture are used for gastrointestinal spasms. Traditional uses include treating cholic, diarrhea, indigestion, insomnia, infantile convulsions, toothache, and bleeding and swollen gums. One example of the anti-microbial use of chamomile is as a vaginal douch as described in U.S.
Patent No. 5,244,885, Carle et al .
15.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
Fractional analysis for chamomile is performed in a manner similar to that described above for St. John's Wort using reverse phase chromatography.
15.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
There are many ways to perform the biological analysis of chamomile, including enzymatic assays, tissue culture assays and co-organism assays. The enzymatic assays for the anti-inflammatory activity are cyclooxygenase-1 and -2 and 5- lipoxygenase. These assays are performed as described in the Saw Palmetto section above. The muscle spasm tissue culture assay is performed on isolated guinea pig ileum. The spasmodic assay is performed as described in Carle and Gomaa, 1992 (Carle and Gomaa, 1992, Drugs of Today 28 (8) :559-565; Achterrath-Tuckermann et al. , 1980, Planta Med. 3_9:38) . Whole animal assays are also performed, including the Ca24 influx to mast cells and the mouse ear dermatitis and rat paw swelling assay. The mouse ear experiment is as described below. 15.5.1 MOUSE EAR DERMATITIS MODEL
Chamomile extract, oil and fractions are administered i.p. (0.1, 1, 10 and 100 mg/kg) to groups of 5 ICR derived male mice weighing 22 ± 2 g one hour before sensitization to oxazolone (0.1 ml of 5% solution) applied to the preshaven abdominal surface. Seven days later, animals are challenged with oxazolone (25 μl of a 2% solution) applied to the right ear, vehicle being applied to the left ear. After 24 hours, each mouse is sacrificed and ear thickness measured with a Dyer Model micrometer gauge. A 30 % or more (≥30) enhancement relative to the vehicle treated control group is considered significant and indicates possible immunostimulant activity. (Griswold et al . , 1974, Cell . Immunol . IX - 198- 204) .
Compound ED30 mg/kg i.p,
*Azimexone 100
Bestatin 1
Levamisole 30
"Indicates standard reference agent used,
15.5.2 THE RAT PAW SWELLING ASSAY
The paw inflammation experiment is performed as described below. Chamomile extract, oil and fractions are administered p.o. (100 mg/kg) to a group of 3 Long Evans male or female overnight fasted rats weighing 150 ± 20 g one hour before right hind paw injection of carageenan (0.1 ml of 1% suspension intraplantar) . Reduction of hind paw edema by 30 % or more (≥30) three hours after carageenan administration indicates significant acute anti-inflammatory activity. (Winter et al . , 1962, Proc . Soc . Exper . Biol . Med . Ill: 544-547) ) . Compound ED30 mg/kg p.o.
Acetazolamide >50
Aspirin 150
BW 755C 30
Clonidine 1
Diflunisal 30
Furosemide 50
Hydrocortisone 30
Hydroflumethiazide >50
Ibuprofen 30
'indomethacin 3
Ketoprofen 3
Naproxen 3
Phenidone 50
Phenylbutazone 50
Probenecid >50
Salbutamol 10
"Indicates standard reference agent used
BW 755C=3-amino-l- [3- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl] -2- pyrazoline.
15.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
The chemical analysis is performed by HPLC.
The components include alpha-bisabolol, bisaboloxide a and b, and chamazulene . The components also include flavonoids such as epigenin, leutolin, percitin, myrricitin, epigenin 7 glucoside and erutin.
16. CHASTE TREE, Vitex agnus - castus .
16.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The source of the chaste tree berry is the fruits of vi tax agnus cul tus 1 . shrub, a small tree native to West Asia and southwestern Europe and also widely distributed in North America. The chaste tree has been used for over 2,000 years for menstrual problems and is typically administered as either an alcoholic extract of the powdered fruit for a dose of 20 mgs of the dried fruit or administered as a decoction using 30-40 mgs of fruit in a daily dose.
16.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of agnus castus . Some of the products are: Femaprin™, by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) ; Agnolyt™, by Madaus A.G. (Koln, Germany) ; and Strotan™ capsules (Hamburg, Germany) . Extracts are also available from Bionorica™ (Germany) . Femaprin-Vitex™ in capsule form, agnuside, 0.15% is available through Nature's Way.
16.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications for the chaste tree are many, including attenuating PMS syndromes and menstrual cycle regulation, anti-infective activity and increased lactation. It is also known to assist in mastalgia and menopausal symptoms, and treat inadequate lactation. It is also used as an anti-spasmodic.
16.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS Fractional analysis of the chaste tree is performed in a manner similar to that of the Saw Palmetto described above. Fractionation is performed on silica gel chromatography beginning in hexane and working toward more polar solvents such as ethyl acetate. Alternatively, reverse phase RP chromatography is done using a C-18 column and working from acetonitrile to water as the solvent systems. 16.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
Biological analysis of chaste tree extract, chaste tree berries, chaste tree fractions and specific compounds from the chaste tree is based on using the following assays: ^ analyzing for dopamine antagonistic activity, measuring the inhibition of prolactin secretion, increasing luteinizing hormone (LH) , decreasing follicle stimulating hormone. Chaste tree extracts also have been shown to have anti¬ microbial activity. 0
The primary assay is the inhibition of prolactin secretion from rat pituitary cells. (Sliutz et al . , 1993,
Horm . Motab. Res . 23 -253-255) . In this assay, a cell culture system using freshly harvested rat pituitaries is assayed for release of prolactin with a positive control of thyroxin 5 releasing hormone (TRH) . Other workers have found it active in an assay.
The luteinizing hormone (LH) assay is performed as described above in the Black Cohosh example (Jarry et al . , 0 1985) "
16.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Chemical analysis is performed by GC-MS or HPLC. The
GC-MS analysis of the chaste tree components is done using 5 published procedures (Zwaving and Bos, 1996, Planta Med . £2:83-84) .
The components of chaste tree include limonene, cineole, sabinene, flavonoids, brantin and isovitexin. 0
17. EXAMPLE: CHESTNUT - HORSE, Castanea dentata , Aesculus hippocas tanum
17.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Horse Chestnut is the fruit of the tree aesculus , which 5 grows to be 75 feet tall and is common throughout the United
States and Europe. When the husk dries, the nuts are released. Extracts of the Horse Chestnut are commercially available for a variety of uses, including varicose veins and hemorrhoids .
17.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Horse Chestnut. One of the major proprietary products is Venostasin retard™, by Klinge Pharma (Munich, Germany) . A liquid herbal extract of the fresh mature seeds of the Horse Chestnut is available from Herb Pharm (Williams, Oregon) - this extract contains 58-64% grain alcohol and distilled water. Horse Chestnut dry extract is available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) and is standardized to contain 20% triterpene saponins calculated as aescin. Also, a powdered extract is available (min. 20% aescin) from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) .
17.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications for Horse Chestnut are as follows: venous insufficiency, hemorrhoids, varicose veins, eczema, menstrual pain and phlebitis. One clinical study on 22 patients using the commercially available Horse Chestnut extract Venostatin™. They found Venostatin™ had an inhibitory effect on edema formation by decreasing transcapillary filtration (Bisler et al . , 1986, Dtsh . Med . Wochenschr . Ill (35) : 1321-1329) .
Another study reported increased gonadotropin release in menopausal women. Duker et al . reported in 1990 that
Remifemin™, an ethanolic extract of Horse Chestnut, reduced luteinizing hormone (LH) secretion. In that study, LH levels, but not FSH levels, were significantly reduced in patients receiving the extract. Extract of Horse Chestnut has been particularly effective in patients with chronic venous insufficiency (Hitzenberger, 1989, Wien . Med . Wochenschr . , 139 (17) : 1385; Diehm et al . , 1992, Vasa 21=188) . 17.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
There are several ways to perform the fractional analysis of the Horse Chestnut extract. Silica get chromatography is performed with solvents such as acetone and working toward a more potent solvent such as methanol .
Alternatively, reverse phase chromatography may be performed using acetonitrile and water as the solvent system. Others have reported separation of components on a Sephadex™ LH-20 column using methanol as the eluent (Dϋker et al . , 1991, Planta Med. 57:420-424) ) .
17.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The components of the Horse Chestnut extract, the fractions and the specific chemical markers are analyzed in a variety of fashions, including the spontaneously activated rat portal vein model, the isolated dog vein model, and lymphatic edema in rats. The anti-inflammatory activity of the Horse Chestnut extract fractions in specific compounds is measured by the carageenan edema induced rat model and the anti-inflammatory assays discussed above, namely, the cyclooxygenase-1 and cyclooxygenase-2 and the 5-lipogenase models.
The portal model is performed using the following procedures:
17.5.1 PORTAL VEIN, SPONTANEOUSLY ACTIVATED
A portal vein ring obtained from Long Evans derived male or female rats weighing 275 ± 25 g and sacrificed by cervical dislocation is used. The tissue is placed under 2 g tension in a 10 ml bath containing phosphate buffered saline (pH 7.4) at 32°C and permitted to develop spontaneous myogenic contractions. When the Horse Chesnut powder, seeds or fraction at 30 μM induces isometrically recorded relaxation by more than 50% within 10 min it indicates significant activity (Hamilton et al . , 1986, Br . J. Pharmacol . j3_8: 103 111) .
Agonist EC50 (μM)
Cromokalim 0.17
*Pinacidil 0.84
'Indicates standard reference agent used.
The dog vein model is performed using published methods (Guillaume and Padioleau, 1994, Arzneimi ttleforschung £4:25- 35) .
The anti-inflammatory activity of steroidal constituents of the Horse Chestnut is analyzed using the estrogen receptor assay which measures modulation of the binding of [3H] estradiol to estrogen receptors. Cytosol from frozen calf uterus is prepared in modified Tris-HCl pH 7.4 buffer using standard techniques. A 100 μg aliquot of cytosol protein iε incubated with 1.5 nM [3H] estradiol for 14-16 hours at 4°C. Non-specific binding is estimated in the presence of 5.8 μM diethylstilbestrol . Bound [3H] estradiol is separated from free radioligand by adsorbtion to dextran-coated charcoal. After low speed centrifugation an aliquot is removed from the supernatant and counted to determine t3H] estradiol specifically bound. Samples of Horse Chestnut are screened at 10 μM, based on an assumed average molecular weight of 200. (McGuire et al . eds., Estrogen Receptors in Human Breast Cancer. Raven Press, N.Y. 1975) .
Assay Reference Data
Kα 0.06 nM πmax . 42 fmol/mg protein
Specific Binding: 75% Compound IC50 (nM) K1 (nM) nH
*Diethylstilbestrol 0.65 0.025 1.0
17-α-Estradiol 1.1 0.041 0.7 Ethynylestradiol 0.081 0.003 1.1
*Indicates standard reference agent used.
Analysiε is performed using the rat paw edema model following the protocol described above in the Chamomile section.
Alternatively, published protocols are used (Dύker, 1991,
Plan ta Med . 57.:420-424 ; Senatore, 1989, Boll . Soc . It . Biol .
Sper. 65.(2) :137-141) .
17.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Chemical analysis is performed using HPLC. The components include deic acids, phenolic acids, coumarins, cyclitols, aesain, saponins, various triterpens, various flavonoids, polypreinoids, monoterpines, lipids and carbohydrates.
18. EXAMPLE: ECHINACEA, ECHINACEA ANGUSTIFOLIA AND PURPUREA
18.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Echinacea is typically administered in a dose of 900 mg per day. It is often administered in the form of a tincture (1:5) prepared with 50% ethanol. Echinacea is administered in the form of tablets or capsules and there the dose is 1 g three times daily. Echinacea has been approved by the German Commission E Monograph (B Anz . No. 162, dated August 29, 1992) .
Echinacea angus tifolia , often called purple cornflower, is a plant of North American origin. Native Americans have used extracts from this plant for wound healing (antibiotic) and as an anti-inflammatory agent. Freshly squeezed juices of leaves and roots from this plant have been approved by the German government for the treatment of recurrent infections of respiratory and urinary tracts. Liquid Echinacea preparations have been shown to have immune stimulatory activity when administered orally or parenterally. It is believed that the activation of splenocytes may contribute to the extract's ability to enhance the activity of granulocytes and phagocytes.
For fingerprinting in accordance with the present invention, green leaves and roots are cut and frozen at less than -100°C. The mixture is then pulverized and extracted with a known volume of water. This procedure is preferred to retain the maximum amounts of components . The components are a mix of volatile oils, glycosides, amides and polyacetylenes.
18.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Echinacea is one of the most popular botanical products available.
One of the major proprietary products is Echinacin™, by Madaus AG (Koln, Germany) , and a similar product is sold in the U.S. as Echinaguard™, by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) .
Also, a powdered extract of Echinacea angustifolia is available (min. 4-5% echinosides) from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) . Other suppliers include Trout Lake Farm, PhytoPharmica, Herbal Cnoice-Boatalia, Shaklee, Botalia Gold, Nature's Herbs, Nature's Way, Flora Laboratories, and Herb Pharm. 18.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications of Echinacea are many. The primary indication is increasing resistance to infection, colds, etc., in the upper respiratory tract. Other indications are superficial wound healing, treatment of recurring urinary tract infections or respiratory tract infections, herpes simplex, anti-inflammatory activity and anti-bacterial activity.
18.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis is performed as described in the mistletoe experiments above using Sephadex™ chromatography. Alternatively, reverse phase C-18 chromatography or GPC chromatography may also be used. There are two major categories of bioactive components in Echinacea, the non- polar material that is extracted with chloroform and the polar component which is in the ethanol or aqueous fraction. The non-polar lipophilic constituents include various anions as described by Bauer and Foster (Bauer and Foster, 1991, Planta Med . 5J:447-449) . The polar components include the alkamides and the polysaccharides (Bauer and Remiger, 1989, Planta Med. 55:367-371; Steinmuller et al . , 1993, J. Immunopharmacol . 15(5) : 605-614) .
18.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The bioactivity of the Echinacea total extract and fractions are analyzed in an assay which measures the modulation of the binding of [125I] tumor necrosis factor-α (TNF-α) to human TNF-α receptors. U-937 (human histiocytic lymphoma) cells are used to prepare membranes in modified Tris HCl buffer (pH 8.6) using standard techniques. A 200 μg aliquot is incubated with 62 pM [125I] TNF-α for 3 hours at 4°C. Non-specific binding is estimated in the presence of 50 nM TNF-α. Membranes are filtered and washed 3 times and the filters are counted to determine [12SI] TNF-α specifically bound. Compounds are screened at 10 μM. (Maloff and Delmendo, 1991, Agen ts and Actions 3± : 32-34) .
Assay Reference Data:
Kd 37 pM
Bmax: 11 pM mg protein
Specific Binding: 65%
Compound IC50 (nM) Ki ( nM nH
Interleukin- - lα >500 - - ( IL- lα )
*TNF-α 0 . 084 0 . 032 1 . 2
TNF- β 0 . 714 0 . 27 1 . 0
'Indicates standard reference agent used.
Another clinical indication of Echinacea is anti- inflammatory activity. The anti-inflammatory activity may be analyzed using a variety of methods. Three in vi tro assays that are used include the cyclooxygenase-1, cyclooxygenase-2 and lipoxygenase assay, described in the Saw Palmetto section above. Alternatively, arachidonate metabolites may be analyzed following the procedure of Wagner et al . , 1989, (Planta Med . 5_5: 566-567) . Alternatively, in vivo assays such as the rat paw assay or the mouse ear assay are performed as described in the Chamomile section or as in literature preparations (Tragni et al . , 1985, Chem . Toxic . 2J3(2) :317- 319) .
The extract is separated into basic classes of components following the procedure set forth in FIG. 3. Each separated class of components is subjected to two types of bioassays (as well as the original extract) . The first asεay measures the activation of spleen cells in C57BL/6 mice. The mice are sensitized with P815Y lymphoma and treated with different doses of the sterile extract or specific components. After 11 days post lymphoma cell inoculation, the spleens are harvested and splenocytes used to challenge P815Y lymphoma cells loaded with 51Cr. The release of the radioactive 51Cr from tumor cells provides a measure (radioactive counts) of the activation of splenocytes (the assay syεtem) . A bioassay for a secondary clinical indication, antibacterial activity, is performed in cultures of E. coli using the turbidity of growing E . col i as a measure of their growth. Lack of turbidity in the presence of a given test extract or its components provides an indication of 0 antibacterial activity.
18.5.1 BIOASSAY FOR MACROPHAGE ACTIVATION
Echinacea extract and its polysaccharides can stimulate 5 macrophage activity. In experimental systems, macrophages can be obtained by i.p. injection of mice with 2-3 ml. of 2% starch or thioglycolate. After 4-5 days peritoneal cells of the mice are collected with i.p. injection of 5 ml. PBS. The buffer is removed with a syringe and the harvested cells are 0 collected by centrifugation and incubated at 37°C in RPMI 1640 medium containing 10% fetal calf serum. After one (1) hour, non-adherent cells are discarded and the remainder used for testing. The macrophages are treated with different concentrations of Echinacea extract and the Echinacea 5 fractions in the culture media and activation qualified by the cytotoxicity against 51Cr loaded P815 cells as targets (Stimpel et al . , Infection and Immunity, 46:845-849) .
18.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC, GPC 0
The most bioactivity associated components ( e . g . terpenoids) are separated by GC, GC/MS or HPLC technology into individual components which are used to provide fingerprints in accordance with the present invention. 5 In hydroalcoholic preps the following compoundε are found: echinacosides, arabinogalactan, heteroxylan (activity potentiated by isolutylamides, chicoric acid) . The detailed analysis of the chemically-active components of Echinacea is performed using published procedures (Bauer and Foster, 1991; Bauer and Reminger, 1989; Bauer et al . , 1989, Zei t . fur Phyto therapi e 10:43-48) .
19. EXAMPLE: EVENING PRIMOSE, OENOTHERA BLENNIS
19.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The drug evening primrose is the oil expressed from the seeds. It is native to North America, but widely naturalized everywhere, and a member of the primrose family. The seeds have about 14% oil content of which the oil is cis linoleic acid (50-70%) . The next most prevalent component is gamma- linoleic acid (7-10%) . The primary active component is thought to be gamma-linoleic acid (GLA) . The dose for GLA supplementation conditions is 600-6,000 mg per day for atopic eczema. The dosage is 250 mg capsules taken twice daily.
19.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of evening primrose oil. One well known product is called Efamol m or Evening Primrose Oil™, by Efamol Research Inc., a subsidiary of Scotia Holdings (Kentville, Nova Scotia, Canada) . Another product is known as Health From the Sun Evening Primrose Oil™ capsules, by PGE Canada (Saskatoon, Saskatchewan, Canada) - which are made with a "hexane-free extraction process" . Additional EPO products are: Epogam™ and Gammaoil™. (Morse et al . , 1989, Br. J. of Dermatology, 121 : 75-90) , Royal Brittany Evening Primrose Oil™, available through American Health.
19.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications for using evening primrose are many, including cardiovascular disease, cancer, rheumatoid arthritis, premenstrual syndrome, multiple sclerosis, atopic eczema and other topical diseases. Minor indications include diabetes, hepatoprotectant for alcoholics, autoimmune diseases, childhood hyperactivity, treating chronic inflammation, treating ethanol-induced toxicity, treating acute alcohol withdrawal syndrome, ichthyosis vulgaris, 5 scleroderma, Sjogren's syndrome, Sicca syndrome, brittle nails, mastalgia, psychiatric syndromes, tardive dyskinesia, ulcerative colitis, migraine headaches, and liver cancer. The primary clinical indication of interest is the treatment of eczema (Bordoni et al . , 1987, Drugs Exptl . Clin . Res . 10 14 (4) :291-297) . The effectiveness against eczema is believed to be due to GLA. Prostaglandins, particularly PGE^ seem to be involved in the regulation of the T lymphocytes and patients with atopic eczema typically have a low PGEj level .
Other workers have reported that evening primrose oil is " effective in reducing mastagyna or breast pain (Gateley and Mansel, 1991, Bri tish Medical Bulletin 4J7(2) :284-294) . In addition, evening primrose oil has been reported to be effective in experimental models for diabetes (Stevens et al . , 1993, Prostaglandins, Leucotrins and Essential Fa tty 20 Acids 4_9:699-706) . Lastly, evening primrose oil has been reported to act as an immunosuppressive agent (U.S. Patent Nos. 3,993,775 and 4,058,594, both to Williams) .
25 19.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis for evening primrose is performed by flash chromatography as described in the Saw Palmetto experiments above.
30
19.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
Biological analysis is performed in two manners . The first method is studying platelet activating factor binding. The second method is to study platelet aggregation using 35 blood from rabbits. The analysis is performed as described below. 19.5.1 PLATELET ACTIVATING FACTOR, PLATELET AGGREGATION
Venous blood obtained from male or female New Zealand derived albino rabbits weighing 2.5-3 kg is mixed with one- tenth volume of trisodium citrate (0.13 M) and centrifuged at room temperature for 10 min at 220 g. Evening primrose oil and fractions at (30 μM) are analyzed for induced aggregation of the supernatant platelet rich plasma by more than 50% within 5 min, relative to 5 nM platelet activating factor- acether (PAF-acether) at 37°C as measured by an optical aggregometer; induced aggregation of >50% , indicates possible PAF receptor agonist activity. At sample concentrations where no significant agonist activity is seen, ability to reduce the PAF-acether-induced maximum non- reversible aggregation response by more than 50% indicates PAF receptor antagonist activity (Nunez et al . , 1986, Eur. J. Pharmacol . 123 : 197-205) .
Agonist (#46300) ECC (μM)
*PAF (Platelet Activating 0.0018 Factor)
Antagonist (#46301) EC 50 [ μM)
Nectandrin A (BN- -52021) 3.3
CGS-12970 26
CV-3988 10
Kadsurenone (L- -651108) 1.7
L-652731 0.83
L-659989 0.33
RP-48740 17
SRI-63441 1.7
'WEB-2086 0.11
'Indicates standard reference agent used.
CGS-12970=3-methyl-2- (3-pyridinyl) -IH-indole-l-octanoic acid; CV-3988=3- (4-hydroxy-7-methoxy-10-0x0-3, 5, 9-trioxa-ll-aza-4- phosphanonacos-1-yl) -thiazolinium; L-652731=2R,5R-di (3,4,5- trimethoxyphenyl) -tetrahydrofuran; L-659989=pyro-2- aminoadipy1-histidy1-thiazolidine-4-carboxamide; WEB-2086=3- (4- [2-chlorophenyl] -9-methyl-6H-thieno [3, 2-f] [1, 2,4] - triazolo- [4 , 3-a] [1,4] -diazepine-2-yl) 1- (4-morpholinyl) -1- propanone .
19.5.2 PLATELET ACTIVATING FACTOR In this assay the evening primrose oil and fractions are analyzed by measuring the binding of [3H]platelet activating factor (PAF) to PAF receptors. Platelets of male or female New Zealand derived albino rabbits weighing 2.5-3 kg are prepared in modified Tris-HCl pH 7.5 buffer using standard techniques. A 50 μg aliquot of membrane is incubated with 0.4 nM [3H] PAF for 60 minutes at 25°C. Non-specific binding is estimated in the presence of 1 μM PAF. Membranes are filtered and washed 3 times and the filters are counted to determine [3H] PAF specifically bound. Samples are screened at 10 μM. (Hwang et al . , 1983, Biochemistry 22.: 4756-4763) .
Assay Reference Data:
Kd 0.73 nM
Bmax: 4.6 pmol/mg protein
Specific Binding: 93%
Compound IC50 (nM) Ki (nM) nH
*PAF 9 5.8 1.0
WEB-2086 110 71 0.8
*Indicates standard reference agent used.
WEB-2086=3- (4- [2-chlorophenyl] -9-methyl-6tf-thieno [3 , 2- f] [1, 2, 4] -triazolo- [3 , 3-a] [1, 4] -diazepine-2-yl) 1- (4- morpholinyl) -1-propanone The immune activity of the evening primrose oil may be studied using the prostanoid FT assay as described in the aloe section above.
19.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Chemical analysis is performed using HPLC for the linoleic acid and other essential fatty acids (Cisowski et al . , 1993, Phytoterapia £4(2) : 155-162) . The chemicals are also analyzed as described in the Saw Palmetto experiment above .
Essential fatty acids, gamma linoleic acid, cis linoleic acid are the primary components.
20. EXAMPLE: FEVERFEW, Tanacetum partJienium
20.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Feverfew is a member of the Aster family. It is native to Europe but now naturalized both in North and South America. The herb is typically administered in the form of the dried leaves in tablet or capsule form. A typical average daily dose is 125 mg of leaves having a minimum content of 0.2% parthenolid.
20.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Feverfew. One of the major proprietary products in the U.S. is known as Mygrafew™, by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) . Also, a powdered extract of Feverfew herb is available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) as well as from Natural Factors Nutritional Products, Ltd. (Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada) . Herbal Choice-Botalia, Herb Pharm, Nature's Way, Herbal Harvest, Botalia Gold and Herbal Laboratories also supply Feverfew. 20.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications for Feverfew are: migraine (topical) , exema, relief of menstrual pain, asthma, arthritis, circulatory complaints, sight problems, weariness ^ and sensitivity to light. The primary indication for which it has been approved in France and Canada is treatment of migraine. The Canadian authorities have approved labeling with the claim "used as a prophylactic against migraines." The Canadian product is required to contain 0.2% parthenolid 0 (Awang, 1987, The Pharmaceu ti cal Journal , 239 :487) .
Feverfew has also been the subject of clinical studies for arthritis (Pattrick et al . , 1989, Annals of Rheuma ti c
Disease, 4_8:547-549) . This study has found that there were no important differences between the control group and those receiving Feverfew but all of the patients had "inadequately controlled inflammatory joint syndromes" and were not responding well before the study started. The authors also note possible benefits of Feverfew in osteoarthritis or soft tissue lesions. An alcoholic tincture of Feverfew may be 0 used topically for eczema.
20.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis of Feverfew extracts is 5 performed using reverse phase chromatography as described above in the St. John's Wort section.
20.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS 0 A biological analysis of Feverfew is based on the noted inhibition of prostaglandins synthesis, the prevention of arachidonic acid formation, the inhibition of in vi tro aggregation of platelets, and serotonin 5HT2 inhibition. The serotonin assay is performed as described above in the St. John's Wort section. The platelet aggregation assays are performed as described above in the Evening Primrose section. Extracts of Feverfew may also be analyzed studying granule secretion in blood platelets and polymorphonuclear leucocytes . Studying both chloroform and methanol extracts and aqueous buffer extracts, Feverfew consiεtently inhibited platelet aggregation but not thromboxane synthesis (Heptinstal et al . , May 11, 1985, Lancet 1071-1073) .
20.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Tne chemical analysis is performed using HPCL aε deεcribed in the St. John'ε Wort section above.
The primary chemical components of Feverfew are sesquiterpenoids, particularly, parthenolid (0.12-1.27%) . The leaves contain sesquiterpenoids: artecanin, canin, chrysanthemolide, chrysanthemonin, 10-epi-canin, lβ- hydroxyarbusculin, 8β-hydroxyreynosin, 3jS- hydroxyparthenolide, magnoliolide, parthenolide (up to 85% of sesquiterpene content) , reynosin, santamarin, seco- tanapartholide A, tanaparthin, tanaparthin-lα, 4α-epoxide, tanaparthin- Iβ , 4/3-epoxide (Leung & Foster, 1996) .
21. EXAMPLE: GARLIC, Allium safcivum
21.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND Garlic as either the dried or the fresh bulbs of All ium sa tivm of the lily family has been grown throughout the world and has been cultivated for more than 5,000 years. An essential oil is also available from garlic.
21.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercia suppliers of garlic. Some of the major products are Kyolic™ garlic capsules, by Wakanuga Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. (Osaka, Japan - subsidiary in Mission Viejo, Ca) , and Garlinase 4000™ by Enzymatic Therapy (Green Bay, Wisconsin) . Garlic powder tablets are also available from Lichtwer Pharma, GmbH (Germany) and garlic capsules are available from Natural Factors Nutritional Productε, Ltd. (Burnaby, Britiεh Columbia, Canada) . Shaklee, Herbal Choice-Botalia, Nature's Way, Sunsource, PhytoPharmica, Lichtwer, Bayer Consumer also supply garlic.
21.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
Garlic has many clinical activities. Garlic has many activities including antibacterial, antifungal, antithrombonic and hypotensive activity. It also activates fibrinolysis and is an anti-inflammatory.
Garlic has also been studied for the treatment of high blood pressure, atherosclerosis, hypoglycemia, digestive ailments, colds, flu, bronchitis and blood cholesterol and triglyceride lowering activity (Foεter, 1991, "Garlic: Alium Sativum, " Botanical Series No. 311 American Botanical Counsel: Austin Texas, pg. 1-7) . The hypoglycemic activity has been studied in a rat model (Kamanna and Chandrasekhar, 1984, Indian J. Med . Res . 21:580-583) . There it was observed that the hypocholesteremic activity of garlic is only in the essential oil fraction. Others have reported that Garlic reduces thrombocyte aggregation in a clinical study (Kiesewetter et al . , 1991, Int . J. Clin . Pharm . 29 (4) :151- 155) . The patients in that study received 800mg of garlic powder (four tablets at 200mg, Lichtwer Pharma GmbH) .
21.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS The fractional analysis of garlic is performed using supercritical C02 chromatography or reverse phase chromatograph.
The chromotography is performed using SFC-FSE™ grade C? (Air Products and Chemicals Inc.; Allentown, PA) with a 5% phenymethyl poysiloxane column. 21.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS Platelet aggregation, PAF, fibrinolysis, hepatocytes to measure cholesterol secretion
The biological analysis of garlic is performed using the platelet activating factor for assay and the platelet aggregation assay as described above in the Evening Primrose Section.
21.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS GC-MS, HPLC
The chemical components in garlic include alliin, ajoenes and various other sulfur containing compounds. The analysis is performed using GC-MS or HPLC. The HPLC analysis is done using published procedures (Iberl et al . , 1990, Planta Med . 5£:320-326) . The chemical anaysis of garlic is also performed using supercritical fluid chromotography - mass spectroscopy (Calvey et al. , 1994) .
Garlic contains 0.1-0.36% (usually ca. 0.2% volatile oil, alliin (S-allyl-L-cysteine sulfoxide), S-methyl-L- cysteine sulfoxide, enzymes ( e . g . , alliinase, peroxidase, and myrosinase) , ajoenes (E,Z-ajoene, E, Z-methylajoene, and dimethylajoene) , protein (16.8%, dry weight basis) , minerals, vitamins (thiamine, riboflavin, niacin, etc.) , lipids, amino acids, and others. The volatile oil contains allicin (diallyldisulfide-S- oxide; diallyl thiosulfinate) , allylpropyl disulfide, diallyl disulfide, and diallyl trisulfide as the major components, with lesser amounts of dimethyl sulfide, dimethyl disulfide, dimethyl trisulfide, allylmethyl sulfide, 2,3,4- trithiapentane, and other related sulfur compounds. Other volatile compounds present include citral, geraniol, linalool, and α- and β-phellandrene. Protaglandins A2 and Fla were recently isolated from a homogenized garlic extract (Leung and Foster, 1996) . 22. EXAMPLE: GINKGO, Ginkgo bilboa
22.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND:
ORAL AND INTRAVENOUS FORMS
Ginkgo is based on the dried leaves of the Ginkgo bilboa plant, a member of the Ginkgo family. Traditionally Ginkgo has been reported for use as an anti-periodic antiseptic, hemostatic diuretic and tonic.
22.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Ginkgo preparations are among the most popular botanical products available. Egb 761, by IPSEN Research Laboratories (Paris, France) is a commercial extract sold under the brand names Tebonin™, Tanakan™ and Rokan™, and has been used extensively in various European clinical trials. Another ginkgo extract by IPSEN, LI 1370, is sold under the brand name Kaveri . Ginkgo bilboa dry extract is available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) and is standardized to contain 24% total ginkgoflavonglycosides, 6% ginkgolides and bilobalide. The extract is also available from Natural Factors
Nutritional Products, Ltd. (Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada) , Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) , and Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany), Herbal Choice-Botalia, Thompson Nutritional, Hudson, NaturaLife, Botalia Gold, Nature's Resource, Herb Pharm, PhytoPharmica, Nature's Way, Tebonin™ (Schwabe, Germany) , Rokan™ (Intersan, Germany) and PhytoPharmica.
22.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The daily dose for Ginkgo is 120-160mg of standardized leaf extract. It has also been used for situations involving inflammation of mucous membranes, hemorrhoids, nasal congestions, sore gums, sore eyes, wounds, sores, acne, dandruff and ringworm. It has also been used in cancer.
The clinical use of Ginkgo has recently been reviewed (Cleijen and Knipchild, 1992, Lancet 340 :1136-1139) . A primary indication is increasing blood flow. In particular, increasing cerebral blood flow. Ginkgo has also been reported for tinnitus, peripheral vascular disease, intermittent claudication, reduced functional capacity and vigilance (cerebral circulatory disturbances) , retinopathy, memory deficits, dizziness, vertigo. Compositions of ginkgo components and uses have been reported in the patent literature (U.S. Patent No. 5,246,216 Bombardelli et al . reporting the use as an anti-infective, particularly for pneumocystis carinii and U.S. Patent No. 5,202,313, Bombardelli et al . to bilobalide derivatives) .
22.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS Because the chemical components are flavinols, flavones, sesquiterpenes, diterpenes, monoterpenes, ginkgolides and their carbohydrate derivatives, the fractional analysis was performed on a C18 Liquid Chromatography System.
22.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
Ginkgo acts as a free radical scavenger, inhibits platelet activating factor (PAF) , causes EEG changes, reduces capillary fragility, and increase blood fluidity. The bio-activity of the Ginkgo extract and the Ginkgo fractions may be analyzed using the platelet activating factor assays, free radical scavenger assays measuring and increases in blood fluidity.
The Ginkgo fractions, extracts and raw material are analyzed using the platelet activating factor assays as described above in the Evening Primrose section.
22.6. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS Chemical analysis of Ginkgo is performed using GC-MS and HPLC. The primary components are flavonol and flavone (mostly quercetin and kaempferol) glycosides, bilobalaide (sesquiterpene) , isoginkgetin, ginkolide A, B, C, M & J (diterpene lactone derivatives) , 6-hydroxykynurenic acid, shikimic acid, protocatechuic acid, vanillic acid, para- hydroxybenzoic acid, proanthrocyanidines, heterosides, bioflavones, sciopitysin, ginkgetin, bilobetin and ginkgolic acid.
23. EXAMPLE: GINSENG (Asian), Panax Ginseng 23.1. PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Ginseng is a dried root of the Asian Ginseng or the American Ginseng, both members of the Ginseng family. It is rare and wild but it is extensively cultivated in China and Korea.
23.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Ginseng is arguably the most popular botanical product available around the world. Some of the products are Ginsun™ by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) , GS-500™ by Enzymatic Therapy (Green Bay, Wisconsin) , and Ginseng Softgels™ by Natural Factors Nutritional Products, Ltd. (Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada) . Powdered Ginseng extracts are available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) . Ginseng dry extract IDB is available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) and is standardized to contain 7% ginsenosideε. Ginseng is also available through the following companies: Shaklee, Lichtwer, Sunsource, Nature's Resource,Herbal Choice-Botalia, Nature's Way, NaturaLife, Herbal Harvest, Botalia Gold and PhytoPharmica.
23.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
Typically, Ginseng is administered in a daily dosage of
1 to 2 g of root in an appropriate formulation. It is has been the subject of approval in the German Commission E. Monograph No. 11 dated January 17, 1991. Ginseng is a complex mixture of various components including: ginsenosides which have varied effects on cardiovascular and nervous systems (Brekhman and Dardymov, 1969, Ann . Rev. Pharmacol . 2:419-430) . It shows different activity in the cardiovascular system (Kaku et al . , 1975, Arzneim . Forsch . 25_:539-547) .
Ginseng also shows anti-cancer activity. One study reported that it protected cultured cells from ionizing radiation (Benhur and Fulder, 1981, Am . J. Chinese Med . £(1) : 48-56) . There, they reported the Ginseng's ability to increase radiation resistance in cell culture. Others have reported activity as a radioprotective in mice (Yonezaw, 1976, J. Radia tion Res . 17:111) .
Others have reported a variety of central nervous system effects. (Petkov, 1959, Arzneim . Forsch . (Drug Res . ) .9:305- 311) . It has been shown to delay the onset of convulsions and prolong phenobarbyl' s sleeping time. It also stabilizes sleep and wakefulness cycles in food deprived rats (Lee et al., 1990, Neurosci . Let . 111:217) .
23.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
Fractional analysis is performed on a reverse phase (RP) column using a C-18 column used with an acetonitrile water gradient using the methods described above.
23.5 BIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS The biological analysis of Ginseng for the clinical condition of stress release is performed in an assay studying the activation of PC12 cells. The procedure followed is as described in the literature (Mohri et al . , 1992, Planta Med . 5_8:321-323) . They report that the lipophilic components of Ginseng are able to activate neuronal cells in their model. 23.6 DEPRESSION, TETRABENAZINE
Ginseng, Ginseng extract and fractions are administered p.o. (30 mg/kg) to a group of 3 ICR derived mice weighing 22 ± 2 g 30 minutes after injection of tetrabenazine methane ^ sulfonate (100 mg/kg i.p.) and body temperature is recorded 60 minutes later. Reduction of tetrabenazine-induced hypothermic response by 50 % or more (≥50) is considered significant and may indicate antidepressant activity. (Gylys et al., 1963, Annals N. Y. Acad. Sci . 107: 899-913) . 0
Compound ED50 mg/kg p.o.
Amitriptyline 3
Amphetamine 1
Bupropion 30
Clonidine >30
Desipramine 1 5 Fluoxetine >30
'Imipramine 3
Mianserin 30
Pargyline 10
Salbutamol >30
Trany1cypromine 3 0
'Indicates standard reference agent used.
Alternatively, the anti-stress activity of Ginseng is evaluated in a rat in vivo model or a mouse in vivo model. 5 Experiments studying Ginseng components in these animal models have been reported in the literature (Nabata et al . , 1973, Japan J. Pharmacol . 23_:29-41) . They reported on various behavioral studies on mice and rats including the conditioned avoidance test, the motor coordination test and 0 the pole climbing test.
Other researchers have reported that components of Ginseng bind to the GABA-A and the GABA-B receptors (Kimura et al., 1994, Gen . Pharmacol . 23(1) : 193-199) . 23.7 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC
The chemical analysis of Ginseng is performed by HPLC or TLC. Ginseng contains a variety of εubstituents including sterols (betasitosterol and betaglucoside) , 7 to 9% Ginseng polysaccharides, panaxins A through U, pectin, free sugars, biomins, polyacetylines, polypeptides. The sappinins are called ginsenosides by the Japanese researchers and panaxosides by Russian workers. There are at least 18 sappines found in Asian Ginseng. They are all triterpenoids. Six panaxosides have been reported. Ginseng oil also is reported to contain sesquiterpeneuiturpines and there are at least 56 closely related saponins called gynosaponins (Leung and Foster, 1996) .
24. EXAMPLE: GOLDENSEAL, Hydrastis canadensis
24.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Goldenseal is a perennial found in the deep woods from Vermont to Arkansas in the U.S. It is a member of the Buttercup family. Preparations are traditionally used for their anti-microbial, astringent and anti-hemorrhagic activity.
24.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of suppliers of Goldenseal. Some of the products are: Wild American Goldenseal Root™ capsules, by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) , and Goldenseal Root Powdered Extract™, by Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) , which is standardized to contain 5% total alkaloids and 5% hydrastine. Goldenseal extracts standardized to 5% Hydrastine are also available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) . 24.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
There have been few clinical studieε of Goldenseal. However, it does contain a great deal of berberine which is an antibacterial and amoebicidal agent. Particularly, its often used for the treatment of mucosal inflammation. It has been approved in Germany under the preparation named Gingivitol (the content of the approved drug is specified to have hydrastine from 1.5% to not less than 2.5%) .
Total dosage is 0.5σ of dried root or 2 ml to 4 ml of tincture (1:10, 60% ethanol) 3 times a day (Bradley, 1992) .
24.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis of Goldenseal is performed using either C-18 reverse phase (RP) chromatography or silica gel chromatography. The conditions are as described above.
24.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS MAO-A, SEROTONIN UPTAKE The biological analyεiε of Goldenseal for the premenstrual syndrome clinical indication is performed as described in the oxytocin assay described in the Black Cohaεh section above. Goldenseal may also be analyzed using the MAO-A assay and the serotonin uptake assay described in the St. John's Wort section.
For clinical use as a mouthwash, the anti-infective, anti-bacterial activity may be measured as described previously.
24.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Goldenseal contains active principles including iosquinoline alkaloids consisting mainly of hydrastine (1.5- 4%) and berberine (0.5-6%) , with lesser amounts of canadine (tetrahydroberberine) , canadaline, 1-α-hydrastine, 5- hydroxytetrahydroberberine, and other related alkaloids also present. Other constituents include meconin, chlorogenic acid, lipids with 75% unsaturated and 25% saturated fatty acids, resin, starch, sugar, and a small amount of volatile oil (Leung and Foster, 1996) . The chemical analysis of berberine is done by TLC or HPLC. The bio-active components include berberine and hydraεtine. These components are primarily isoqinoline alkaloids from both the Rhizome and the root .
25. EXAMPLE: GREEN TEA, Camellia sinensis
25.1. PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
C. Sinesis Trauma , Green tea is a large tree with evergreen leaves native to Eastern Asia where it is extensively cultivated. The dried leaves of Green tea have been used to prepare beverages for several thousand years. The tea has been used medicinally for centuries and is regarded as a cure for cancer in China.
25.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a number of Green tea suppliers around the world. Green tea powdered extracts are available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) and are standardized to contain 15% tannins and 3-10% caffeine. Green tea extracts are also available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) and are standardized to contain 80% polyphenols.
25.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
Green tea haε many clinical indicationε including anti¬ cancer activity, lowering cholesterol activity, platelet aggregation activity and blood thinning activity. Green tea has also been implicated in increasing longevity. A primary indication is anti-cancer activity which has been reported in vi tro and in vivo (Wang and Wu, 1991, IARC Sci . Publ . 105 : 546) . Others have reported that Green tea modified mutagen-induced chromosomal aberrations (Imanishi et al . , 1991, Mu ta t . Res . 259 (1) :79) . Green teas has also been implicated in decreased risk of colon cancer and inhibition of small intestine carcinogenisis (Kono et al . , 1991, J". Clin . Epidemiol . 4_4 (11) :1255; lto and Imaida, 1992, Tera togenesis Carcineg. Mu tagen . 12(2) :79) .
Green tea has also been associated with a decrease in total cholesterol levels (Kono et al . , 1992, Prev. Med. 21(4) :526) . Lastly, Green tea has been implicated in improving longevity of Japanese women (Sadakata et al . , 1992, Tohoku J. Exp . Med. 166 (4) :475) . Green tea also has been shown to be preventative of dental caries (Rosen et al . ,
1984, J. Dent . Res . £3 (5) :658) . The blood thinning activity has been described recently in the published literature (Ali et al. , 1990, Prostaglandins, Leukotrienes and Essen tial Fa tty Acids 4_0:281-283) .
25.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS The fractional analysis of Green tea is performed using a variety of different methods including differential extraction (International Publication No. WO 96/28178 Bombardelli et al . ) . Fractional analysis is performed using Sephadex™ LH-20 chromatography using published procedures (Cattell and Nursten, 1976, Phyto Chemistry 15:1967-1976; Sagesaka-Mitane et al . , 1990, Chem . Pharm . Bull . 3_8_(3) : 790- 793) . Alternatively, fractional analysis may also be performed using silica gel or polyacrylamide (Chkhikvishvli,
1985, Chem. Nat Compounds 20(5) :629-630) .
25.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
For the anticancer clinical indication, there are a variety of bio-assays that may be performed both in vi tro and in vivo . A P450 assay is performed (Obermeier et al . , 1990, Xenobiotica 25.(6) : 575-584) . In that study the workers studied the effects of bioflavonins on hepatic P450 activities in rat and human liver microsomes. Alternatively, the anti-cancer activity in vi tro is studied by the chemical anti-oxidant activity (Tanizawa et al . , 1984 Chem. Pharm . Bull . 22 (5) =2011-2014) . Alternatively, the L1210 cancer model described in the mistletoe section above may be used.
25.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
The chemical analysis of Green tea is performed using HPLC, GPC or TLC. The primary bioactive components fall into the following chemical categories: alkaloids, benzonoids, terpenes, sesquiterpene, diterpenes, monoterpenes and carbohydrates. Most of the studies have focused on the catechin (Goto et al . , 1996, J. Chrom. A749 :295-299) . The TLC analysis of Green tea is performed as described in a recent publication (Minpeigen, 1991, Phytotherapy Res . 5_:239- 240) .
26. EXAMPLE: HAWTHORN, Crataegus laevigata
26.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The botannical Hawthorn is based on the dried leaves of flowers of Cra tigus laevigata which is harvested both wild or from cultivated populations in Europe. It is also used in China and in America. Hawthorns are members of the rose family.
In traditional Chinese medicine, the Hawthorn's fruits are used for digestion, to promote stomach function, to stimulate blood circulation and various stomach disorders. The traditional Chinese uses also include hypertension, hyperlipdemia and coronary heart disease.
26.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Hawthorn. Some of the major products are Heartcare™ and Wild European Hawthorn™, by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) , and Hawthorn Ticture, by Natural Factors Nutritional Products, Ltd. (Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada) . Hawthorn leaves and flowers powdered extract is available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) , and is standardized to contain 1.8-2.8% vitexin- hyperoside.
26.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
In Europe, the fruits, flowers and leaves are combinations used as astringents, antispasmodics, cardiotonics, diarrhetics, hypotensives and antiarrhythmics . American Indians also have used Hawthorn for gastrointeεtinal and circulation disorders. Hawthorn has been approved for use in Germany for cardiac insufficiency and bradyarrhythmia (German Commission E Monograph B Anz 1, dated January 3, 1989) . Clinical indications of Hawthorn also include increasing cardiac performance, treating senile heart conditions, treating mild forms of angina pectoris and dysrhythmia and lowering blood pressure (Occhiuto et al . , 1986, Planta Med. 23 - 52 ; Stepka and Winters, 1973; Lloydia , 3_6_:436) . Clinical studieε have also reported that it has an anti-arrhythmic effect, increases myocardium tolerance to oxygen deprivation and stimulus revascularization after myocardial ischemia (Guendjv, 1977, J?. Arnzeim. Forch, 27: 1576) .
26.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS Fractional analysis of Hawthorn is performed first by a separation of the aqueous and organic layers (Thompson et al . , 1974, J. Pharm . Sci . £3:193-6) , the fractions are then separated further on a C-18 column. 26.5 BIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS
The biological analysis of Hawthorn is performed using a variety of methods including a thromboxin A2 asεay, measurement of coronary vasodilation, measurement of cardiac muscle contractility and measurement of ventricle output velocity. The thromboxin A2 aεεay iε performed aε follows.
26.6 THROMBOXANE A2 In this assay the ability of Hawthorn extracts and fractions to modulate the binding of [3H]SQ-29548 to thromboxane A2 receptors is measured . Platelets of male or female New Zealand derived albino rabbits weighing 2.5-3 kg are prepared in modified Tris-HCl buffer (pH 7.2) using standard techniques. A 2 mg aliquot of membrane is incubated with 3 nM [3H] SQ-29548 for 45 minutes at 25°C. Non-specific binding is estimated in the presence of 1 μM BM 13505. Membranes are filtered and washed 3 times and the filters are counted to determine [3H] SQ-29548 specifically bound. Compounds are screened at 10 μM (Saussy et al . , 1986, J. Biol . Chem. 261 : 3025-3029; Hedberg et al . , 1988, J. Pharmacol . Exp . Ther . 245: 786-792) .
Assay Reference Data
Kα 4.2 nM pmax . 960 fmol/mg protein
Specific Binding: 95%
Compound ICS0(nM) Ki (nM) nH
Figure imgf000172_0001
'Indicates standard reference agent used. BM-13505= deltroban; SQ29548= (Is- [lα, 2β {5Z} , 3/3,4α] ) -7- (3- [ {2-phenylamino) carbonyl}hydrazino]methyl) -7- oxabicyclo [2.2.1. ] hepy-2-yl-5-heptanoic acid; U- 46619=llα, 9α-epoxymethano-PGH2
The myocardial effects of Hawthorn extracts may be analyzed using published procedures (Schusselr et al . , 1995, Annzeim . Forch . Drug Res . 4.5:11) . In one study isolated guinea pig hearts are analyzed for coronary flow, heart rate and left ventricle blood pressure as well as velocity of contraction and relaxation. The results of the study of the extracts are compared with hyperoside luteolin-7-glucoside and rutin. Hawthorn may alεo be εtudied for its protective effect against myocardial ischemia using procedures described in the literature (Lianda et al . , 1984, J. Trad. Chinese Med . 4.: 289- 292) . Hawthorn is studied using cultured rat heart cells and rat heart cells deprived of oxygen and glucose. Previous workers have shown that vitexin rhamnoside is active as a heart protective agent on the cultured cell assay.
26.7. CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC
C. laevigata and C. monogyna contain flavonoids, including hyperoside (hyperin) , quercetin, vitexin, vitexin- 4' -L-rhamno-D-glucoside, vitexin-4' -L-rhamnoside, vitexin-4'- 7-di-D-glucoεide, rutin, quercetin-3-rhamno-galactoside, and others. Xanthine, amines, proanthocyanidins are also present. (Leung and Foster, 1996) .
The chemical analysis of the hawthorn is performed using reverse phase HPLC aε deεcribed in the St. John'ε Wort experiments above. 27. EXAMPLE: IVY LEAF, Hederae foli um 27.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The ivy is native throughout Europe and the
Mediterranean. It is typically marketed in the form of the extract. It has been traditionally regarded as an anti¬ septic, astringent, cathartic, contraceptive, emetic, laxative, purgative, stimulant, vasoconstrictor, vasodilator and vermifuge. Ivy is also used for rheumatism sclerosis, scrofula and toothache.
27.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Commercially available ivy sources include Prospan™ (Engelhard, Germany) , Hedelix™ (Krewel Meuselbach, Germany) and Bronchofortan™.
27.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
Ivy has been approved in the German monographs for use in inflammation of the respiratory passages, treatment of chronic inflammatory bronchial conditions (German Commission E Monograph B Anz No. 122, dated July 6,1988) . The typical dose of ivy leaf is 0.3 grams of the drug or corresponding extract. It also has activity for osteoarthritis and GI distress. Ivy has expectorant activities diaphoretic and astringent activities. It may be used for dyspeptic complaints .
27.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
Fractional analysis of the ivy leaf extract is performed using reverse phase chromatography as described in the St. John's Wort experiments above. 27.5 BIOLOGICAL ANALYSIS
The biological analysis is performed using the ileum model to study secretolytic action and spasmolytic effects.
27.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC
The components present in Ivy include εaponins (2.5-6%) , α-hederin, oleanolic-acid glycoεideε, hederacoside C, rhamnose; flavonol glycosides, kaempferol 3-rutinoside; traces; sterols stigmasterol, sitosterol, cholesterol, campesterol, α-spinasterol, and 5α-stigma-7-en-3/?-ol; scopolin, chlorogenic acid, caffeic acid, the sesquiterpene hydrocarbons germacrene, /S-elemene, lobinol and antigenic catechols (Bisset, 1994) .
28. EXAMPLE: KAVA, Piper methyβticum
28.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Kava is also known as kava kava . It is a deciduous shrub which occurs throughout the South Pacific from Hawaii to New Guinea. The part that is used for the drug is the root stock.
28.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial supplierε of Kava. Some of the major products are Polynesian Kava Root, by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) , Antares™ (Krewel Meuselbach, Germany) , Laitan™ (Schwabe, Germany) and Kavatrol™, by Natrol (Chatsworth, California) . Kava root powdered extract is alεo available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) , and is standardized to contain 30% kavapyrones . 28.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
Kava has many biological activities. It has been used as a sedative for inεomnia, for nervousness, for stress and as a muscle relaxant. It has anti-spasmodic and anti- convulsive activities. The primary indications for kava are as a non-opiate analgesic.
Kava has been approved for use in conditions of nervous anxiety, stress and unrest. Kava is combined with pumpkin seed oil, Cucurbita semen , for use in the treatment of irritable bladder syndrome. Kava has been approved in the
German Commission E Monograph No. 101 (June 1, 1990) .
28.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis on kava is performed using reverse-phase chromatography on a C-18 column or flash chromatography on silica gel performed as described above, in the St. John's Wort and the Saw Palmetto sections above.
28.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS GABA
The biological analysis for Kava's activity is performed by studying the binding to the GABA' receptors both peripheral and central, the serotonin re-uptake assay and binding to dopamine receptors.
The analysis for binding to the GABA-A and GABA-B receptors and benzodiazepin receptors is performed using published procedures (Davies et al . , 1992, Pharm. and Toxin . 21:120-126) . In addition, the binding of the Kava extracts is also studied using a published displacement assay for the GABA-A receptor (Jusεoifie et al . , 1994, Psychopharmacology 116 :469-474) . 28.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Kava contains from 3-20% kavalactones . The kavalactones in the resin are α-pyrones bearing a methoxy group at carbon 4 and an aromatic styryl moiety at carbon 6, including kavain, 7, 8-dihydrokavain, 5, 6-dehydrokavain, yangonin,
5, 6 , 7, 8-tetrahydroyangonin, methyεticin, dihydromethysticin, 5, 6-dehydromethystincin, 5, 6-dihydroyangonin, 7,8- dihydroyangonin, 10-methoxy-yangonin, 11-methoxy-yangonin, 11-hydroxy-yangonin, hydroxykavain, and 11-methoxy-12- hydroxy-dehydrokavain. The rootstock alεo containε flavokavins A and B; the alkaloid pipermethystin; cepharadione A; ketones including cinnamalaketone, and methylene dioxy-3 ,4-cinnamalaketone; and an alcohol, dihydrokavain-5-ol . (Leung & Foster, 1996) .
29. EXAMPLE: LICORICE, Glycyrrhiza glabra
29.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND:
Licorice is a four to five foot shrub which grows in sub-tropical climates. Most commercial licorice is of the variety G. glabara . The drug consists of the dried rhizome and roots. It is a member of the pea family.
29.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of licorice. Powdered licorice root extract is available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) . Licorice dry extract, standardized to contain 5% glycyrrhizinic acid, is available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) , Lakriment™ (Knoll, Germany) , Suczulen™ (Dolorgiet, Germany) and Licorice Root 500™ is available from Natural Factors Nutritional Products, Ltd. (Burnaby, Britiεh Columbia, Canada) . 29.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications for licorice are used as an anti-ulcer medication, anti-inflammatory, anti-arthritic, as an expectorant and as anti-infective agent. The typical licorice dose is 5-15 g of finely cut or powdered root (calculated to contain 200-600 mg of glycyrrhizin) . The most common use is in fusions for the treatment of gastric- duodenal ulcers. Alternatively, the root juice (0.5-1 g for respiratory tract inflammation or 1.5 to 3 g for ulcers) are i "n" used. It has been approved by the German Commission E
Monograph No. 90 (May 15, 1985, updated March 13, 1990 and
April 4, 1991) .
Licorice constituents have been shown to have anti-HIV activity (Hatano et al . , 1988, Chem . Pharm. Bull . 36(6) : 2286- 2288) . Licorice has also been εhown to be active against Streptococcus which is responsible for dental caries (Segal et al., 1985, J. Pharm. Sci . 74:79-81) .
20 29.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis of the components of licorice is performed using a reverse-phase C-18 column as described above.
25
29.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The biological analysis of the total licorice extract and the individual components of licorice is performed using the cyclooxygenase assay and the lipoxygenase assay and anti- 30 prostaglandin assays described above. Another bioassay that is performed is the 11-0 hydroxy steroid dehydrogenase assay (MacKenzie et al . , 1990, J". Clin . Endocrinol . Metab . 70 :1637- 1643) .
35 29.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC
It containε aε its major bioactive principle the triterpene glycoside glycyrrhizin (also known as glycyrrhizic or glycyrrhizinic acid) in concentrations ranging from 1 to 24%, depending on sources and methods of assay. Some have reported a 10-fold difference in glycyrrhizin values due solely to different assay methods has been reported. Glycyrrhizin on hydrolysis yields glycyrrhetinic (or glycyrrhetic) acid and two molecules of glucuronic acid.
Other constituentε of licorice include flavonoidε and isoflavonoids (licoflavonol, kumatakenin, licoricone, glabrol, glabrone, glyzarin, licoisoflavones A and B, licoisoflavanone, glycyrol, formononetin, liquiritigenin, liquiritin, neoliquiritin, rhamnoliquiritin, glyzaglabrin,
4 ' -7 ' -dihydroxyflavone, glaranine, etc.) , chalcones
(isoliquiritigenin, isoliquiritin, neoisoliquiritin, licuraside, rhamnoisoliquiritin, echinatin, licochalcones A and B, 4-hydroxychalcone, etc.) , coumarins (umbelliferone, herniarin, liqcoumarin, glycerin, etc.) , triterpenoids
(liquiritic acid, glycyrrhetol, glabrolide, isoglabrolide, licoric acid, 0-amyrin, 18-/3-glycyrrhetinic acid, etc.) , sterols (/S-sitosterol, stigmaεterol, 22,23- dihydrostigmasterol etc.) , 2-20% starch, 3-14% sugars
(glucose and sucrose) , lignin, amino acids (proline, serine, aspartic acid, etc.) , amines (asparagine, betaine, choline) , gums, wax, a volatile oil consisting of many aroma chemicals
(including acetol, 2-acetylfuran, propionic acid, 2- acetylpyrrole, furfuryl alcohol, benzaldehyde, pentanol, hexanol, trans-hex-3-en-l-ol, oct-l-en-3-ol, linalool, linalyl oxide, α-terpineol, butyrolactone, thujone, and fenchone, among others, none of which alone can account for the licorice flavor, and others. (Leung & Foster, 1996) .
The chemical analysis of licorice fractions is performed by HPLC. 30. EXAMPLE: MILK THISTLE, Silybum marianum also Carduus mar i anus, Carduus marianum
30.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Milk Thistle is a plant indigenous to Kashmir but is found in North America from Canada to Mexico. Milk Thistle is sold as a botanical in the form of the whole seeds and as an extract. It is traditionally used as a liver protectant .
30.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Milk Thistle is another extremely popular botanical product. Milk Thistle 250™ is available from Natural Factors Nutritional Products, Ltd. (Burnaby, British Columbia, Canada) and milk thistle powdered extract, standardized to contain 70%-80% Silymarin is available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc.
(Germany) . Milk Thistle extracts are also available from Bionorica (Germany) , Madaus AG (Germany) , and Klinger
(Germany) . The following companies also supply Milk Thistle: Herbal Choice-Botalia, NaturaLife, Herb Pharm, Nature's
Herbs, PhytoPharmica, Legalon™ (Madaus, Germany) , Silimarit™
(Bionorica, Germany) , Permixon™ (Pierre Fabre, Germany) and Nature's Way.
30.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
(1) Hepatoprotective, free radical scavenger, antioxidant, cirrhosis, hepatitis, dyspeptic complaints, liver/gall bladder complaints, loss of appetite
30.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis on Milk Thistle is performed using reverse-phase chromatography on a C-18 column or flash chromatography on silica gel. Both methods are performed as described above in the St. John's Wort and the Saw Palmetto sections, respectively. 30.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The biological analysis is performed studying cultured hepatocytes, c-AMP, β-Glucuronidase and liver enzyme levels.
30.5.1 ASSAY FOR INHIBITION OF /8-GLUCURONIDASE β-glucuronidase is a typical lysosomal enzyme which increases in the blood after liver damage or liver cancer. Thus, hepatoprotective effects of milk thistle and itε components is quantified by their inhibitory effects on this enzyme. The enzyme can be prepared from human feces as described (Kim et al . 1994 (Biol . Pharm. Bull . 1/7: 443-445) . For measuring the enzyme activity, the enzyme is incubated at 37°C (50 minutes) with 20 ul of 10 mM of p. nitophenyl-/3- glucuronide in 0.1 M phosphate buffer (pH 7.0) in presence or absence of inhibitor. The reaction is stopped by the addition of 0.25 N NaOH and measuring the absorbance of released p. nitrophenol at 405 nm.
30.5.2 ASSAY FOR THE INHIBITION OF CYCLIC-amp
PHOSPHODISTRASE (PDE)
In this assay C-AMP (0.1 mM) is incubated with PDE in a 40 mM Tris-Hel buffer (pH 7-8) for 10 minutes at 25°C in the presence of various amounts of milk thistle extracts and fractions as described by Koch et al . , 1985 (Meth. Find Exp .
Clin . Pharmacol . 1 : 409-413) . The reaction is stopped by the addition of chilled perchloric acid. The protein precipitate is centrifuged and the supernatant is assayed by
HPLC (reversed phase chromatography) . The inhibition of the enzyme is studied by reduced conversion of C-AMP to AMP.
30.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS TLC, HPLC
A flavanolignan complex, silymarin, was first isolated from the seeds in 1968. Silymarin (4-6% in ripe fruits) consists primarily of three flavanolignans, silybin (silibinin) , silychristin (silichristin) , and silidianin. Other flavanolignans include dehydrosilybin, 3- deεoxysilichristin, deoxysilydianin (silymonin) , siliandrin, εilybinome, εilyhermin, and neoεilyhermin. Other constituents include apigenin, silybonol; a fixed oil (16- 18%) , consisting largely of linoleic and oleic acids, plus myristic, palmitic, and stearic acids; betaine hydrochloride, triamine, histamine, and others (Leung and Foster, 1996) . Milk Thistle is analyzed using TLC and HPLC as deεcribed above.
31. EXAMPLE: PASSION FLOWER, Passiflora incarnata
31.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND The Paεεion Flower iε native to the Americas, and is cultivated in both subtropical and tropical regions. The drug is produced in the U.S., India and the West Indies.
31.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Passion Flower extracts. Passion flower dry extract is available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) , and is standardized to contain 3.5% flavonoids calculated as isovitexine. Powdered extracts are also available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) and is standardized to contain 4% flavonoids. It is also available from Passifloradragees Alsitan™ (Alistan, Germany) .
31.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The Passion Flower is used as a sedative treating anxiety, for difficulties in sleeping, restlessness, various nervous disorders. It is also used as an spasmolytic agent
(Paris, 1963, Ann . Pharm . Franc . 21:389) . The typical dosing regime is 4-8 g of drug taken daily. The neuropharmacology studies have indicated a central nervous system effect (Speroni and Minghetti, 1988, Plan ta Med . £4:488) .
31.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysiε of Paεεion Flower is performed using reverse-phase chromatography on a C-18 column or flash chromatography on silica gel. Both are performed as described above in the St. John's Wort and the Saw Palmetto sections, respectively.
31.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The biological analysis is for MAO, GABA A (peripheral, central) and the experiments are performed aε deεcribed above.
31.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC
Passion Flower contains small and highly variable amounts (<0.01-0.09%) of indole alkaloids, consisting mainly of harman, with lesser amounts of harmol, harmaline, harmine, and harmalol . Presence of the last four alkaloids have been disputed. Other constituents present include flavonoids (isovitexin 2"-/S-D-glucoside, isoorientin 2"-β-D-glucoside, apigenin, luteolin, quercetin, kaempferol, εchaftoεide, isoschaftoside, saponaretin, saponarin, vitexin, orientin, and rutin; a cyanogenic glucoside, gynocardin (0.01%) ; sugars (raffinose and sucrose predominant) ; sterols (stigmaεterol and sitosterol) ; n-non-acosane, and gum, among others. Maltol and ethyl maltol have been isolated from the plant. The coumarins umbelliferone and scopoletin have been detected in the root (Leung and Foster, 1996) . It is analyzed by HPLC. 32. EXAMPLE: PUMPKIN, CucurJbifcae semen 32.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The Pumpkin is variously known as vegetable marrow, summer and autumn squash, and is native to North America, but is cultivated worldwide. The dosing format requires use of whole or powdered seeds .
32.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Pumpkin seed extractε. Botanicalε International, a diviεion of Zuellig Botanicals, Inc. (Germany) offers two varieties: powdered extract with .02% phytosterols, and a soft extract with .5% phytosterols and 70% fatty acids. Also, pumpkin seed lipophilic extract is available from Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) . It is also available as Proεta Fink™ (Fink, Germany) and Cysto-Uregenin™ (Madaus, Germany) .
32.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS:
The main indication is for treating problems of micturition, especially asεociated with benign proεtrate hyperplaεia (BPH) . The clinical use is largely empirical, but there are reliable reports (Lutzelburger, Artzl . Praxis , 1974, 76:3278; Haefele, Artzl. Praxis, 1977, 79:3321) . The average daily dose is 10 g of seeds.
32.4. FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS The fractional analysis on Pumkin seeds and extracts is performed using reverse-phase chromatography on a C-18 column or flash chromatography on silica gel. Both are performed as described above in the St. John's Wort and the Saw Palmetto sections, respectively. 32.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
For the clinical indication of BPH, the primary assays for the anti-inflammatory activity are cyclooxygenase-1 and
2 and 5-lipoxygenase . The experiments are performed as
^ described in the Saw Palmetto section above. The other relevant bioassays for the BPH clinical condition are the androgen receptor binding assay and the 5-α-reductase aεsay.
These assays are performed as described above in the Saw
Palmetto section above. 0
32.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS
Pumpkin seeds contain 1% steroids, especially 24/S-ethyl- 5α-cholesta-7, 25 (27) -dien-3/3-ol and 24/?-ethyl-5α-cholesta-7- 5 trans-22, 25 (27) -trien-3/3-ol as essential components, and to some extent also sterol glucosides and Δ5- and Δ8-sterols; tocopherols (vitamin E) ; trace elements, particularly selenium, manganese, zinc, and copper; 35-40% fixed oil; ca/ 30% pectins; ca. 25-30% protein (Bisεet, 1994) . 0
33. EXAMPLE: PYGEUM, Pygeum afri canum
33.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The plant is found mainly in Africa, with production of 5 the bark in Cameroon. Extraction of ground dried bark with organic solvents and drying provides a concentrated powdered drug of varying constitution (Bonati, J. Ethnopharmacol . , 1991, 3_2:195-7) .
0
33.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial supplierε of Pygeum extracts. One major supplier is Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) which offers pygeum purified soft extract, which iε 5 standardized to contain 13% total sterols calculated as beta- sitosterol . Tadenan™ by DEBAT Laboratories (Garches, France) , Pronitol™by Inofarma (Madrid, Spain) , and Pygeum Capsuleε™ by Murdock Madauε Schwabe (Springville, Utah) are alεo popular.
33.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS 5
The main indication is similar to Pumpkin and Saw Palmetto, for treating problems of micturition, especially associated with benign prostrate hyperplasia (BPH) . A recently reported clinical trail of 56 days treatment in 134 o patients suffering from BPH, and treated with 25 mg of the drug in combination with stinging nettle was deemed both safe and efficacious. (Krzeski, Kazon, Borkowski, Witeska and Kuczera, 1993, Clin . Ther . , 15: 1011-20) .
5 33.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis on Pygeum is performed using reverse-phase chromatography on a C-18 column or flash chromatography on silica gel and are performed as described above in the St. John's Wort and the Saw Palmetto sections, 0 respectively.
33.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
For the clinical indication of BPH, the primary asεays 3 for the anti-mflammatory activity are cyclooxygenaεe-1 and -2 and 5-lipoxygenase bioassays. The experiments are performed as described in the Saw Palmetto section above. The other relevant bioassays for the BPH clinical condition are the androgen receptor binding assay and the 5-α-reductase assay. These assays are also performed as deεcribed above in the Saw Palmetto εection. Muscle contractility iε also measured.
5 33.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC, GC The chemical analysis is performed by HPLC and GC. The components include alkanes, fatty acids, sterols, and triterpenes.
34. EXAMPLE: ROSEMARY, Rosemarinus officinalis
34.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The Rosemary plant is native in the Mediterranean region, and is cultivated in many countries. The drug is produced in Spain, Morocco, Yugoslavia and Tunisia. Rosemary oil is produced by steam distillation of the leaves and leafy stems. The leaves are used fresh or dried, and can be extracted using ethanol.
34.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Rosemary leaf powder extract is available from Botanicals International, a division of Zuellig Botanicals, Ine. (Germany) .
34.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The main indication is for use as a carminative and stomachic in digestive upsets, flatulence, distenεion, appetite and gastric secretion stimulation. It iε alεo uεed as a choleretic. Externally, it is used in the form of an oil or linament for treatment of rheumatism as well as in local stimulation of circulation. The average daily does is 2-6 g of drug or 10-20 drops of the essential oil.
34.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis of the components of Rosemary is performed using a reverse-phase C-18 column as described above . 34.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The biological anlysis is performed using the following assays, Aldol-reductase, rat and mouse diabetes, db db mice, Ob /Ob mice, Zucker rats. The Aldol Reductase assay is ^ performed as follows.
34.5.1 ALDOSE REDUCTASE
Aldose reductase, a member of the monomer NADPH- 0 dependent aldo-keto reductase, is a rate-limiting enzyme in the polyol pathway which catalyses the reduction of various aldehydes. This includes reduction of the aldehyde form of glucose to its corresponding sugar alcohol sorbitol . Accumulation of sorbitol has been reported in the lens, 5 nerve, kidney and retina of diabetic animals. Large amounts of sorbitol cause osmotic disruption which may be one of the etiologic factors in the pathogenesis of some diabetic complications.
Aldose reductase from rat lens iε partially purified by 0 tissue homogenization and centrifugation. The compound or vehicle, enzyme, NADPH and assay buffer are preincubated at 25°C for 3 minutes and absorbance iε observed at 340 nm for the initial zero time value. The reaction is then initiated by addition of DL-glyceraldehyde and incubation is continued 5 for 8 minutes at 25°C at which time the final absorbance is noted. Enzyme activity is determined by the difference between initial and final absorbance. Compounds are screened at 100 μM (DeRuiter et al . , 1993, J. Enzyme Inhibi tion 1_ : 249-256; Kubo et al . , 1994, Biol . Pharm . Bull . 17: 458-459) . 0 Standard reference agents are carbidopa and benserazide.
34.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC, GC
Rosemary contains about 0.5% volatile oil; flavonoids 5 (diosmetin, diosmin, genkwanin, genkwanin-4 ' -methyl ether, 6- methoxy-genkwanin, luteolin, 6-methoxyluteolin, 6- methoxyluteolin-7-methyl ether, hispidulin, apigenin, etc.) ; phenolic acids (rosmarinic, labiatic, chlorogenic, neochlorogenic, and caffeic acids) ; carnosic acid; roεmaricine and iεoroεmaricine (reaction products of carnosic acid) ; triterpenic acids (mainly ursolic and oleanolic acids, with traces of 19α-hydroxyursolic, 2/3-hydroxyoleanolic, and 3/3-hydroxyurea-12 , 20 (3) -dien-17-oic acids) ; rosmanol, 7- ethoxyroεmanol, betulinic acid, and carnosol ; and others. The esεential oil contains mainly monoterpne hydrocarbons (α- and /3-pinenes, camphene, limonene, etc.) , cineole (eucalyptol) , and borneol, with camphor, linalool, verbenol, terpineol, 3-octanone, and isobornyl acetate also present. (Leung and Foster, 1996) .
The volatile oil includes monoterpene hydrocarbons, camphor, borneol and cineole and flavonoids.
35. EXAMPLE: SIBERIAN GINSENG, El eu therococcus senti cosus 35.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
Siberian ginsing is a relative of Asian ginsing that was introduced by Russian scientistε. The herbal medicine iε based on the root .
35.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES Siberian Ginseng in various forms is available aε followε: Natural Life, Herbal Harvest, Herbal Choice-Botalia, Herb Pharm, Eleu-Kokk™ (Pharmaton, Germany) and Vital- Kapseln-ratiopharm™ (Ratipharm, Germany) .
35.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
Siberian Ginsing has many clinical indicatins including anticancer properties immunostimulatory properties and lowering blood pressure. It is also reported as a general tonic. 35.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractions are prepared as described in the Mistletoe section above. Alternately, published procedures are used (Bauer and Remiger, 1989, Plan ta Med . £5:367-371; Steinmuller et al . , 1993, J. Immunopharmacol . 15.(5) : 605-614) .
35.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
The biological analysiε for the anticancer clinical indication is performed aε deεcribed in the Mistletoe section above .
35.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS The chemical analysis is done by HPLC. The components include eleutherosides, ligands and sterols.
36. EXAMPLE: STINGING NETTLE, Urtica dioica
36.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
This plant has almost worldwide distribution, and is produced in southeastern Europe. The drug is taken externally as a cold expressed oil as well as internally as a tea made from finely divided plant material.
36.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
Fresh freeze dried nettles are available from Ecclectic
Institute (Sandy, Oregon) as well as from Bionorica
(Germany) . The root (urologic agent) , is available from
Bazoton™ (Kanoldt, Germany) , Prostaforton (Sanofi Winthrop,
Germany) and leaves (anti-rheumatice) are available from
Rheuma-Heck™ (Krewel Meuselbach, Germany) . 36.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The main use is as a diuretic, although there are other uses as a promoter of wound healing, and in treating biliary complaints (Kirchhoff, Z . Phytotherap, 1983, 4:621) , * The average daily dose is 3-4 teaspoons of nettle herb in 150 ml of hot water, taken 3-4 times daily.
36.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS 0 The fractional analysiε of the components of Stinging Nettle is performed using a reverse-phase C-18 column as described above.
36.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS 5
The biological analysis is done as described for Saw Palmetto above.
36.6 CHEMICAL ANALYSIS HPLC 0
/S-sitosterol and tannins, recently scopoletin, β- sitosteryl 3-/3-D-glucoside, and other sterols and steryl glucosides have been isolated from the drug. Phenylpropanes, including homovanillyl alcohol and the corresponding glucoside, as well as lignans of the relatively rare 5 monoepoxylignan type, among them neo-olivil and derivatives, have been detected in the drug. An array of polyphenols and their methyl ethers is present. Several monoterpene diols in free and glucosidic form have been isolated. Lectins (0.1- 0.2%) , the so called UDA (Urtica dioica agglutinin) , and 0 polysaccharides (both acid and neutral) , as well aε 9- hydroxyocatadeca-10- trans, 12-ciε-dienoic acid, have alεo been found (Bisset, 1994) . 37. EXAMPLE: Valerian, Valeriana offi cianal i s 37.1 PLANT SOURCE/BACKGROUND
The Valerian plant is native to Europe and Asia and naturalized in North America. The drug is cultivated in the
U.S., Japan, and Europe. Most common usage is as a root, rhizomes and stolons and taken as a tea. An essential oil and tincture is also produced by ethanolic extraction of the roots.
37.2 COMMERCIAL SUPPLIERS/PRODUCT NAMES
There are a variety of commercial suppliers of Valerian extracts. One major supplier is Indena s.a. (Milan, Italy) which offers valerian dry extract which is standardized to contain 0.8% valerenic acids. Other products include Calmaid™ and Valerian Nighttime™ by Murdock Madaus Schwabe (Springville, Utah) . Flora Laboratories, Trout Lake Farm, PhytoPharmica, Herbal Choice-Botalia, Botalia Gold, Herb Pharm, Nature's Way and Shaklee.
37.3 CLINICAL INDICATIONS
The clinical indications associated with Valerian are as follows: calmative, sleep-promoting agent, calmative, hepatoprotection, cirrhosis, hepatitis, immunomodulatory activity, hyperlipidemia, sedative, stress, nervousness and insomnia.
37.4 FRACTIONAL ANALYSIS
The fractional analysis of the components of Valerian is performed using a reverse-phase C-18 column as described above. The fractions are also prepared as described in the Mistletoe section above. Alternately, published procedures are used (Bauer and Remiger, 1981; Steinmuller et al . , 1993) 37.5 BIOLOGICAL ACTIVITY ANALYSIS
Valerian is analyzed for CNS receptor, GABA-A (central, peripheral) , and 5HTj receptor activity as described above. Depression behavior is studied using the animal model above.
37.5.1 BIOASSAY FOR AMINOBUTRIC ACID-A (GABA-A) RECEPTOR BINDING
Male rats are sacrificed by decapitation, their cortices
10 are removed and homogenized in Potter-Eleveheim homogenizer in 10 volumes of cold 0-32 M sucrose (pH 7.4) . The homogenized material is centrifuged at 100 g for 10 minutes. Then the supernatant is dentrifuged at 20,000 g for 20 minutes and the pallet is resuspended in 20 volumes of fresh
_ .. distilled water cooled nd recentrifuged at 8,000 x g for 20 minutes. The supernatant and 'buffy-coat' are centrifuged at 50,000 x g for 20 minutes to obtain GABA-A receptor as pallet. The binding assays are performed in 50mm Tris-HCL pH 7.4 buffer. The effects of Valerian extract and its
2n fractions on binding of 3H-muscimol to GABA-A receptor after 30 minutes incubation at 0°C are quantified according to the method of Bernasconi and Morazzoni, 1993 (Fitoterapia, vol. LXIV, 291-299) .
25 37.6 CHEMICAL AYNALYSIS HPLC, TLC, supercritical carbon dioxide
Common Valerian contains as its primary bioactive constituents several iridoid compounds called valepotriates including valtrates (valtrate, valtrate isovaleroxhydrin,
30 acevaltrate, valechlorine, etc.) , didrovaltrates
(didrovaltrate, homodidrovaltrate deoxydodidrovaltrate, homodeoxydodidrovaltrate, isovaleroxyhydroxydidrovaltrate, etc.) , and isovaltrates (isovaltrate, 7- epideacetylisovaltrate, etc.) valtrate and didrovaltrate are
35 the major valepotriates. In addition, it contains valerosidatum (an iridoid ester glycoside) and a volatile oil (0.5-2%) consisting of many components including bornyl acetate and isovalerate (major compounds) , caryophyllene, a- and /3-pinenes, valerenal, valerenic acid, valeranone, β- ionone, eugenyl isovalerate, isoeugenyl iεovalerate, patchouli alcohol, valerianol, borneol, camphene, β- 5 bisabolene, ledol, isovaleric acid, and terpinolene, among others. Common valerian also contains several alkaloids including actinidine valerianine, valerine, and chatinine . Other constituents present in common valerian include choline (ca. 3%) , methyl 2-pyrrolyl ketone, chlorogenic acid, and 0 caffeic acid; β-sitosterol; tannins; gums; and others. Indian valerian is generally reported to contain similar conεtituents as common valerian including valepotriates, valeroεidatum, and a volatile oil . In addition, it contain 2A'"-0- and 3"'-0-2-methylbutyryl esters of acetylated linarin 5 (Leung and Foster, 1996) .
The invention described and claimed herein is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments herein disclosed since these embodiments are intended as illustration of several aspects of the invention. Any equivalent embodiments " are intended to be within the scope of this invention.
Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art from the foregoing description. Such modifications are also intended to fall within the scope ~* of the appended claims. Throughout this application various publications and patents are cited in parenthesis. Their contents are hereby incorporated by reference into the present application.
0
5

Claims

We claim :
1. A method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug, the method comprising the stepε of: providing a botanical material which haε a given biological activity, εaid botanical material compriεing a plurality of components; separating a representative aliquot of the botanical material into a plurality of marker fractions wherein at least one of the marker fractions comprises at least one active component; determining the degree of the given biological activity for each of the marker fractions to provide a bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot; and comparing the bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
2. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein one or more of the marker fractions contain one active component .
3. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the method comprises the additional steps of: determining the amount of the active components in at least one of the marker fractions to provide a quantitative compositional fingerprint of the representative aliquot and comparing the quantitative compositional fingerprint of the representative aliquot to a quantitative compoεitional fingerprint εtandard which has been established for a given pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
4. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the method comprises the additional steps of : determining a total bioactivity of the representative aliquot of the botanical material and comparing the total bioactivity of the representative aliquot with that of a total bioactivity of the standard to determine whether the botanical material iε a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
5. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the botanical material iε an extract made from plant material .
6. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 5, wherein the botanical material is a εupercritical carbon dioxide extract .
7. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 5, wherein the botanical material is an ethanolic extract.
8. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 5, wherein the botanical material is an aqueous or organic extract.
9. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the botanical material is a seed oil.
10. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the botanical material is a powdered plant material
11. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claims 1, 2, 3 or 4 , wherein the botanical material is selected from the group conεiεting of Aloe, Bilberry, Black Cohosh, Chamomile, Chaste tree, Chestnut, Echinacea, Evening Primrose, Feverfew, Garlic, Ginger, Ginkgo, Ginseng (Asian) , Goldenseal, Green tea, Guggulipid, Hawthorn, Ivy, Kava, Licorice, Milk Thistle, Passion Flower, Pumpkin, Pygeum, Rosemary, Siberian Ginseng, Saw Palmetto, St. John's Wort, Stinging Nettle and Valerian.
12. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Aloe.
13. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Bilberry.
14. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Black Cohosh.
15. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Chamomile.
16. The method for making a pharmaceutical qrade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material iε Cheεtnut .
17. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Echinacea.
18. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Evening Primrose Oil .
19. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Feverfew.
20. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Garlic.
21. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Ginger.
22. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Ginkgo.
23. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Ginseng (Asian) .
24. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Goldenseal.
25. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Green tea.
26. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Hawthorn.
27. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Ivy leaf.
28. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Kava.
29. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Licorice.
30. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Milk Thistle.
31. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Pasεion Flower.
32. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material iε Pumpkin.
33. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Pygeum.
34. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Rosemary.
35. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Saw Palmetto.
36. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Siberian Ginseng.
37. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is St. John's Wort.
38. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Stinging Nettle.
39. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 11, wherein the botanical material is Valerian.
40. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the botanical material is a mixture of plant materials.
41. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 40, wherein the mixture of plant materials is a mixture of Saw palmetto and Pumpkin.
42. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 40, wherein the mixture of plant materials is a mixture of Echinacea and Goldenseal .
43. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 40, wherein the mixture of plant materials is a mixture of St. John's Wort and Valerian.
44. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, 2, 3 or 4 wherein the active component is selected from the group consiεting of acetogeninε, alkaloids, carbohydrates, carotenoids, cinnamic acid derivatives, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, flavonoids, glycosides, isoprenoids, macrocyclic antibiotics, nucleic acids, penicillins, peptides, phenolics, polyacetylenes, polyketides, polyphenolε, polyεaccharides, proteins, prostaglandins, steroids and terpenoids.
45. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is an acetogenin.
46. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is an alkaloid.
47. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is a carbohydrate.
48. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is a fatty acid ester.
49. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is a flavonoid.
50. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is a lectin.
51. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is a phenolic.
52. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is a steroid.
53. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 44, wherein the active component is a terpinoid.
54. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating an allergic/inflammatory disorder.
55. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating with a cardiovascular disorder.
56. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating with a central nervous system disorder.
57. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a gastrointestinal disorder.
58. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a metabolic disorder.
59. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a disease induced by a microbial organism or a virus.
60. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, wherein the botanical material is a homogeneous material.
61. A method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug, the method comprising the εteps of: providing a botanical material which comprises a plurality of components which have a given biological activity and wherein each component has a standardized bioactivity profile; separating a representative aliquot from the botanical material into a plurality of marker fractions wherein at least one of the marker fractions comprises at least one of the active components; measuring the amount of each of the active component (ε) present in each of the marker fractions; calculating the bioactivity of each of the marker fractions based on the amount of each of the active components present and the standardized component bioactivity profile to provide a calculated bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot; and comparing the calculated bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
62. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the method comprises the additional steps of: determining a total bioactivity of the representative aliquot of the botanical material and comparing the total bioactivity of the representative aliquot with that of a total bioactivity of the standard to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
63. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the botanical material is an extract made from plant material.
64. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 63, wherein the botanical material is an aqueous or organic extract.
65. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 63, wherein the botanical material is a powdered plant material.
66. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61 or 62, wherein the botanical material is selected from the group consisting of Aloe, Bilberry, Black Cohosh, Chamomile, Chaste tree, Chestnut, Echinacea, Evening Primrose, Feverfew, Garlic, Ginger, Ginkgo, Ginseng (Asian) , Goldenseal, Green tea, Guggulipid, Hawthorn, Ivy, Kava, Licorice, Milk Thistle, Passion Flower, Pumpkin, Pygeum, Rosemary, Siberian Ginseng, Saw Palmetto, St. John's Wort, Stinging Nettle and Valerian.
67. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the botanical material is a mixture of plant materials.
68. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61 or 62, wherein the active component is εelected from the group conεisting of acetogenins, alkaloids, carbohydrates, carotenoids, cinnamic acid derivatives, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, flavonoid, glycosides, isoprenoids, macrocyclic antibiotics, nucleic acids, penicillins, peptides, phenolics, polyacetylenes, polyketides, polyphenols, polysaccharides, proteins, prostaglandins, steroids and terpenoids .
69. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating an allergic/inflammatory disorder.
70. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a cardiovascular disorder.
71. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a central nervous system disorder.
72. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a gastrointestinal disorder.
73. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a metabolic disorder.
74. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the bioactivity is indicative of use for treating or ameliorating a disease induced by a microbial organism or a virus.
75. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 61, wherein the botanical material is a homogeneous material.
76. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 1, 4, 61 or 62, wherein the marker fractions comprise a class of related components.
77. A method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug, the method comprising the steps of: providing a botanical material which has a given biological activity, said botanical material comprising a plurality of components; separating a representative aliquot of the botanical material into a plurality of marker fractions wherein at least one of the marker fractions comprises at least one active class of components; determining the degree of the given biological activity for each of the marker fractions to provide a bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot; and comparing the bioactivity fingerprint of the representative aliquot to a bioactivity fingerprint standard which has been established for a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug to determine whether the botanical material is a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug.
78. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 77, wherein the botanical material is selected from the group consisting of Aloe, Bilberry, Black Cohosh, Chamomile, Chaste tree, Chestnut, Echinacea, Evening Primrose, Feverfew, Garlic, Ginger, Ginkgo, Ginseng (Asian) , Goldenseal, Green tea, Guggulipid, Hawthorn, Ivy, Kava, Licorice, Milk Thistle, Passion Flower, Pumpkin, Pygeum, Rosemary, Siberian Ginseng, Saw Palmetto, St. John's Wort, Stinging Nettle and Valerian.
79. The method for making a pharmaceutical grade botanical drug according to claim 77, wherein the active class of components are selected from the group consisting of acetogenins, alkaloids, carbohydrates, carotenoids, cinnamic acid derivativeε, fatty acids, fatty acid esters, flavonoids, glycosides, isoprenoids, macrocyclic antibiotics, nucleic acids, penicillins, peptides, phenolics, polyacetylenes, polyketides, polyphenols, polysaccharides, proteins, prostaglandins, steroids and terpenoids .
80. A pharmaceutical grade botanical drug made by the method according to claims 1, 3, 61 or 77.
81. A pharmaceutical grade botanical drug made by the method according to claim 1, wherein the marker fractions comprise a class of related components.
PCT/US1997/006988 1996-04-15 1997-04-15 Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs WO1997039355A1 (en)

Priority Applications (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP97922474A EP0900375A1 (en) 1996-04-15 1997-04-15 Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs
AU28131/97A AU716155B2 (en) 1996-04-15 1997-04-15 Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs
JP09537454A JP2000512621A (en) 1996-04-15 1997-04-15 Pharmaceutical grade botanicals

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US08/632,273 US6379714B1 (en) 1995-04-14 1996-04-15 Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs
US08/632,273 1996-04-15

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1997039355A1 true WO1997039355A1 (en) 1997-10-23

Family

ID=24534836

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1997/006988 WO1997039355A1 (en) 1996-04-15 1997-04-15 Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs

Country Status (7)

Country Link
US (1) US6379714B1 (en)
EP (1) EP0900375A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2000512621A (en)
CN (1) CN1239547A (en)
AU (1) AU716155B2 (en)
CA (1) CA2252426A1 (en)
WO (1) WO1997039355A1 (en)

Cited By (27)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999021007A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade echinacea
WO1999021005A2 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade st. john's wort
WO1999021008A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade garlic
WO1999021009A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade saw palmetto, serenoa repens
WO1999020292A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade ginseng
WO1999021006A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade valerian, black cohosh, vitex agnus-castus, bilberry and milk thistle
WO1999020291A2 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade ginkgo biloba
DE19800330A1 (en) * 1998-01-07 1999-07-08 Mueller Extract Company Gmbh & Preparation of pharmaceutically active carbon dioxide extract from Tanacetum parthenium
EP0965351A2 (en) * 1998-06-16 1999-12-22 Mathias Christian Zohoungbogbo Pharmaceutical composition for treating side-effects of a diet with reduced amount of carbohydrates
WO2000030660A2 (en) * 1998-11-25 2000-06-02 Universitätsklinikum Freiburg Hyperforin as cytostatic agent and hyperforin ointment or cream as application form
WO2000035467A1 (en) * 1998-12-14 2000-06-22 Celestial Seasonings Inc. Standardized botanical preparations and methods for preparing same
WO2000050045A2 (en) * 1999-02-26 2000-08-31 Chakravarty Adusumalli Solution for injection containing a gold compound, calendula and belladonna extracts for the treatment of arthroses
WO2000057894A1 (en) * 1999-03-26 2000-10-05 Ancile Pharmaceuticals Use of valeriana for the treatment of restless leg syndrome and related disorders
JP2001278876A (en) * 2000-03-30 2001-10-10 Council Scient Ind Res Method for isolating compound scopoletin useful as nitric oxide synthesis inhibitor
JP2002522391A (en) * 1998-08-03 2002-07-23 イー ホウィーラー,ロナルド Prostate formulation
EP1238590A1 (en) * 2001-03-09 2002-09-11 Unilever N.V. Fat based food product
US6566405B2 (en) * 1998-04-16 2003-05-20 Eurovita A/S Synergistic compositions containing aromatic compounds and terpenoids present in alpinia galanga
EP1414427A2 (en) * 2001-08-10 2004-05-06 Kava Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Kavalactone compositions and methods of use
DE10356187A1 (en) * 2003-12-02 2005-07-21 Beiersdorf Ag Active substance combinations of phytosterols and / or cholesterol and licochalcone A or an aqueous extract of Radix Glycyrrhizae inflatae, containing licochalcone A.
EP1570250A2 (en) * 2002-10-25 2005-09-07 Sloan-Kettering Institute For Cancer Research Screening, quantitation and identification of active ingredients in natural products
DE102011100689A1 (en) * 2011-05-06 2012-04-12 Heinz Kiefer Screening living tissues of pituitary or pituitary hormone production system, comprises providing a mixture of extracts of e.g. Agni casti fructus in form of library, and contacting single-substance mixture with tissues of pituitary
US8420336B2 (en) 2008-06-27 2013-04-16 Tsumura & Co. Method of bioassaying yokukansan
US8497092B2 (en) 2008-04-03 2013-07-30 Tsumura & Co. Method of bioassaying yokukansan
US20130260401A1 (en) * 2010-12-03 2013-10-03 Tsumura & Co. Daikenchuto bioassay method and quality management method using same
CN103424498A (en) * 2012-05-25 2013-12-04 丽珠集团利民制药厂 Establishing method and application of fingerprint of detoxifying and kidney harmonizing capsule
CN107976488A (en) * 2016-10-25 2018-05-01 四川济生堂药业有限公司 A kind of detection method of pharmaceutical composition
CN115436553A (en) * 2022-08-30 2022-12-06 浙江省林业科学研究院 Method for detecting authenticity and content of camellia seed oil based on alpha-amyrin characteristic

Families Citing this family (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2001021009A2 (en) * 1999-09-20 2001-03-29 Currier Stephen J Standardized functional food products
WO2003005804A1 (en) 2001-07-09 2003-01-23 University Of Copenhagen Methods and cuttings for mass propagation of plant parasites
CN1279903C (en) * 2002-08-23 2006-10-18 江苏康缘药业股份有限公司 Preparation containing Gingkolactone and its producing process
KR100473422B1 (en) * 2003-06-12 2005-03-14 박원봉 A composition for an enteric coating of natural product containing lectin
EP1512970A1 (en) * 2003-09-05 2005-03-09 Nederlandse Organisatie voor toegepast-natuurwetenschappelijk Onderzoek TNO Method for determining the impact of a multicomponent mixture on the biological profile of a disease
US7569234B2 (en) * 2003-12-19 2009-08-04 Ming Qi Oncology Chinese Medicines, Inc. Herb composition for treating lung cancer and preparation method thereof
CN1296338C (en) * 2004-01-13 2007-01-24 中国人民解放军第二军医大学 Hypericum sampsonii hance total extract, and its preparing method and use
US20060189543A1 (en) * 2005-02-23 2006-08-24 Rosenbloom Richard A Compositions and methods for the treatment of leukemia
JP2007246507A (en) * 2006-02-15 2007-09-27 Kracie Seiyaku Kk Prophylactic or curative composition for fatigue and method for preventing or treating fatigue
WO2008074155A1 (en) * 2006-12-20 2008-06-26 Bri Biopharmaceuticals Research Inc. Pharmaceutical-grade botanical drug compositions and methods for manufacturing same
JP2008156297A (en) * 2006-12-25 2008-07-10 Hokkaido Univ Serotonin 2b and/or 2c receptor antagonist
MX2009010534A (en) * 2007-03-30 2009-12-01 9898 Ltd Pharmaceutical platform technology for the development of natural products.
CN101688233B (en) * 2007-07-11 2013-01-16 株式会社津村 Method of bioassaying yokukansan
WO2009018470A1 (en) * 2007-07-31 2009-02-05 Phenolics, Llc Use of cranberry extract enriched in total phenols and free essentially free, or substantially free of sugars, acids, sulfur and other contaminants, for periodontal treatment
WO2009101700A1 (en) 2008-02-15 2009-08-20 Tsumura & Co. Bioassay method for yokkansan
JP2010013403A (en) * 2008-07-04 2010-01-21 Kao Corp Nfat signal inhibitor and nfat signal-inhibiting method
US20110177179A1 (en) * 2010-01-18 2011-07-21 Sinoveda Canada, Inc. Preparation of botanical extracts containing absorbable components using pharmaceutical platform technology
CN103006634A (en) * 2011-09-21 2013-04-03 中国人民解放军第二军医大学 Use of hypericum sampsonii hance xanthone compounds in antidepressant drug preparation
US10568900B1 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-02-25 Suzanne Janine Paxton-Pierson Androgen effectors
CN105899948A (en) * 2013-11-28 2016-08-24 联邦科学技术研究组织 Method of detecting plasmodium infection
JP6912763B2 (en) 2014-06-27 2021-08-04 国立大学法人九州大学 Method for enhancing the functionality of catechin
KR101850601B1 (en) 2015-05-14 2018-04-20 다당앤(주) A functional cosmetic composition for anti-inflammatory and moisturizing effect containing polysaccharide of green tea produced by supercritical fluid technology and bioconversion process, and the method for preparing of the same
JP6469518B2 (en) * 2015-05-14 2019-02-13 丸善製薬株式会社 Angiogenesis promoter
CN105699505B (en) * 2016-01-15 2017-09-01 江西中医药大学 Traditional Chinese medicine fingerprint intellectual analysis is to ensure the method for traditional Chinese medicine quality homogeneity
CN107037146B (en) * 2017-02-17 2020-12-15 丹东药业集团有限公司 Method for controlling quality of compound wood chicken granules
JP7217134B2 (en) * 2018-11-21 2023-02-02 BGG Japan株式会社 How to identify saw palmetto oil
CN109917055B (en) * 2019-03-29 2021-07-27 四川新绿色药业科技发展有限公司 Quality detection and identification method for cowherb seed and fried cowherb seed decoction pieces, standard decoction and formula granules
CN115141681A (en) * 2021-03-30 2022-10-04 湖南诺泽生物科技有限公司 Volatile oil, preparation method and application thereof

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3394120A (en) * 1963-04-04 1968-07-23 Ciba Geigy Corp Process of extracting protein from mistletoe and resultant product
GB1152618A (en) * 1965-12-30 1969-05-21 Ciba Ltd Process for the Preparation of a Physiologically Active Protein Material
US3472831A (en) * 1965-02-19 1969-10-14 Ciba Geigy Corp Process for purifying mistletoe proteins by ultracentrifugation
US5547674A (en) * 1995-04-14 1996-08-20 University Of Southern California Pharmaceutical preparations derived from European mistletoe
WO1996032122A1 (en) * 1995-04-14 1996-10-17 University Of Southern California Mistletoe extract and method

Family Cites Families (50)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE235418C (en)
US3856946A (en) 1966-06-10 1974-12-24 Debat Lab Prunus africana extract
US3878197A (en) 1972-12-13 1975-04-15 Ray H Maret Process for preparing extracts of aloe vera
US4058594A (en) 1974-04-25 1977-11-15 John Williams Immuno-suppressive agents
GB1554662A (en) 1976-05-05 1979-10-24 Inverni Della Beffa Spa Polyhydroxyphenylchromanones
DE2849029A1 (en) 1978-11-11 1980-05-22 Kali Chemie Pharma Gmbh STABLE VALEPOTRIATE PREPARATIONS AND METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF
DE2914330A1 (en) 1979-04-09 1980-10-30 Madaus & Co Dr METHOD FOR OBTAINING SILYMARINE FROM PLANTS
US4614733A (en) * 1981-12-31 1986-09-30 Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Polysaccharides pharmaceutical compositions and the use thereof
CA1270843A (en) 1982-05-19 1990-06-26 Edward Stewart Johnson Sesquiterpene lactones
SE446940B (en) 1983-02-16 1986-10-20 Carl Axel Virdalm MEASURES FOR FIGHTING DISEASE CONDITIONS IN THE FOOD MELTER CONTAINING SHALL OR OUTSIDE OF BEERS OR FRUITS
DE3448144C2 (en) * 1983-08-11 1989-10-05 Kureha Kagaku Kogyo K.K., Tokio/Tokyo, Jp
US4525344A (en) 1983-08-15 1985-06-25 Tutsky Ronald J Skin care and shaving composition
US4784849A (en) 1983-08-15 1988-11-15 Tutsky Ronald J Skin care and shaving compositions
US4894443A (en) 1984-02-08 1990-01-16 Cetus Corporation Toxin conjugates
US4590071A (en) 1984-09-25 1986-05-20 Xoma Corporation Human melanoma specific immunotoxins
DE3537656A1 (en) 1984-11-22 1986-05-22 Dr. Madaus GmbH & Co, 5000 Köln METHOD FOR PRODUCING ISOSILYBIN-FREE SILIBININE AND MEDICINAL PRODUCTS CONTAINING SILIBININE
DE3541945A1 (en) 1985-11-27 1987-06-04 Lomapharm Rudolf Lohman Gmbh K IMMUNOTIMULATING POLYSACCHARIDES FROM CELL CULTURES FROM ECHINACEA PURPUREA (L.) MOENCH AND ECHINACEA ANGUSTIFOLIA, D.C. PROCESS FOR THEIR PRODUCTION AND PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS CONTAINING IT
FR2594691B1 (en) 1986-02-24 1990-08-03 Bonne Claude NEW COSMETIC PREPARATIONS CONTAINING EXTRACT OF SILYBUM MARIANUM FRUITS
US4861581A (en) 1986-12-05 1989-08-29 Cancer Biologics, Inc. Detection of necrotic malignant tissue and associated therapy
US5019368A (en) 1989-02-23 1991-05-28 Cancer Biologics, Inc. Detection of necrotic malignant tissue and associated therapy
AU602947B2 (en) 1987-01-19 1990-11-01 Parfums Rochas Cosmetic and dermatological compositions including an extract of marianum silybum rich in silymarine associated with essential fatty acids
IT1203934B (en) 1987-04-17 1989-02-23 Consiglio Nazionale Ricerche PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING HIGHER ALCOHOLS FOR THE TREATMENT OF PROSTATE DISEASES
IT1222012B (en) 1987-07-10 1990-08-31 Indena Spa PHARMACEUTICAL AND COSMETIC COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING COMPLEX FLAVONOLIGNANS WITH PHOSPHOLIPIDS
US4966577A (en) 1988-03-16 1990-10-30 Allergan, Inc. Prevention of lens-related tissue growth in the eye
US5096708A (en) 1988-07-07 1992-03-17 Sven Gohla Medical preparation containing as active agent a component from thuja plants which comprises polysaccharides
US5211948A (en) 1988-10-12 1993-05-18 Nestec S.A. Process for the preparation of a powdered extract of valerian roots
US5183904A (en) 1988-12-22 1993-02-02 Xoma Corporation Hindered linking agents and methods
EP0454726A4 (en) 1988-12-22 1991-11-27 Xoma Corporation Hindered linking agents and methods
DE3940091A1 (en) 1989-12-04 1991-06-06 Schwabe Willmar Gmbh & Co EXTRACT OF BLACKERS OF GINKGO BILOBA, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF AND THE EXTRACT CONTAINING MEDICAMENT
IT1238684B (en) 1990-02-09 1993-09-01 Indena Spa BILOBALIDE DERIVATIVES, THEIR USES AND FORMULATIONS THAT CONTAIN THEM
DE4200555C2 (en) 1991-01-23 2003-02-27 Viatris Gmbh Production of a camomile extract with antimicrobial properties
JP3357383B2 (en) 1991-08-14 2002-12-16 昌宏 黒田 Low molecular weight plant composition
IT1253431B (en) 1991-12-02 1995-08-08 Valetudo S R L PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS FOR TOPICAL USE FOR THE TREATMENT OF PSORIASIS AND ATOPIC DERMATITIS
DE4201179A1 (en) 1992-01-17 1993-07-22 Alfatec Pharma Gmbh Granulates or pellets comprising dispersion of active agent in hydrophilic macromolecules - are e.g. for treatment of depression, hypertension, rheumatism, etc.
GB9202993D0 (en) 1992-02-13 1992-03-25 Indena Spa Novel pharmaceutical uses of bilobalide and derivatives thereof and pharmaceutical compositions adapted for such use
DE4221836A1 (en) 1992-07-03 1994-01-05 Gabius Hans Joachim Prof Dr New mistletoe lectin - with immunomodulatory activity, useful for cancer adjuvant therapy
DE4229876A1 (en) 1992-09-04 1994-03-10 Uwe Dr Pfueller Mistletoe lectin extn. - using a cationic ion exchanger for the isolation of MTLI-1 and MTL-1-2, MTLII and MTL-III, useful in bio-technology and diagnostics
US5525341A (en) 1992-10-09 1996-06-11 Jlb, Inc. Partially purified cranberry anti-adhesion activity
US5646178A (en) 1992-10-09 1997-07-08 Jlb, Inc. Cranberry extract and biologically active compounds derived therefrom
DE4241487C2 (en) 1992-12-09 1996-07-25 Indena Spa New extracts of Cucurbita sp., Process for their preparation and their use in medicines and cosmetics
DE4242902A1 (en) 1992-12-18 1994-06-23 Madaus Ag Process for the preparation of lectin concentrates from mistletoe extracts and standardized preparations prepared therefrom for increasing natural immune resistance and for use in tumor therapy
DE4434170C1 (en) 1994-09-24 1996-03-28 Krewel Werke Gmbh St. John's wort extracts
IT1271342B (en) 1994-12-28 1997-05-27 Indena Spa PROTEINS RICH IN HYDROXYPROLIN AND PHARMACEUTICAL AND COSMETIC FORMULATIONS CONTAINING THEM
US5543146A (en) 1995-01-20 1996-08-06 Prostahelp, Inc. Dietary supplement for alleviating the symptoms associated with enlargement of the prostate gland
US5565199A (en) 1995-02-07 1996-10-15 Page; Elliot W. Systems and methods for the synthesis of natural base steroidal hormones and more especially estrogens and progesterone and estrogen-like and progesterone-like compounds and their derivatives derived as phytohormones from herbaceous plants
IT1275905B1 (en) 1995-03-14 1997-10-24 Indena Spa POLYPHENOLIC FRACTIONS OF TEA, THEIR USE AND FORMULATIONS THAT CONTAIN THEM
IT1274549B (en) 1995-05-23 1997-07-17 Indena Spa USE OF FLAVANOLIGNANI FOR THE PREPARATION OF MEDICATIONS FOR ANTI-PROLIFERATIVE ACTIVITY IN CANCER OF THE UTERUS, OVARIAN AND BREAST
US5716928A (en) 1995-06-07 1998-02-10 Avmax, Inc. Use of essential oils to increase bioavailability of oral pharmaceutical compounds
US5798101A (en) 1997-01-22 1998-08-25 Hpf, L.L.C. Herbal appetite suppressant and weight loss composition
US5770217A (en) 1997-07-02 1998-06-23 Atlatl, Inc. Dietary supplement for hematological, immune and appetite enhancement

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3394120A (en) * 1963-04-04 1968-07-23 Ciba Geigy Corp Process of extracting protein from mistletoe and resultant product
US3472831A (en) * 1965-02-19 1969-10-14 Ciba Geigy Corp Process for purifying mistletoe proteins by ultracentrifugation
GB1152618A (en) * 1965-12-30 1969-05-21 Ciba Ltd Process for the Preparation of a Physiologically Active Protein Material
US5547674A (en) * 1995-04-14 1996-08-20 University Of Southern California Pharmaceutical preparations derived from European mistletoe
WO1996032122A1 (en) * 1995-04-14 1996-10-17 University Of Southern California Mistletoe extract and method

Cited By (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1999021005A3 (en) * 1997-10-23 2001-02-22 Pharmaprint Inc Pharmaceutical grade st. john's wort
WO1999021005A2 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade st. john's wort
WO1999021008A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade garlic
WO1999021009A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade saw palmetto, serenoa repens
WO1999020292A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade ginseng
WO1999021006A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade valerian, black cohosh, vitex agnus-castus, bilberry and milk thistle
WO1999020291A2 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade ginkgo biloba
WO1999020291A3 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-07-08 Pharmaprint Inc Pharmaceutical grade ginkgo biloba
WO1999021007A1 (en) * 1997-10-23 1999-04-29 Pharmaprint, Inc. Pharmaceutical grade echinacea
DE19800330A1 (en) * 1998-01-07 1999-07-08 Mueller Extract Company Gmbh & Preparation of pharmaceutically active carbon dioxide extract from Tanacetum parthenium
DE19800330C2 (en) * 1998-01-07 2002-09-26 Delta 9 Pharma Gmbh Pharmaceutical CO¶2¶ extract from Tanacetum parthenium
US7252845B2 (en) 1998-04-16 2007-08-07 Ferrosan A/S Synergistic compositions containing aromatic compounds and terpenoids present in Alpinia galanga
US6566405B2 (en) * 1998-04-16 2003-05-20 Eurovita A/S Synergistic compositions containing aromatic compounds and terpenoids present in alpinia galanga
EP0965351A3 (en) * 1998-06-16 2000-06-21 Mathias Christian Zohoungbogbo Pharmaceutical composition for treating side-effects of a diet with reduced amount of carbohydrates
EP0965351A2 (en) * 1998-06-16 1999-12-22 Mathias Christian Zohoungbogbo Pharmaceutical composition for treating side-effects of a diet with reduced amount of carbohydrates
JP2002522391A (en) * 1998-08-03 2002-07-23 イー ホウィーラー,ロナルド Prostate formulation
EP1275382A3 (en) * 1998-11-25 2003-02-12 Universitätsklinikum Freiburg Hyperforin as cytostatic agent and hyperforin ointment or cream as application form
WO2000030660A3 (en) * 1998-11-25 2001-03-01 Universitaetsklinikum Freiburg Hyperforin as cytostatic agent and hyperforin ointment or cream as application form
US7179495B1 (en) 1998-11-25 2007-02-20 Universitaetsklinikum Freiburg Hyperforin as cytostatic agent and hyperforin ointment or cream as application form
WO2000030660A2 (en) * 1998-11-25 2000-06-02 Universitätsklinikum Freiburg Hyperforin as cytostatic agent and hyperforin ointment or cream as application form
EP1275382A2 (en) * 1998-11-25 2003-01-15 Universitätsklinikum Freiburg Hyperforin as cytostatic agent and hyperforin ointment or cream as application form
WO2000035467A1 (en) * 1998-12-14 2000-06-22 Celestial Seasonings Inc. Standardized botanical preparations and methods for preparing same
WO2000050045A3 (en) * 1999-02-26 2000-11-16 Chakravarty Adusumalli Solution for injection containing a gold compound, calendula and belladonna extracts for the treatment of arthroses
WO2000050045A2 (en) * 1999-02-26 2000-08-31 Chakravarty Adusumalli Solution for injection containing a gold compound, calendula and belladonna extracts for the treatment of arthroses
US6346283B1 (en) 1999-03-26 2002-02-12 Ancile Pharmaceuticals Use of valeriana for the treatment of restless leg syndrome and related disorders
US6544565B2 (en) 1999-03-26 2003-04-08 Ancile Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Use of Valeriana for the treatment of Restless Leg Syndrome and related disorders
WO2000057894A1 (en) * 1999-03-26 2000-10-05 Ancile Pharmaceuticals Use of valeriana for the treatment of restless leg syndrome and related disorders
JP2001278876A (en) * 2000-03-30 2001-10-10 Council Scient Ind Res Method for isolating compound scopoletin useful as nitric oxide synthesis inhibitor
EP1238590A1 (en) * 2001-03-09 2002-09-11 Unilever N.V. Fat based food product
EP1414427A4 (en) * 2001-08-10 2004-08-18 Synta Pharmaceuticals Corp Kavalactone compositions and methods of use
EP1414427A2 (en) * 2001-08-10 2004-05-06 Kava Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Kavalactone compositions and methods of use
EP1570250A2 (en) * 2002-10-25 2005-09-07 Sloan-Kettering Institute For Cancer Research Screening, quantitation and identification of active ingredients in natural products
EP1570250A4 (en) * 2002-10-25 2007-03-14 Sloan Kettering Inst Cancer Screening, quantitation and identification of active ingredients in natural products
DE10356187A1 (en) * 2003-12-02 2005-07-21 Beiersdorf Ag Active substance combinations of phytosterols and / or cholesterol and licochalcone A or an aqueous extract of Radix Glycyrrhizae inflatae, containing licochalcone A.
US8497092B2 (en) 2008-04-03 2013-07-30 Tsumura & Co. Method of bioassaying yokukansan
US8420336B2 (en) 2008-06-27 2013-04-16 Tsumura & Co. Method of bioassaying yokukansan
US20130260401A1 (en) * 2010-12-03 2013-10-03 Tsumura & Co. Daikenchuto bioassay method and quality management method using same
US9121846B2 (en) * 2010-12-03 2015-09-01 Tsumura & Co. Daikenchuto bioassay method and quality management method using same
DE102011100689A1 (en) * 2011-05-06 2012-04-12 Heinz Kiefer Screening living tissues of pituitary or pituitary hormone production system, comprises providing a mixture of extracts of e.g. Agni casti fructus in form of library, and contacting single-substance mixture with tissues of pituitary
CN103424498A (en) * 2012-05-25 2013-12-04 丽珠集团利民制药厂 Establishing method and application of fingerprint of detoxifying and kidney harmonizing capsule
CN103424498B (en) * 2012-05-25 2015-05-06 丽珠集团利民制药厂 Establishing method and application of fingerprint of detoxifying and kidney harmonizing capsule
CN107976488A (en) * 2016-10-25 2018-05-01 四川济生堂药业有限公司 A kind of detection method of pharmaceutical composition
CN107976488B (en) * 2016-10-25 2020-10-30 四川济生堂药业有限公司 Detection method of pharmaceutical composition
CN115436553A (en) * 2022-08-30 2022-12-06 浙江省林业科学研究院 Method for detecting authenticity and content of camellia seed oil based on alpha-amyrin characteristic
CN115436553B (en) * 2022-08-30 2023-10-13 浙江省林业科学研究院 Method for detecting authenticity and content of camellia seed oil based on a-amyrin characteristics

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP0900375A1 (en) 1999-03-10
CN1239547A (en) 1999-12-22
US6379714B1 (en) 2002-04-30
AU716155B2 (en) 2000-02-17
AU2813197A (en) 1997-11-07
CA2252426A1 (en) 1997-10-23
JP2000512621A (en) 2000-09-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU716155B2 (en) Pharmaceutical grade botanical drugs
Sujarwo et al. Ethnobotanical study of Loloh: Traditional herbal drinks from Bali (Indonesia)
Jayathirtha et al. Preliminary immunomodulatory activities of methanol extracts of Eclipta alba and Centella asiatica
Madhuri et al. Some anticancer medicinal plants of foreign origin
Dunstan et al. Evaluation of some Samoan and Peruvian medicinal plants by prostaglandin biosynthesis and rat ear oedema assays
US6039950A (en) Pharmaceutical grade saw palmetto
US6113907A (en) Pharmaceutical grade St. John&#39;s Wort
Veerachari et al. Phytochemical investigation of the ethanol, methanol and ethyl acetate leaf extracts of six Cassia species
Arora et al. GC-MS Profiling of Ceropegia bulbosa Roxb. var. bulbosa, an endangered plant from Thar Desert, Rajasthan
Kapadia et al. Inhibitory effect of herbal remedies on 12-O-tetradecanoylphorbol-13-acetate-promoted Epstein–Barr virus early antigen activation
Sharma et al. An overview of phytotherapeutic approaches for the treatment of tuberculosis
van den Bout-van den Beukel et al. Possible drug–metabolism interactions of medicinal herbs with antiretroviral agents
Galle et al. Analytical and pharmacological studies on Mahonia aquifolium
Das et al. A brief review on a traditional herb: Abrus precatorius (L.)
Sintayehu et al. Hepatoprotective and free radical scavenging activities of extracts and a major compound isolated from the leaves of Cineraria abyssinica Sch. Bip. exA. Rich.
Sasikala et al. Phytochemicals and GC–MS analysis of bioactive compounds present in ethanolic leaves extract of Taraxacum officinale (L).
Sowjanya et al. An overview on inflammation and plant havinganti inflammatory activity
Saxena et al. Qualitative and quantitative estimation of bioactive compounds in Mimosa hamata
CA2307339A1 (en) Pharmaceutical grade valerian, black cohosh, vitex agnus-castus, bilberry and milk thistle
Ramkumar et al. Studies on nutritional evaluation and secondary metabolites of some selected curcuma species collected from eastern ghats of udayagiri hills, gajapathi district, odisha
Valsan et al. Preliminary phytochemical screening of indigenous medicinal plants Ocimum tenuiflorum, Ocimum basilicum, and Ocimum gratissimum
Kavalali The chemical and pharmacological aspects of Urtica
Whaley et al. The standardization of officinal medicinal plants used in the Eurasian Economic Union: comparison with other pharmacopoeias
Said et al. Tinospora cordifolia a Medicinal plant with many roles: A Review
CA2306818A1 (en) Pharmaceutical grade st. john&#39;s wort

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 97195565.4

Country of ref document: CN

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AL AM AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CN CU CZ EE GE GH HU IL IS JP KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LT LV MD MG MK MN MX NO NZ PL RO RU SG SI SK TJ TM TR TT UA US UZ VN YU AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH KE LS MW SD SZ UG AT BE CH DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN ML MR NE SN TD TG

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2252426

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 2252426

Country of ref document: CA

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/1998/008527

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1997922474

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1997922474

Country of ref document: EP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1997922474

Country of ref document: EP